PA 
 
 20 at 
 .Zsz 
 
 mSM 
 
 
 ■Hi 
 
 HHIHSH&ll 
 
 ;■,;.'.:■ 
 
 I 
 
 SI 
 
 VBSm 
 
 
V I B 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,v 
 
 % V* 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 xO O' 
 
 
 
 B h 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 **, ' 
 
 
 </ <? 
 
 VV" 
 
 
 ^ % : 
 
 
 c> 
 
 
 * A O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 . v I * / 
 
 O0 v 
 
 
 
 
 < a 
 
 111 \ v 
 
 x° ^ 
 
 ^ oT 
 
 i> -r* 
 
 <*% 
 
 
 "* <$> 
 
 
 
 K> V 
 
 % 
 
 << ' . 
 
 
 -0 % 
 
 
 -% 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 O0 x 
 
 v o 
 
 A* c 
 
 
 x^ 
 
 -/- * 8 1 A 
 
 •V s ' - 
 
 ,$ <k 
 
 o 
 
 <^ 
 
 
 
LATIN SYNTAX. 
 

 ,/ 
 
 SYNTAX 
 
 ft.V* 
 
 THE LATIN LANGUAGE, 
 
 CHIEFLY FROM 
 
 : v 
 THE GERMAN OF C. G. ZUMPT. 
 
 CHARLES BECK, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF LATIN IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 JAMES MTJNROE AND COMPANY. 
 
.H ,\ k .w/ >•«*«*»-»& 
 
 >>W 
 
 %1 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^v» 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1844, 
 
 By Charles Beck, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of 
 
 Massachusetts. 
 
 Mm lv 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 PRESS OF THURSTON, TORRY, AND CO. 
 
 31 Devonshire Street. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 A new edition of the Latin Syntax being re- 
 quired, the opportunity has been improved for 
 subjecting the whole work to a careful revision, 
 and for making such additions, alterations, and 
 corrections, as were thought to enhance the use- 
 fulness of the book. 
 
 The thanks of the Editor are due to Mr. Sanger, 
 Latin Tutor, for his kind assistance in correcting 
 the press. 
 
 CHARLES BECK. 
 
 Cambridge, June 15, 1844. 
 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Section I. Connection of Subject and Predicate . 1 
 
 USE OF CASES, 
 
 Section II. Nominative Case - 10 
 
 Section III. Accusative Case 12 
 
 Section IV. Dative Case . . .... 22 
 
 Section V. Genitive Case 35 
 
 Section VI. Ablative Case 50 
 
 Section VII. Vocative Case 66 
 
 USE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Section VIII 67 
 
 USE OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 Section IX. . 71 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES, 
 
 Section X. . 77 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS, 
 
 Section XI. Indicative Mood 90 
 
 Section XII. Subjunctive Mood .... 93 
 
 Section XIII. Imperative Mood 123 
 
 Section XIV. Infinitive Mood 125 
 
Vlll CONTENTS, 
 
 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 Section XV. . 146 
 
 USE OF THE GERUND. 
 Section XVI 158 
 
 USE OF THE SUPINES. 
 Section XVII. . . . 163 
 
 USE OF PARTICLES. 
 Section XVIII. . . . . , . . . .166 
 
 FIRST APPENDIX. 
 Of the Division of Syllables 173 
 
 SECOND APPENDIX. 
 Of the Roman Calendar . . . , • . . 175 
 INDEX 179 
 
SYNTAX. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 1. Syntax treats of the construction of propositions 
 and their connexion ; or of the use of cases, tenses, and 
 moods. 
 
 2. Every proposition consists at least of two parts, the 
 subject and predicate. 
 
 3. The subject of a proposition is that of which some- 
 thing is affirmed ; the predicate is that which is affirmed 
 of the subject, as prceceptor docet ; discipuli discunt. 
 Prceceptor and discipuli are the subjects; docet and 
 discunt the predicates. 
 
 4. The subject is, as to its form, either a substantive, 
 or an adjective, or pronoun instead of a substantive, 
 or an indeclinable part of speech, or a sentence. If an 
 indeclinable part of speech or a sentence be the subject, 
 they are considered and treated as substantives of the 
 neuter gender. 
 
 Aves volant. 
 
 Erubescunt puclici etiam impudica loqui. 
 
 Quidquid honestum est, idem est utile. 
 
 Lacrimas hoc mihi pane mo vet. 
 
 Scire tuum nihil est. 
 
 Dulce est pro patria mori. 
 
 Note 1. The subject is not always expressed, especially when 
 it is indicated by the termination of the verb, as dixi ; audivistis. 
 
 Note 2. An adjective in the singular is seldom the subject; it 
 is better to say homo probus neminem Icedit, than probus neminem 
 Icedit. Adjectives in the plural are more frequently used as 
 subjects, yet not without some limitation ; if an adjective is to 
 be joined to the subject, it is better to say multi viri docti, than 
 
 i 
 
2 CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 5, 6. 
 
 multi docti. Res with an adjective is generally preferred to the 
 neuter of the adjective alone : res facillimce scepe difficillimce sunt 
 aa\ inveniendum, instead of facillima scepe difficillima sunt ad in' 
 veniendum. 
 
 Note 3. The singular of an adjective in the neuter designates 
 the conception of the quality as a substantive, as, justum, the 
 conception of what is right. But if a thing is to be designated to 
 which the quality belongs, the plural is used, as, justa, right or 
 just things, right actions. 
 
 5. The predicate is, as to its form, either a verb, or 
 the auxiliary verb esse, with a noun (substantive or ad- 
 jective), participle, or adjective pronoun. 
 
 6. If the predicate is a verb, it agrees with the subject 
 in number ; as, arbor viret ; arbores virent. If it is the 
 auxiliary verb esse, with an adjective, participle, or ad- 
 jective pronoun, esse agrees in number, and the adjective 
 parts of speech in number and gender also with the sub- 
 ject, as ille puer est modestus ; hi libri sunt met ; hcec 
 prata sunt viridissima. If a substantive with esse forms 
 the predicate, the substantive is not affected in its num- 
 ber and gender by the subject, as, captivi militum prceda 
 fuerunt ; amicitia vinculum quoddam est hominum inter 
 se. It is only when there is a double form of a substan- 
 tive, the one for the masculine, the other for the feminine, 
 as rex, regina ; magister, magistra ; inventor, inventrix ; 
 corruptor, corruptrix ; preceptor, prceccptrix, that the 
 gender of the substantive can follow that of the subject, 
 as, 
 
 Licentia rerum corruptrix est morum. 
 
 Stilus optimus est dicendi effector et magister. 
 
 The masculine rather than the feminine is used with 
 the neuter, as tempus vitae magister est. In epicene 
 nouns the gender of the termination is followed, as, 
 
 Aquila volucrum regina, fida ministra Jovis. 
 
 Note 1. The auxiliary verb esse is sometimes omitted, as, 
 Summum jus summa injuria (est). 
 
 Note 2. A substantive, adjective, participle, and adjective pro- 
 noun alone can be joined to the auxiliary verb esse. If an adverb 
 be joined to esse, the latter is not the auxiliary but a principal 
 verb, signifying to exist, to be in a condition, as, 
 
 Rectissime sunt apud te omnia. 
 Sic vita hominum est. 
 
6. CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 3 
 
 Note 3. Collective nouns, that is, nouns which in the singular 
 signify a number of individuals, have, in poetry, sometimes, a 
 plural verb, but not in prose, except when the connexion between 
 subject and predicate is obscured by the interposition of inter- 
 mediate clauses, or when after one verb in the singular, the verb 
 of the following clause in the plural refers to the individuals 
 implied in the collective noun, as, 
 
 Cuneus is hostium, qui in confertos circa ducem impetum 
 feceratj ut exanimem labentem ex equo Scipionem vidit, alacres 
 gaudio cum clamore per totam aciem nunciantes discurrunt* 
 
 Ita omnium populorum juventus Antium contractu ibi castris 
 positis hostem opperiebantur. 
 
 Jam ne nocte quidem turba ex eo loco dilahebatur, refracturos- 
 que carcerem minabantur. 
 
 From the rule that the verb should be in the singular after a 
 collective noun, there are several exceptions in Livy (2, 5: de- 
 sectam segctem magna vis hominum immissa corbibus fudere in 
 Tiberim, and others ;) very few in Caesar and Sallust, and none 
 in Cicero. 
 
 Note 4. The verb in the plural is frequently used by good 
 prose authors (but not by Cicero) after uterque, quisque, (especially 
 pro se quisque), pars-pars with the signification of alii-alii, alius 
 alium, and alter alterum. 
 
 Eodem die uterque eorum ex castris stativis exercitum educunt. 
 Cetera multitudo decimus quisque ad supplicium lecti. 
 Pro se quisque dextram ejus amplexi grates habebant velut prae- 
 senti deo. 
 
 Pars navium hausta sunt, plures ejectae. 
 
 Alius alium, ut praelium incipiant, circumspectant. 
 
 Note 5. There are some apparent or real exceptions from the 
 rule, that the adjective part of speech should agree in gender with 
 its substantive. Sometimes the adjective is used in the neuter, 
 having in fact become a noun, as triste lupus stabulis ; varium et 
 mutabile semper femina ; omnium rerum mors est extremum. 
 Sometimes, when substantives by metaphor signify men, the ad- 
 jective follows the gender of the persons meant. 
 
 Capita conjurationis ejus quaestione ab consulibus ex senatus 
 consulto habita virgis casi ac securi percussi sunt. 
 
 Quod unquam hujusmodi monstrum aut prodigium audivimus 
 aut vidimus, qui cum reo transigat, post cum accusatore decidat. 
 
 Primum ilia furia muliebrium religionum (Clodius), qui non 
 pluris fecerat Bonam Deam quam tres sorores, impunitatem est 
 assecutus. 
 
4 CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 7, 8. 
 
 After millia the adjective part of speech sometimes follows the 
 gender of the persons. 
 
 Duo millia Tyriorum crucibus affixi per ingens litoris spatium 
 pependerunt. 
 
 Ad septem millia hominum in naves impositos praeter oram 
 Etrusci maris Neapolim transmisit. 
 
 Note 6. If the substantive of the subject is in a different num- 
 ber from that of the predicate, the verb esse, and verbs signifying 
 to be called, to be considered, take the number of the subject. 
 
 Qua? omnia sine dubio vitae sunt eversio. 
 
 Praecipuum robur Rhenum juxta octo legiones erant. 
 
 Angustice, unde procedit Peloponnesus, Isthmos appellantur. 
 
 Many instances, however, and perhaps more, occur where these 
 verbs agree with the substantive of the predicate. 
 
 Aude nunc, o furia, de tuo consulatu dicere, cujus fuit initium 
 ludi compitalitii. 
 
 Amantium tree amoris integratio est. 
 
 Pars non minima triumphi est victimce praecedentes. 
 
 Contentum suis rebus esse maximae sunt certissimaeque divitice. 
 
 Note 7. The choice of the gender or number is generally in- 
 fluenced by the position of the words. Thus, the verb agrees, 
 sometimes, with a noun in an intermediate clause, contrary to th% 
 logical order of the sentence, as, 
 
 Sed et cariora semper omnia, quam decus atque pudicitiafuit. 
 Quis igitur ilium consulem, nisi latrones, putant. 
 
 7. Adjectives, participles, or adjective pronouns, im- 
 mediately connected with a substantive, so as to consti* 
 tute with it one idea, agree with it in number, gender, 
 and case. 
 
 Huic modesto puero credo. 
 Hanc modestum virginem diligo. 
 
 8. When two substantives are thus immediately con- 
 nected, it is called an apposition, in which the one word 
 is explained or limited by the other, as oppidum Pcestum, 
 arbor laurus, Taurus mons, lupus jriscis, Socrates vir sa- 
 pientissimus. The substantive in apposition agrees in case 
 with the substantive which is to be explained, as Socra- 
 
9. CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 5 
 
 tern sapient i sshmnn virum Athenienses inter feeerunt. The 
 number and gender may be different, as, urbs Atkence, 
 pisces signnm, (" the fishes," a constellation) ; formosum 
 pastor Corydon ardebat Alexin, delicias domini. When the 
 substantive in apposition has two genders, that is chosen, 
 which corresponds with the gender of the substantive to 
 be explained. The predicate, also, follows the substan- 
 tive which is to be explained, as Tulliola, deliciolae no- 
 stras, tuum m\muscu\xim jlagitat ; cum duo fulmina nostri 
 imperii subito in Hispania, Cn. et P. Scipioncs extincti 
 occidissent, for duo fulmina, though placed first, is but 
 apposition. But when plural names of places are ex- 
 plained by the apposition w*bs, oppidum, civitas, the predi- 
 cate generally agrees with these more familiar words, as, 
 Volsinii, oppidum Tuscorum opulentissimum, concrematum 
 est fulmine. 
 
 vitas philo sophia dux, o virtu tis indagatrix expultrixque 
 vitiorum. 
 
 Pythagoras velut genitricem virtutum frugalitatem omnibus 
 ingerebat. 
 
 Note. Other instances, also, are not unfrequently found of the 
 predicate agreeing with the substantive in apposition. Here, as in 
 the choice of the gender and number of the predicate, much de- 
 depends upon the arrangement of the words. 
 
 Corinthum patres vestri, totius Grascise lumen, extinctum esse 
 voluerunt. • 
 
 Illorum urbem (professus est) ut propugnaculum opposition esse 
 barbaris. 
 
 9. A relative or demonstrative pronoun, referring to a 9 
 noun in the same or another sentence, agrees with the 
 noun in gender and number. 
 
 Hcbc est nobilis ad Trasimenum pugna. 
 
 Non solum ea perspicis, qua geruntur, quceque jam gesta 
 sunt, sed etiam, qui cursus, rerum, qui exitus futurus sit. 
 
 Note 1. If the verb itself, or the sentence is referred to, it is 
 considered as a substantive of the neuter gender, and in this case 
 instead of quod, id quod is generally used. 
 
6 CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 10. 
 
 Timoleon, id quod difficilius putatur, multo sapientius tulit 
 secundam quam adversam fortunain. 
 
 Dicam tibi non tarn doctus quam, id quod est majus, expertus. 
 
 Note 2. If a substantive in a preceding clause, or the prece- 
 ding clause itself (considered, of course, as a substantive of the 
 neuter gender) is explained by another substantive with esse, or 
 the verbs which signify to call, and consider, (dicere, vocare, 
 appellare, nominare, habere, putare, etc.), the pronouns ought, 
 according to the above rule, to agree in number and gender with 
 the substantive to which they refer; and there are, indeed, some 
 instances. 
 
 Cohibere motus animi turbatos, quos Graeci nu-&r t nominant. 
 Spem in discordia Romana ponentes, earn impedimentum de- 
 lectui fore. 
 
 This is, nevertheless, not to be considered the usage of the 
 Latin language ; for, in the majority of cases, the pronoun agrees 
 with the following explaining substantive, and the regular con- 
 struction is to be considered the exception. 
 
 Levis est animi lucem splendoremque fugientis justam gloriam 
 qui est fructus verae virtutis honestissimus, repudiare. 
 
 Theba, quod Bosotiag caput est. 
 
 Animal plenum rationis et consilii, quem vocamus hominem. 
 
 Domicilia conjuncta. quas urbes dicimus, mcenibus sepserunt. 
 
 Extat ejus peroratio, qui epilogus dicitur. 
 
 Negat Epicurus (hoc enim vestrum lumen est) quemquam, qui 
 honeste non vivat, jucunde posse vivere. 
 
 Idem velle et idem nolle, ea demum firm a amicitia est. 
 
 Roma fanum Diana? populi Latini cum populo Romano fecerunt : 
 ea erat confessio caput rerum Romam esse. 
 
 Si omnia fa cienda sunt, qua amici velint, non amicitia tales sed 
 conjurationes putanda sunt. 
 
 If a substantive is to be distinguished, by a relative clause, from 
 other substantives of the same class, the pronoun follows the reg- 
 ular construction, that is, it agrees in number and gender with the 
 substantive to be defined. 
 
 Darius ad eum locum, quem Amanicas pylas vocant, pervenit. 
 
 Est genus quoddam hominum, quod Helotes vocatur. 
 
 Scipio JYasica, qui est Corculum appellatus (viz. that Scipio N.). 
 
 10 10. When the subject of a proposition consists of seve- 
 ral substantives in the singular, the predicate is usually 
 in the plural, if the substantives denote living beings, and 
 especially persons ; if they denote things without life, the 
 
10, CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. X 
 
 singular or plural may be used; if one of the substantives 
 should be a plural, the predicate must be in the plural. 
 
 Antonius et Octavianus vicerunt Brutum et Cassium. 
 
 Cum tempus necessitasque postulate decertandum manu est, et 
 mors servituti turpitudinique anteponenda. 
 
 Beneficium et gratia homines inter se conjungunt. 
 
 Vita, mors, divitice, paupertas omnes homines vehementissime 
 permovent. 
 
 Note 1. A difference in the sense can be traced in many, if not 
 in all, instances, according as the predicate is in the singular or 
 plural. If the several substantives form one conception, the pre- 
 dicate is in the plural. If the several substantives are to be 
 conceived as distinct, and the predicate as belonging severally to 
 each substantive, the latter is in the singular. 
 
 Hac ration e et Chrysippus et Diogenes et Antipater utitur 
 (each of them for himself). 
 
 Nam Leontinus Gorgias, Thrasymachus Chalcedonius, Prota- 
 goras Abderites, Prodicus Ceus, Hippias Eleus in honore magno 
 fuit (each of them separately was esteemed). 
 
 Et tamen Dionysius noster, qui est nobiscum, et Nicias Cous 
 non rebatur oppidum esse Piraeea. 
 
 Dixit hoc apud vos Zosippus et Ismenias, homines nobilissimi. 
 
 In poets, and particularly in Horace, the use of the singular is 
 frequent. 
 
 Note 2. When the two substantives, denoting persons, are con- 
 nected by the disjunctive conjunction aut, the verb may be in the 
 singular or plural, as, si Socrates aut Antisthenes dicer et ; and, 
 nee quemquam hoc errore duci oportet, ut, si quid Socrates aut 
 Aristippus contra morem consuetudinemque civiumfecerint locu- 
 tive sint, idem sibi arbitretur licere. When the substantives of 
 the subject are connected by aut — aut, the verb is in the singular, 
 as, nee enim nunc primum aut Brutus aut Cassius salutem liberta- 
 temque patriae legem sanctissimam et morem optimum judicavit ; 
 when by nee — nee, the verb is generally in the singular, some- 
 times in the plural, as, erant enim (acclamationes), quibus nee 
 senatus gloriari nee princeps possent. When the two subjects are 
 not two substantives, but pronouns of the first and second person, 
 or a noun with a pronoun, the plural seems to be indispensable, 
 as, haec neque ego neque tu fecimus ; quod in decemviris neque 
 ego neque Caesar hahiti essemus. 
 
 Note 3. When the subject is a substantive in the singular, 
 connected by cum with another substantive in the singular or 
 plural, we should expect the verb to be in the singular, but it is 
 more frequently in the plural. 
 
§ CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 11. 
 
 Tu ipse cum Sexto scire velim, quid cogites. 
 Ipse dux cum aliquot principibus capiuntur. 
 Ejus consilio Demosthenes cum ceteris, qui bene de re publica 
 mereri videbantur, populiscito in exsilium erant expulsi. 
 
 11 11. With respect to the gender of adjectives, partici- 
 ples, or pronouns, when they refer to several substantives, 
 the following is to be observed. 
 
 When the substantives are of the same gender, the ad- 
 jective, participle, or adjective pronoun takes this gender. 
 When they are of different genders, and denote persons, 
 the adjective, &c. is of the masculine gender, rather than 
 the feminine. In the case of things without life, and of 
 different genders, the neuter is used ; and if some of them 
 are with and some without life, either the neuter or the 
 gender of the thing with life. The rule is the same 
 whether the adjective part of speech be a part of the 
 predicate, or immediately connected with the subject. 
 
 Jam pridem pater mihi et mater mortui sunt. 
 
 Ninus et Semiramis, qui condiderunt Babylona. 
 
 Labor voluptasque, dissimilia natura, societate quadam inter se 
 juncta sunt. 
 
 Jane, fac ceternos pacem pacisque ministros. 
 
 Propter summam et doctor is auctoritatem et urbis, quorum 
 alter te scientia auger e potest, altera exemplis. 
 
 C. Duilius delectabatur a ccena rediens crebro funali et 
 tibicine, quce sibi nullo exemplo privatus sumserat. 
 
 It is still more common, especially where the nouns de- 
 note persons or things without life, to join the adjective, &c. 
 to one of the nouns, and leave it to be supplied with the 
 others. 
 
 L. Brutus exulem et regem ipsum et liber os ejus et gentem 
 Tarquiniorum esse jussit. 
 
 Thrasybulus contemptus est a tyrannis atque ejus solitudo. 
 Hominis utilitati agri omnes et maria parent. 
 
 Note 1. The instances are not few in which the adjective 
 part of speech is in the neuter, the several substantives signifying 
 things without life, whether masculine or feminine, being of the 
 same gender. , 
 
12. CONNEXION OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 9 
 
 Ira et avaritia imperio potentiora erant. 
 
 Fortunam nemo ab inconstant ia et temeritate sejunget, qua digna 
 certe non sunt deo. 
 
 Note 2. If a participle with esse or videriis the predicate, the 
 gender of the participle follows the noun which stands nearest. 
 
 Non omnis error stultitia est dicenda. 
 
 Paupertas mihi onus visum est miserum et grave. 
 
 12. When the personal pronouns ego, tu, nos, vos, 12 
 united with one or more nouns, are the subject, the predi- 
 cate follows the first person in preference to the second, 
 and the second in preference to the third. 
 
 Si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et suavissimus Cicero valemus. 
 Hoc jure et majores nostri et nos semper usi sumus. 
 Errasti, Rulli, vehementer et tu et nonnulli college tui. 
 
 Note 1. Very frequently the predicate is joined to one subject, 
 and left to be supplied to the other. 
 
 Vos ipsi et senatus frequens restitit. 
 £t ego et Cicero meus flagitabit. 
 
 Note 2. With regard to the relative pronoun, the above gen- 
 eral rule is observed. 
 
 Tu et pater, qui in convivio cratis. 
 Ego et tu, qui eramus. 
 
10 USE OF CASES. 13, 14. 
 
 USE OF CASES. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 NOMINATIVE CASE. 
 
 13 1. The subject of a proposition is in the nominative. 
 The substantive or adjective part of speech of the predi- 
 cate, is in the nominative, only when it is joined to the 
 subject by the verb esse, to be, and similar verbs, Jieri, 
 evader e, existere, to become ; manere, to remain ; apparere, 
 to appear; nasci, to be born; the passives signifying to be 
 named, appellari, diet, inscribi, nominari, perJiiberi, salu- 
 tari, usurpari, vocari ; passsives denoting to be elected or 
 appointed, capi, creari, declarari, designari, eligi, renun- 
 ciari ; and passives denoting to be esteemed, censeri, credi, 
 deprehendi, existimari, haberi, judicari, numerari, putari } 
 reperiri, videri. 
 
 Servus cum maim mittitur, fit libertinus. 
 
 M. Brutus per se homo magnus evaserat. 
 
 Galba medius inter Neronem et Othonem imperator extitit. 
 
 ScythcB perpetuo ab alieno imperio aut intacti aut invicti 
 mansere. 
 
 Rhetorica apud Romanos sero recepta est ; paullatim et ipsa 
 utilis lionestaque apparuit. 
 
 Qui natus est infelix, vitam tristem decurrit. 
 
 Qui erant cum Aristotele, Peripatetici dicti sunt, quiadisputa- 
 bant inambulantes in Lyceo. 
 
 De amicitia eo libro dictum est, qui inscribitur Lcelius. 
 
 Princeps in senatu tertium lectus est P. Scipio Africanus. 
 
 Servius Tullius magno consensu rex est declaratus. 
 
 Homines facilius in timore benigni, quam in victoria grati 
 reperiuntur. 
 
 Socrates est omnium sapientissimus oraculo A^oU'mis judicatus. 
 
 14 2. The personal pronouns ego, tu, ille, nos, vos, illi, 
 when they are the subjects of the verb, are expressed for 
 the sake of contrast or emphasis ; but otherwise they are 
 indicated by the termination of the tense. 
 
14. NOMINATIVE CASE. 11 
 
 Ego reges ejeci, vos tyrannos introducitis ; ego libertatem, 
 quae non erat, peperi, vos partam servare non vultis. 
 
 Note 1. In a single case, the construction of the accusative 
 with the infinitive (see sect. 14,6 et seqq.), the subject is not in 
 the nominative, but in the accusative ; and the predicate, which, 
 with the verbs mentioned above, stands in the nominative, like- 
 wise is in the accusative. 
 
 Note 2. Videri is used as a personal verb ; the instances, in 
 which it is used impersonally, are to be considered as exceptions. 
 
 Mihi videtur acerba semper et immatura mors eorum, qui im- 
 mortale aliquid parflnt. 
 
 Magnus fuit is, qui sonos vocis, qui infiniti videbantur, paucis 
 literarum notis terminavit. 
 
 Videturne tibi, inquit, C. C&sarcm de statu verbi contra te 
 satisque aperte satisque constanter pronunciassc? 
 
 Non mihi videtur ad bene vivendum satis posse virtutcm. 
 
 Note 3 Videri with the dative of the personal pronouns, as 
 videor mihi, videris tibi, videtur sibi, has the meaning to consider, 
 think, believe. Sometimes the pronoun of the first person is omit- 
 ted. 
 
 Amens mihi fuisse videor a principio (I seem to myself to have 
 been, I believe I have been). 
 
 Objurgavi senatum, ut mihi visits sum (as I think). 
 
 Fortunatus sibi Damocles vidcbatur esse. 
 
 Si hoc tibi intellexisse videris. 
 
 Satis docuisse videor (mihi, I think I have). 
 
 Saepe de L. Crasso videor audisse. 
 
 Audire vocem visa sum modo militis (mihi, I imagined to hear). 
 
 Note 4. The passive verbs, signifying to be said (dici, tradi, 
 jerri, prodi, perhiberi) are likewise used personally. The imper- 
 sonal use is very rare, with the exception of the perfect tense. 
 
 Tyndaridai fratres non modo adjutores in proeliis victoriae populi 
 Romani, sed etiam nuncii fuisse perhibentur. 
 
 Dicitur eo tempore matrem Pausaniae vizisse, eamque jam 
 magnam natu, postquam de scelere filii comperit, in primis ad 
 filium claudendum lapidem ad introitum aedis attulisse. 
 
 Note 5. The passives, audiri and nunciari, are also frequently 
 used personally, but not so exclusively. 
 
 Jam Casar a Gergovia discessisse audiebatur. 
 Oppugnata domus C. Caesaris nunciabatur. 
 
12 USE OF CASES. 15, 16. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 15 1. The accusative is the case of the object, and is 
 therefore joined to all transitive verbs, whether active or 
 deponent, to express the object of the action ; as, pater 
 amat (tuetur) filium. 
 
 If the verb is active, the same proposition may be ex- 
 pressed, without any change of sense, in the passive 
 voice, by the accusative of the object being made the 
 nominative of the subject, as,j6//ws amatur a patre. 
 
 Whether a verb be transitive or intransitive, depends 
 upon its meaning, which must be ascertained from the 
 dictionary. It is important to bear in mind, that there are 
 many English verbs which are both transitive and intran- 
 sitive, and which according as their transitive or intransi- 
 tive meaning is to be expressed, are translated by different 
 Latin verbs. For example, to increase, as a transitive verb, 
 corresponds to augere ; as an intransitive, to crescere. 
 
 16 2. Although according to the above rule, an intransi- 
 tive or neuter verb cannot govern an accusative, there 
 are many intransitive verbs which, when compounded 
 with certain prepositions, receive a transitive meaning. 
 These prepositions are, ad, ante, circum, in, inter, ob, 
 per, prce, prceter, sub, super, supra, trans, and also a, 
 cum, e. Such verbs are ingredi, invader e, decurrere, 
 percurrere, and many compounds of ire, as, inire, coire, 
 abire, prceterire, transire, subire ; of vadere, volare, and 
 
 jacere, stare, sedere. The active verbs of this class form 
 a complete passive, which intransitive verbs do not. 
 
 Pythagoras et ^Egyptum lustravit et Persarum magos adiit. 
 
 Veneris Stella, solem antecurrens et oriens ante liicem, Lucifer 
 appellatur. 
 
 Dies et noctes omnia nos undique fata circumstant. 
 
 Romanorum duces mare ingredientes immolare hostiam Aucti- 
 ons consueverunt. 
 
 Samnites descendunt in planitiem, quae Capuam Tifataque 
 interjacet. 
 
16. ACCUSATIVE CASE. 13 
 
 JDiligentissime semper ilium diem et illud munus solitus eras 
 obi re. 
 
 Plato JEgyptum peragravit, 
 
 Cappadocia intus habet coloniam Claudii Csesaris Archela- 
 idem, cjuam prcefiuit Halys. 
 
 Sum multum in Epicuri hortis, quos modo prceteribamus , 
 
 Epaminondas non recusavit, quominus legis poenam subiret. 
 
 Arethusa fluctus subterlabitur. 
 
 Romani ruinas muri supervctdebant. 
 
 Crassus Euphratcm nulla belli causa Iransire voluit. 
 
 Scipio colloquium haud abnuit. 
 
 Non eos solum convenire aveo, quos ipse cognovi, sed illos 
 etiam, de quibus audivi et legi. 
 
 Historia non debet egredi vcntatem. 
 
 Note 1. Those verbs are particularly to be noticed, which, be- 
 coming transitive verbs, receive a metaphorical meaning. Of this 
 kind are adire and convenire. to apply to, to meet some one ; aggredi 
 (adoriri), invadcre and incedcre, to attack, to assail ; anteire, ante- 
 venire, prcecedere, prccgredi, prcevenirc, to surpass ; coire,to con- 
 clude; ezcedcre and egredi. to exceed; obire, to visit, to perform ; 
 obsidere and circumsidere, to besiege ; subire. to undertake. 
 
 Note 2. Some intransitive verbs are connected with an accusa- 
 tive, because they have received a transitive signification, as, 
 horrere tenebras, to dread darkness, fastidire preces or mores 
 alicujus, to reject the request, to loathe the character, dolere vicem 
 tuam, to grieve at thy lot, gemerc, lacrimare, plorare casum hunc, 
 to lament this case, ludere allquem, to make sport of one, ludere 
 bonum civem, to act the part of a good citizen, lugere victoriam, 
 to mourn at the victory, manere hostium advenium, to encait the 
 arrival of the enemy, properarc or festinare mortem, to hasten 
 +death, ridere aliquem, to deride one. To this class belong the verbs 
 which signify to smell and taste of something, as, olere, redolere, 
 sapere,resipere ; olet uvguenta, piscis ipsum mare sapit, uvapicem 
 resipiens ; and metaphorically, olet peregrinum, redolet antiqui- 
 tatem. 
 
 Note 3. A farther extension of this usage appears in the follow- 
 ing phrases : dormire totam hiemem, tertiam cetatem vivere, nodes 
 vigilare. The accusatives hiemem, cetatem, and nodes seem to ex- 
 press duration, but it should be observed that these phrases admit 
 of being changed into the passive, the accusative becoming the 
 nominative, as, tota mild dormitur hiems, jam tertia vivitur aitas, 
 nodes vigilantur amarce. 
 
 Note 4. The accusative is sometimes connected with an intran- 
 sitive verb, when the substantive is of the same root with the 
 verb, or at least of a corresponding signification ; in such cases an 
 adjective is usually added, as vitam jucundam vivere, longamviam 
 
 "2 
 
14 USE OF CASES. 17, 18. 
 
 ire, gravem pugnam (prozlium) pugnare, alter ius gaudium gander e, 
 risum Sardonium ridere, similem ludum ludere, servitutem servire 
 durissimam, somnium somniare. 
 
 Note 5. The connexion of the neuter of pronouns and some 
 adjectives in the accusative with intransitive verbs is to be no- 
 ticed, as, hoclator, hoc non dubito, hoc pugno, id stomachor, id tihi 
 succenseo, id operant do, hoc laboro, Mud tibi non assentior, non 
 possum idem gloriari, unum omnes student. If, in these instances, 
 a noun were used instead of the pronoun or adjective, it could not 
 stand in the accusative, as hanc rem omnes student. 
 
 Dolores autem nunquam vim tantam habent, ut non plus habeat 
 sapiens, quod gaudeat, quam quod angatur. 
 
 Utrumque Icetor, et sine dolore corporis te fuisse, et animo va- 
 luisse. 
 
 I 7 3. The impersonal verbs, which express various feel- 
 ings, piget, pudet (puditum est), pcenitet, tcsdet, miser et 
 (miseritum est), veritum est, take an accusative of the per- 
 son affected, with a genitive of the object which excites 
 the feeling. See sect. 5, 9. 
 
 Sapientiam nunquam sui pcenitet. 
 
 Me civitatis morum piget tcedetque. 
 
 Sunt homines, quos libidinis infamiceque suae neque pudeat 
 ne que tcedeat. 
 
 Nunquam Atticum suscepti negotii pertcesum est. 
 
 Miser et te aliorum; tui nee miseret nee pudet. 
 
 Adolescentem vidi miserum, et me ejus miseritum est. 
 
 Cyrenaici, quos non est veritum in voluptate summum bonum 
 ponere. 
 
 IS 4. Decet and its compounds, condecet, dedecet, and 
 indecet, likewise govern an accusative, but they differ 
 from the preceding verbs in this, that they may have a 
 subject in the nominative, though not a person. 
 
 Candida pax homines, trux decet ir&feras. 
 Oratorem irasci minime decet, simulare non dedecet. 
 Juvenes confusa quaedam et quasi turbata non indecent. 
 
 Note. The following verbs, used impersonally, are joined to 
 the accusative according to their original construction ; juvat, 
 delectat, to he pleased ; fallit,fugit, prater it, to he ignorant of, not 
 to he aware. 
 
 Te hilari animo esse valde mejuvat. 
 
19. ACCUSATIVE CASE. 15 
 
 Nos, nisi me fallit, jacebimus. 
 
 Non mefugit Vetera exempla pro fictis fabulis jam haberi. 
 Keminem vestrum prmterit oranem utilitatem opportunitatemque 
 Siciliae consistere in re frumentaria maxime. 
 
 5. Verbs of teaching (doceo and its compounds edoceo, 19 
 dedoceo) and concealing (celo) have two accusatives of the 
 object, one of the thing, another of the person. 
 
 Antigonus iter, quod habebat adversus Eumenem, omnes 
 celabat. 
 
 Fortuna victos quoque belli artem docet. 
 
 Catilina juventutem, quam illexerat, multis modis mol&faci* 
 nor a edocebat. 
 
 Democritus nunquara putavissefc aliquid esse minimum, si a 
 Polyaeno geometriam discere maluisset, quam Mam etiam 
 ipsum dedocere. 
 
 Note 1. In changing the construction to the passive the 
 accusative of the person becomes the nominative. All these 
 verbs may be construed with the accusative of the thing, especi- 
 ally the neuter of a pronoun, in the passive. Latinae legiones 
 longa societate militiam Romanam edoctcz. Omnes belli artes 
 edoctus. They are, however, more frequently used with the 
 preposition de ; as, celatus sum a te de hac re, and doceo with the 
 ablative alone. 
 
 Non est profecto de illo veneno celata mater. 
 Credo celatum esse Cassium de Sulla uno. 
 D. Brutus fuit homo et Grascis doctus Uteris et Latinis. 
 Cicero per legatos cuncta edoctus. 
 • Sub Cn. Scipionis disciplina omnes militiae artes edoctus fuer at. 
 
 Note 2. Some verbs compounded with trans, transduco, trans- 
 jicio, transmitto, take a double accusative on account of the 
 omission of the preposition, which, however, is frequently added. 
 If the verb be in the passive, the accusative depending on trans 
 remains unchanged. The participles transjectus and transmissus 
 are used of the river as well as the person, as amnis transjectus ; 
 classis transmissa ; Marius in Africam transjectus. 
 
 Hannibal nonaginta millia peditum, duodecim millia equitum 
 Jberum transduxit. 
 
 Agesilaus Hellespontum Gopias trajecit. 
 
 Caesar multitudinem hominum trans Rhenum in Galliam trans- 
 duxit. 
 
 Belgae Rhenum antiquitus transducti. 
 
16 USE OF CASES. 20, 21. 
 
 20 6. The verbs which denote demanding, entreating, 
 inquiring, (posco, reposco, postulo, jlagito ; oro, quceso, 
 rogo ; consulo, interrogo, percontor) also admit a double 
 accusative, but not exclusively; since those of demanding 
 and entreating also take an ablative of the person with ab 
 or de ; those of inquiring, an ablative of the thing with 
 de, as, percontari aliquem de re. Peto, in the sense of 
 entreating, has always an ablative of the person with ab ; 
 quaro, I ash, with ab, de, or ex. 
 
 Nulla salus bello, pacem teposcimus omnes. 
 
 Legati Ennenses ad Verrem adeunt, eumque simulacrum 
 Cereris et Victoria reposcunt. 
 
 Pusionem quendam interrogat Socrates qucedam Geometrica. 
 
 Quod me de faciendis versibus rogas > incredible est, quam 
 egeam tempore. 
 
 Ego Masinissam de suo regno, ille me de nostra re publica 
 percontatus est. 
 
 Solebat ex me Deiotarus percontari nostri augurii disciplinam* 
 
 Queer it ex solo ea, quae in conventu dixerat. 
 
 Eadem secreto ab aliis qucerit. 
 
 Note 1. The double accusative is used especially when the 
 thing is indefinitely expressed by the neuter of a pronoun or ad- 
 jective. If the verb is in the passive, the accusative of the thing, 
 although not incorrect, is not very frequent, except in certain 
 phrases, as, sententiam rogatus, interrogatus testimonium* 
 
 Hoc te vehementer, mi Cornifici, rogo. 
 
 Illud te oro, ut in numero tuo diligentissimus sis. 
 
 Haec sunt ilia, qua, me ludens flagitabat 
 
 Note 2. Concerning the Greek Accusative, so called, see 13, 
 and sect. 6, 6, note 2. 
 
 21 7. Verbs of naming, esteeming, creating, choosing, show- 
 ing, are used in the active with two accusatives, of the 
 object and the predicate, and in the passive with two 
 nominatives, of the subject and predicate. Such verbs 
 are : dicere, vocare, appellare, nominare, nuncupare ; du- 
 cere, judicare, existimare,putare % habere, (arbitrari), also 
 intelligere, agnoscere, reperire, and invenire ; facere, (pass. 
 
 fieri), reddere, creare, deligere, designare, declarare ; se 
 
 prcebere, se praistare, se exhibere. 
 
22. ACCUSATIVE CASE. 17 
 
 Romulus urbem, quam condidit, Romam vocavit, 
 
 Ciceronem universus populus consulem declaravit. 
 
 Adversus Hannibalem Fabius Romae consul creatus est, 
 
 Scytharum gens antiquissima semper habita est, 
 
 Irani bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae. 
 
 Cn. Pompeius se auctorem meae salutis exhibuit. 
 
 Bene de me meritis gratum me prcebeo. 
 
 Note 1. According to this facio te certiorem, I inform you; 
 but the fact concerning which information is given, is put in the 
 genitive or in the ablative with de. 
 
 Certiorem me sui consilii fecit, 
 
 Eum de rebus gestis certiorem faciunt. 
 
 Note 2. With the verbs putare and habere, to consider, the 
 preposition pro with the ablative is sometimes used, apparently 
 for the accusative, but really with a somewhat different sense, 
 pro expressing an approximation to the person or state referred 
 to, as, habere pro hoste, to consider in the light of an enemy; pro 
 non dicto habere, to consider it as if it had not been said ; pro certo 
 putare, to consider it as good as certain. 
 
 8. The accusative is used to express the extent of time 22 
 and space ; therefore in answer to the questions, how far ? 
 how long ? how high? how broad? how deep? how thick? 
 and, of continuance of time, how long? Nunquam pedem 
 a me discessit; cogitationem sobrii hominis punctum 
 temporis suscipe ; a recta conscientia non transversum 
 unguem oportet discedere ; fossa duos pedes lata, or longa ; 
 tres annos mecum habitavit, ox per tres annos. 
 
 Campus Marathon ab Athenis decern millia passuum abest. 
 Quaedam bestiolae umim tantum diem vivunt. 
 Decern annos Troja a Graecis oppugnata est. 
 Lacrimans in carcere mater dies noctesque assidebat. 
 
 Note 1. The ablative is rarely used to express duration and 
 distance. But when the place where something happens is de- 
 scribed by the mention of its distance from another place, the 
 ablative as well as the accusative is used; and, in this connexion, 
 the strange transposition of ab is to be noticed, as if the ablative 
 were governed by it. 
 
 Scriptum est a Posidonio triginta annis vixisse Pansetium, 
 posteaquam libros de officiis edidisset. 
 Vixit annis undetriginta. 
 Gens Menisminorum abest ab Oceano dierum itinere viginti. 
 
 2* 
 
18 USE OF CASES, 23, 24. 
 
 Eodem die castra promovit, et millibus passuura sex a Csesaris 
 castris sub monte consedit. 
 
 Mille fere et quingentos passus castra ab hoste locat. 
 
 Jam non a tertio lapide (at a distance of three miles), sed ipsas 
 Carthaginis portas obsidione quatiebat. 
 
 Ab millibus passuum minus duobus castra posuerunt. 
 
 Note 2. Old, applied to the years of human life, is rendered 
 in Latin by natus, with an accusative of the time. 
 
 Decessit Alexander mensem unum annos tres et triginta natus. 
 
 Older and younger than is expressed by major and minor natus 
 with or without quam. 
 
 Qui de Vestali virgine capienda scripserunt, minorem quam 
 annos sex, majorem quam annos decern natam negaverunt capi 
 fas esse. 
 
 Dionysius major annos sexaginta natus decessit florente regno. 
 
 23 9. The names of towns, and often of the smaller islands, 
 are put in the accusative, when in answ 7 er to the question 
 whither ? without in or ad > which are required with the 
 names of countries, 
 
 Juvenes Romani Athenas studiorum causa proficiscebantur. 
 
 24 10. The rest of the construction of the names of cities 
 is this: if they denote the place whence, they are in the 
 ablative; if the place where, the singulars of the first and 
 second declensions are put in the genitive; all plurals and 
 nouns of the other declensions in the ablative. 
 
 Demaratus quidam Tarquinios Corintho fugit. 
 
 Dionysius tyrannus Syracusis expulsus Corinthi pueros do- 
 cebat. 
 
 Roma consules, Athenis archontes, Carthagine sufFetes, sive 
 judices, quotannis creabantur. 
 
 Note 1. It is to be considered an exception when on the one 
 hand names of countries are used without, and on the other 
 names of towns with, the prepositions in, ab, ex; of these ab 
 occurs most frequently. 
 
 Segesta est oppidum in Sicilia, quod ab iEnea fugiente a Troja 
 conditum esse demonstrant. 
 
 Legati ab Ardea Romam venerunt. 
 
24. ACCUSATIVE CASE, 19 
 
 Corpus Augusti decuriones municipiorum a Kola Bovillas usque 
 deportarunt; a Bovillis equester ordo suscepit, urbique intulit. 
 
 Note 2. But it is not to be considered as an irregularity, when 
 the preposition ad, in the signification of near, in the neighborhood 
 of, or in the direction of, is used. 
 
 Adolescentulus miles profectus sum ad Capuam, quintoque anno 
 post ad Tarentum quaestor. 
 
 Ad me legati venerunt in castra ad Iconium. 
 
 Rex Attalus P. Africano dona usque ad jYumantiam misit ex 
 Asia. 
 
 Cum Rhodanum trajecissem iterque ad Mutinam (towards, in 
 the direction of) dirigerem, in itinere de proelio facto Brutoque et 
 Mutina obsidione liberatis audivi. 
 
 Note 3. With regard to islands, not only those which have a 
 town of the same name, as Corcyra, Delos, Rhodus, Samos, but 
 also others, especially the smaller ones, are construed like the 
 names of towns. But the larger islands, as Britannia, Creta, 
 Eubcea, Sardinia, Sicilia, are used, like the names of countries, 
 with the preposition, and such instances, nsinde Sardinian* venit, 
 are to be considered as exceptions. 
 
 Pompeius Africam exploravit; inde Sardiniam cum classe ve- 
 nit. 
 
 Proditum est memorise ac Iiteris Latonam ex longo errore con- 
 fugisse Delon, atque ibi Apollinem Dianamque peperisse. 
 
 Caesaris milites cogebantur Corcyra atque Acarnania pabulum 
 supportare. 
 
 Dolabella Delo proficiscitur. 
 
 Conon plurimum Cypri vixit, Iphicrates in Thracia, Timotheus 
 Lesbi, Chares in Sigeo. 
 
 Note 4. The words urbs, oppidum, locus, when in apposition 
 to names of towns, as the place where any thing occurs, may be 
 in the ablative, even without in. In other cases the prepositions 
 are commonly used. 
 
 Archias Antiochiai natus est, celebri quondam urbe et copiosa. 
 
 Vespasianus Corinthi, Achaiae urbe, certos nuntios accepit de 
 interitu Galbaa. 
 
 Deliciarum causa et voluptatis cives Romanos Neapoli, in cele- 
 berrimo oppido, cum mitella ssepe vidimus. 
 
 Demaratus Corinthius se contulit Tarquinios, in urbem Etruriae 
 florentissimam. 
 
20 USE OF CASES. 24. 
 
 Cleoraenes dicit sese in terrain esse egressum, ut Pachyno, e 
 terrestri prasidio, milites colligeret. 
 
 When these words, with in 9 precede the name, the latter is in 
 the same case. 
 
 In oppido Adrumeto agitat. 
 
 Consul pervenit in oppidum Cirtam. 
 
 Fidenatium qui supersunt, ad urbem Fidenas tendunt. 
 
 Note 5. The addition of an adjective part of speech to the 
 name of a town does not, generally, affect the case, with this 
 exception, that it is more common to use a preposition, and es- 
 pecially in, with the ablative instead of the genitive. 
 
 Nihil video, quod operandum putem, cum ea plaga in Asia sit 
 accepta, in Illyrico, in Cassiano negotio, in ipsa Mezandrea, in 
 urbe, in Italia. 
 
 Capuam veni eo ipso die, quo tu Teano Sidicino es profectus. 
 
 Alter tilius Teuni Jlpuli apud matrem educatus est. 
 
 Numa Pompilius Curibus Sabinis habitabat. 
 
 Note 6. When names of countries and towns are united in the 
 same expression, Cicero observes the rule peculiar to each class 
 of words. 
 
 Verris flagitia non in Sicilia solum, sed in Achaia, Asia, Cilicia, 
 Pamphilia, Roma denique novimus. 
 
 Hanc rem (locutionem) deteriorem vetustas fecit et Roma et in 
 Graecia. 
 
 Note 7. Domus and rus, like names of towns, are used with 
 verbs of motion without prepositions, domum, (or domos, of more 
 than one) " home " ; rus, u into the country " ; domo and rure, 
 "from home, from the country " } domi and ruri, (which is more 
 common than rure) " at home, in the country." Domi also takes 
 the genitives mete, tua, sua, nostra, vestrce, and alienee. If any 
 other adjective is joined, it is better to use a preposition. If a 
 genitive be added, domi or in domo is used. Domum and domo, 
 also, take, yet not exclusively, the above pronouns without a 
 preposition : and domum is frequently used with a genitive with- 
 out the preposition in or ad. 
 
 Thraces navibus se committere non ausi domos dilapsi sunt. 
 Paulus iEmilius nihil domum suam preeter memoriam nominis 
 sempiternam detulit. 
 
 Ego rus ibo, atque ibi manebo. 
 
 Laslius et Scipio rus ex urbe tanquam e vinculis evolabant. 
 
 Veni consulis Antonii domum saepe salutandi causa. 
 
25. ACCUSATIVE CASE. 21 
 
 Princeps Academiae Philo cum Atheniensium optimatibus Mi- 
 thridatico bello domo profugit, Romamque venit. 
 
 Cum Tullius rure redierit, uiittam emn ad te. 
 
 Manlius Tit um filium, qui postea est Torquatus appellatus, ruri 
 habitare jussit. 
 
 Cum Verre postea in gratiam redisti, domi ejus aliquoties fuisti. 
 
 Haec eadem locutus sum domi mcce. 
 
 Nonne mavis sine periculo domi tuce esse quam cum periculo 
 alienee ? 
 
 Mihi quidem naturam animi intueuti multo dimYilior occurrit 
 cogitatio, qualis animus in corpore sit, tanquam alienee domi, quam 
 qualis, cum exierit. 
 
 In domo Ccesaris Clodius aliquando unus vir fuit. 
 
 Domi Cccsaris Clodius deprehensus est. 
 
 Quod cum audivisset adolescens, cum prima luce Pomponii 
 domum venisse dicitur. 
 
 Note 8. The words humus, helium, and militia are, in part, 
 used in a similar manner; namely, in the genitive, in answer to 
 the question where ? as humi ' ; on the ground"; and belli and 
 militice in connexion with domi ; as belli domique, or domi bellique, 
 and domi militiccque. But bcllo u in war," also occurs. Plautus 
 • uses vicinicB in the same manner. 
 
 A Romanis nihil belli ddmique nisi auspicato gerebatur. 
 
 Bonis consiliis sa?pe constituta est salus civitatis aut belli aut 
 domi. 
 
 Crassi et Caesaris virtus fuerat domi militiccque cognita. 
 
 Nihil domi, nihil militice. per magistratus geritur sine augurum 
 auctoritate. 
 
 Vinculum omnium doctrinarum videtur esse altius, quam ut id 
 nos humi strati suspicere possimus. 
 
 Proximae xicinice habitat. 
 
 11. With the interjections o, olie, ah, lieu, eheu, ecce, 25 
 en, hem, pro, an accusative is used of the thing or person 
 wondered at; as, o temporal o mores ! The accusative 
 is also thus used alone, as, hunccine hominem! hanccine 
 impudent icon, judiccs ! me miser urn, 
 
 O fallacem hominum spem fragilemque fortunam et inanes 
 nostras contentiones ! 
 
 Operant tuam multam, qui et haec cures, et mea expedias ! 
 
 Me caecum, qui haec ante non viderim ! 
 
 Quae, malum, est ista tanta audacia atque amentia ! 
 
22 use of cases. 26-28. 
 
 En miserum hominem ! 
 
 Pro deorum atque hominum fidem ! 
 
 Note 1. The vocative may also be used with the above and all 
 interjections, but is not so common as the accusative. 
 
 miser cum re turn hoc ipso, quod non sentis, quam miser sis ! 
 
 Note 2. Vce and hei are usually followed by a dative, as, vce 
 misero mild ! vce victis ! 
 
 Note 3. En and ecce are, perhaps, more frequently used with 
 the nominative. 
 
 Ecce nova turla atque rixa! 
 
 En metus vivorum existimationis ! 
 
 26 12. These prepositions govern an accusative case: 
 ad, adversus and adversum, ante, apud, circa and cir- 
 cum, circitcr, cis and extra, contra, erga, extra, infra, 
 inter, intra, juxta, ob, penes, per, pone, post, pr ester, 
 prope, propter, secundum, supra, trans, versus (placed 
 after the case), ultra, and in and sub when they denote 
 motion to a place- 
 
 27 13. The accusative is, chiefly in poets and later prose 
 writers who imitate the usage of poets, used after pas- 
 sive verbs, especially the perfect#participle and the ten- 
 ses formed with it, to designate more particularly the 
 part to which the expression is limited. This is the 
 Greek accusative. 
 
 Daphne pulchra verecundo suffunditur ora rubore. 
 
 Artabanus, ubi data fides a legatis reddendo dominationi 
 venisse, adlevatur animum. 
 
 Hannibal in castra rediit tacita cura animum incensus, quod 
 cum duce haudquaquam Flaminio simili futura sibi res esset. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 
 
 28 1. The dative, when compared with the accusative, 
 may in general be defined the case of the remote object; 
 
29, 30. DATIVE CASE. 23 
 
 and answers to the question to whom ? or for whom ? 
 with reference to whom ? As the accusative denotes that 
 which is effected or acted upon, as distinguished from the 
 effecting and acting subject, the dative denotes the per- 
 son or thing with reference to whom or which the sub- 
 ject acts or has a quality ; as, scribo vobis hunc libntm, 
 "I write for you this book." I write, the action; this 
 book, that which is effected ; for you, the persons with 
 reference to whom the action is performed ; pro sum tibi, 
 " I am useful to thee " ; further, suadeo tif)i, " I advise 
 thee," nuntio tibi, " I tell thee " ; in which cases the 
 following proposition, expressing what I advise or tell, 
 takes the place of an accusative. 
 
 2. Hence, both with transitive and with those intran- 29 
 sitive verbs, which commonly take no case, the dative is 
 used to express the relation to an object, to whose ben- 
 efit or injury something is done. This is called dativus 
 commodi sive incommodi. 
 
 Pisistratus sibi, non patrice, Megarenses vicit. 
 Homo non sibi soli natus erat sed patriae et suis. 
 Non schola, sed vitce discimus. 
 Si quid peccat Demea, mihi peccat. 
 
 3. Especially the verbs vacare, nubere, and suppli- 30 
 care are to be noticed. Vaco is properly / am free, 
 with a dative alicui rei, for a thing, therefore, I apply 
 myself thereto. Nubere means properly to veil, then of 
 the bride, who by the ancient custom was veiled, to veil 
 one's self, alicui viro for a man, therefore, marry a man. 
 Supplico means I am a suppliant, ask assistance, alicui of 
 some one. 
 
 Philosophies semper vaco. 
 
 Civitas Romana inter bellorum strepitum parum olim vacabat 
 liberalibus disciplinis. 
 
 Plures in Asia mulieres singulis viris solent nubere. 
 
 Yenus nupsit Vulcano ; Astarten Adonidi nupsisse proditum 
 est. 
 
 Neque Ccesari solum, sed etiam amicis ejus omnibus pro te, 
 sicut adhuc feci, libentissime supplicabo. 
 
24 USE OF CASES. 31. 
 
 Note. The dative of the personal pronouns is particularly to 
 be noticed, which is superfluous as to the general meaning of the 
 proposition, but gives a peculiar effect and liveliness to the ex- 
 pression, whence it is, in Greek grammar, called dativus ethicus. 
 
 Ad ilia mihi pro se quisque acriter intendat animum. 
 
 Quid mihi Celsus agit ? 
 
 Hie mihi quisquam misericordiam vocat ? 
 
 31 4. Further, the dative is used with all adjectives and 
 adverbs, whose signification requires another object to be 
 mentioned, for or against which, to whose benefit or injury 
 the quality expressed by the adjective or adverb is exerted. 
 To this class belong those which express the idea of 
 •profit or disprofit, pleasure or pain, friendship or hatred, 
 ease or difficulty, fitness or unfitness, equality or inequal- 
 ity, likeness or unlikeness, nearness, necessity. 
 
 Lupus cani similis est. 
 
 Fidelissimi ante omnia homini canis et equus . 
 
 Invia virtuti nulla est via. 
 
 Cunctis esto bent gnus, nulli blandus, paucis familaris, omni- 
 bus cequus. 
 
 Q. Publilius dictator leges secundissimas plebi, adversas nobi- 
 litati tulit. 
 
 Tullus Hostilius non solum proximo regi dissimilis sed fero- 
 cior etiam Romulo fuit. 
 
 Scientiae suavitate nihil est homnibus jucundius. 
 
 Note 1. Instead of the dative those adjectives which express 
 friendship or hatred may take an accusative with the prepositions 
 in, erga, adversus. Adjectives of profit and fitness (utilis and 
 aptus) and their opposites have the matter for which any thing 
 serves in the accusative with ad; as, homo ad nullam rem utilis, 
 locus aptus ad insidias ; but the person, for whom, is always in 
 the dative. 
 
 Note 2. Amicus, inimicus, and familiaris are properly adjec- 
 tives, and as such compared and joined to a dative ; as substan- 
 tives they are joined to a genitive and adjective; even in the 
 superlative they are sometimes joined to adjectives. Hostis, an 
 undoubted substantive, following the analogy of inimicus, takes 
 sometimes a dative. 
 
 Atticus non fortune sed hominibus solebat esse amicus. 
 Amicissimus nostrorum hominum. 
 Audivi te esse Casari familiar em. 
 
31. DATIVE CASE. 25 
 
 Diis hominibusque kostis. 
 
 Viros fortes et magnanimos veritatis amicos esse volumus. 
 
 Temperantia est libidinum inimica. 
 
 Note 3. The adjectives and adverbs which denote near and 
 related, as conterminus, propinquus, vicinus, jinitimus, ajfinis, are 
 used with the dative. But prope, with its degrees propior and 
 propius, proximus and proxime, has the accusative also ; and 
 ajjinis, in the signification of participating , the genitive also. 
 
 ^Ethiopia JEgypto est contermina. 
 
 Mala sunt vicina bonis. 
 
 Voluptatibus maximis fastiduim jinitimum, est. 
 
 Circumspicite hosce ipsos homines, qui huic ajjincs sceleri fu- 
 erunt. 
 
 Treviri proximi Rheno flumini sunt. 
 
 Ubii proximi Rhenum incoJunt. 
 
 Solent accusatores judicibus persuadere affinem esse alicujus 
 culpce eura, qui accusetur. 
 
 Note 4. Communis, common, peculiaris and proprius, peculiar, 
 contrarius, opposite, are joined to the dative, but also frequently 
 to the genitive. 
 
 Omni atati mors est communis. 
 
 Nobis propria est mentis agitatio atque sollertia, unde origo 
 animi coelestis creditur. 
 
 Viri propria maxime est fortitudo. 
 
 Aliae nationes servitutem pati possunt, populi Romani est pro- 
 pria libertas. 
 
 Atque hsec ita justitia propria sunt, ut sint virtutum reliquarum 
 communia. 
 
 • Calamitas communis est utriusque nostrum, sed culpa mea pro- 
 pria est. 
 
 Note 5. JEqualis, equal, and super stes, surviving, are joined 
 to the dative and genitive; the former, in the signification of 
 contemporary, having become a substantive. 
 
 Ennio aqua-lis fuit Livius, qui primus fabulam dedit. 
 
 Dionysius Syracusiorum tyrannus fuit et Philistus xqualis tempo- 
 rum illorum. 
 
 Utinam te, frater, non solum vita sed etiam dignitatis meag 
 superslitem reliquissem. 
 
 Apud Germanos probrosum superstitem principi suo ex acie 
 recessisse. 
 
26 tjsn of cases. 32. 
 
 Note 6. Similis and dissimilis, assimilis, consimilis, and par 
 and dispar, are joined to the dative when they denote physical, 
 to the genitive when moral, likeness or unlikeness, yet not with- 
 out exception. 
 
 Dux ille Graeciae nusquam optat, ntAjacis similes habeat decern, 
 at ut Nestoris. 
 
 P. Crassus, dum Cyri et Mexandri similis esse voluit, qui suum 
 cursum transcurrerant, et L. Crassi et multorum Crassorum in- 
 ventus est dissimillimus . 
 
 In civitate bellicosa plures Romuli quam Numa similes reges 
 putabat fore. 
 
 Simplex anirai natura est, neque habet in se quidquam admixtum 
 dispar sui atque dissimile. 
 
 32 5. In like manner the dative is used with those intran- 
 sitive verbs, which express the ideas just enumerated of 
 the adjectives, in the verbal form ; that is, the dative is 
 used with verbs, which signify to profit or hurt, to be 
 friendly or unfriendly, to please or displease; further, 
 with verbs which signify to command or serve, to trust or 
 distrust, to approach, to threaten, and be angry ; as pro- 
 sum, auxilior, adminiculor, opitulor, patrocinor, subvenio, 
 9uccurro, medeor — noceo, obsum, desum, officio, incommo- 
 do, insulto, insidior ; faveo, gratiflcor, indulgeo, ignosco, 
 studeo, parco, adulor, blandior, lenocinor, pcdpor, assenti- 
 or, assentor, respondeo — adversor, refragor, obsto, renitor, 
 rcpugno, resisto, invideo, cemulor, obtrecto, convicior, male- 
 dico ; placeo, arrideo — displiceo ; dominor, impcro (tran- 
 sitively to impose) — pareo, cedo, ausculto, obedio, obsequor, 
 obtempero, morigeror (morem gero), alicui dicto audiens 
 sum, servio, inservio, ministro, famulor, ancillor, prasto- 
 lor ; credo (transitively to confide), fido, confido, diffido ; 
 immineo, propinquo, appropinquo, impendeo, occurro ; mi- 
 nor, comminor, (both transitively also), irascor, stomachor, 
 succenseo. The impersonal verbs convenit, it is suitable, 
 conducit, and expedit. 
 
 Judicis est innocentice subvenire. 
 
 In civitate Romana nemini unquam infimo majores nostri pa- 
 tron urn deesse voluerunt. 
 
 Efficit hoe philosophia ; medetur animis, inanes sol licit udines 
 detrahit, cupiditatibus liberat, pellit timores. 
 
32. DATIVE CASE. 27 
 
 Antiochus se nee impensce nee labori nee periculo parsurum 
 pollicebatur, donee liberam vere Graeciam atque in ea principes 
 iEtolos fecisset. 
 
 Probus invidet nemini. 
 
 Demosthenes ejus ipsius artis, cui studebat, primam literam 
 non poterat dicere. 
 
 Mundus deo paret, et huic obediunt maria terraeque, et homi- 
 num vita jussis supremae legis obtemperat. 
 
 Indulge valetudini tuae, cui quidem tu adhuc, dum mihi de- 
 servis, servisti non satis. 
 
 JEtoli deserti erant ab Romanis, cui \m\fidebant auxilio, 
 
 Nemo alterius, qui suce confidit, virtuti invidet* 
 
 Non homini patrocinamur sed crimini. 
 
 Conon ad mare missus est, ut maritimis civitatibus naves 
 longas imperaret. 
 
 Note 1. The passive of these verbs is not to be used per- 
 sonally, but only impersonally : mihi invidetur et obtrectatur, 
 mihi incommodatur , mihi maledicitur, mihi parcitur, I am envied, 
 I am troubled, I am slandered, I am spared. 
 
 Note 2. Juvo and adjuvo take an accusative. Jubeo is an ex- 
 ception to the verbs of commanding; it corresponds to the 
 English bid, and is followed by the accusative with the infinitive. 
 
 Note 3. Medicor has, like medeor, the dative, but sometimes 
 also the accusative. 
 
 Note 4. Benedico as well as maledico is used with the dative; 
 in the signification to bless benedico occurs in ecclesiastical writers 
 only. 
 
 Note 5. Invideo is sometimes found as a transitive verb with 
 an accusative of the thing besides the dative of the person. Some 
 writers of the silver age (Pliny, Tacitus) use the ablative instead 
 of the accusative. 
 
 Invident nobis optimam magistram. 
 Non inviderunt laudes suas mulieribus viri Romani. 
 Quousque et tibi et nobis invidebis, tibi maxima laude, nobis 
 voluptate. 
 
 Ne hostes quidem sepultura invident. 
 
 Note 6. Fido and confido are used also with the ablative. 
 
 Est magni animi et prudentia consilioque fidentis praecipere 
 cogitatione futura. 
 
 Nemo potest aut corporis firmitate aut fortunae stabilitate 
 confidere. 
 
23 USE OF CASES. 32. 
 
 Note 7. Cedo has sometimes, like a transitive verb, an accu- 
 sative of the thing joined to the dative of the person, as cedo tibi 
 locum; but more frequently the thing is put in the ablative, as, 
 cedo tibi hortorum yossessione. 
 
 Note 8. Convenit, besides the meaning it is suitable, has that 
 of to come to an agreement, as, convenit mihi tecum de aliqua re. 
 
 Mihicum Deiotaro convenit, ut ille in meis castris esset cum suis 
 copiis omnibus. 
 
 Convenire aliquem, to meet some one. 
 
 Milium sua manu spargentem semen, qui missi erant, con- 
 venerunt. 
 
 Note 9. Several verbs have different meanings, according as 
 they govern different cases. Caveo tibi, I am concerned for thee; 
 aliquem or ab aliquo, or aliqua re, I guard against some one, or 
 something. 
 
 Titus securitati satis cavet. 
 
 Nostri consules regem inimicissimum moenibus jam appro- 
 pinquantem monuerunt, a veneno ut caveret. 
 
 Admonui te, ut considerares, quibus crederes, quos caveres. 
 
 Metuo and timeo tibi, I fear for thee; te or aliquid a te, I am 
 afraid of thee. 
 
 Legationem Romanorum vicinae gentes spernebant, simul tan- 
 tam in medio crescentem molem sibi ac posteris suis metuebant. 
 
 Atheniensis Clisthenes Junoni Samiae, cum rebus timeret suis, 
 iiliarum dotes credidit. 
 
 Ulysses ab Jljace sibi non injuria summum periculum metuebat. 
 
 Casum proelii Pharsalici nemo nostrum erat, quin timeret. 
 
 Volo, or cupioj and nolo tibi, I wish thee well or ill ; also tua 
 causa. 
 
 Hunc tu virum nactus, si me aut sapere aliquid aut velle tua 
 causa putas, ne dimiseris. 
 
 Caesar reperiebatfavere Dumnorigem et cupere Helvetiis propter 
 affinitatem. 
 
 Pompeio qui nolunt, iidem tibi, quod eum ornasti, non sunt 
 amici. 
 
 Consulo, prospicio, provideo tibi. I provide for thee; consulo te, 
 I consult thee. 
 
 Non universo hominum generi solum sed etiam singulis a diis 
 immortalibus consuli et provideri solet. 
 
 Consulite vobis, prospicite yatria. 
 
 Athenienses consuluerunt Apollincm Pythium, quas potissimum 
 religiones tenerent. 
 
33-35. DATIVE CASE. 29 
 
 Tempero and moderor aliquid, I arrange something ; mihi, or 
 animo, irce, lacrimis, I moderate ; tempero (mihi) ah aliqua re, I 
 abstain from something ; tempero tibi, I spare thee. 
 
 Moderari et animo et orationi, cum sis iratus, est non mediocris 
 ingenii. 
 
 Non recuso, quin, si cuiquam Verres ulla in re unquam tempe- 
 raverit, vos quoque ei temperetis. 
 
 Caesar homines inimico animo non temperaturos ab injuria et 
 maleficio existimabat. 
 
 6. Most verbs compounded with prepositions, especi- 33 
 ally those compounded with ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, 
 post, pra, sub, and super, and retaining in the composi- 
 tion the meaning of the prepositions, instead of repeating 
 the preposition or using a similar one with the case 
 belonging to it, may be joined with the dative, either as 
 transitives with an accusative, or as intransitives with- 
 out it. 
 
 Note. It should be particularly observed, that this rule relates 
 to those compounded verbs only in which the preposition pre- 
 serves its peculiar meaning, which is not the case with some verbs 
 compounded with ad and cum. Confugere, to take refuge in a 
 place or with someone, cannot be followed by the dative, because 
 the preposition has lost its peculiar meaning. This is still more 
 the case wkh confringere and corrumpere, con (cum) serving only 
 to strengthen the meaning of the verb. 
 
 7. The following are transitive; addo, affero, affigo, 34 
 adjicio, adjungo, adhibeo, admoveo, alligo, applico ; cir- 
 cumjicio ; comparo, compono, confero, conjungo ; immisceo, 
 impono, imprimo, incido, includo, infero, ingero, injicio, 
 insero, inuro ; interjicio, interpono ; objicio, offundo, op- 
 pono ; posthabeo, postpono ; prcefero, prceficio, prapono ; 
 suppono, substerno. 
 
 8. Of the second class (intransitives) are the verbs 35 
 accedo, acquiesco, adhcereo, alludo, annuo, arrepo, assideo, 
 adspiro ; antecello ; colicereo, colludo, congruo, consono, 
 consentio ; incumbo, indormio, innascor, inhesreo, initio, 
 invado, immorior, immoror ; interjaceo, intervenio ; obam- 
 bulo, obrepo, obversor ; prceeo, prcemineo, pr&sideo, prce- 
 valeo ; succumbo, supersto, supervenio, supervivo, and the 
 compounds of esse, adsum, insum, inter sum, prcesum > 
 subsum, supersum. 
 
 3* 
 
30 USE OF CASES. 35. 
 
 Note 1. It is well to observe the difference of the dative as 
 used with the verbs enumerated above (32), and as used with the 
 verbs of the present rule (33) ; with the former the dative is 
 necessary and depends upon the meaning of the verbs ; with 
 these the dative is used as an ahbreviation in the place of the 
 preposition with its proper case. 
 
 Note 2. In the above list those compounds only are mentioned 
 with which the dative is found most frequently. 
 
 Note 3. It is in general to be observed that, in good and sim- 
 ple prose, with most of these compound verbs, the preposition (or 
 an equivalent one) is repeated with its proper case. This is most 
 frequently done with the verbs compounded with ad, con, and in; 
 as adhibeo ; confero, conjungo, communico, comparo ; imprimo, 
 insum, inscriho, inter esse (in the sense of there is a difference). 
 
 Non facile quern dixerim plus studii quam Servium Sulpicium 
 ad omnes bonarum rerum disciplinas adhibuisse. 
 
 Medici gravioribus morbis periculosas curationes et ancipites 
 adhibere coguntur. 
 
 Cum maximis minima confero. 
 
 Parva magnis ssepe rectissime conferuntur. 
 
 In oratore perfecto inest philosophorum omnis scientia. 
 
 Thebanorum genti plus inest virium quam ingenii. 
 
 Note 4. Incumbere, in the signification of to apply one's self to 
 something, is usually connected with ad and in with the accusa- 
 tive ; in the signification of to rest upon, with the dative. 
 
 Pergite, ut facitis, adolescentes, atque in id studium, in quo 
 estis, incumbite. 
 
 Nullam moram interponendam putavi, quo omnes acrius gra- 
 viusque incumberent ad ulciscendas rei publicas injurias. 
 
 Alexander epistolam a Parmenione missam pulvino, cui incum- 
 bebat, subjecit. 
 
 Note 5. Assuefacio, to accustom, assuesco, consuesco,insuesco, 
 to accustom another or (with the omission of se) one's self to a thing, 
 are followed either by the dative or ablative. Acquiesco, to ac- 
 quiesce in something, is used in the same manner. 
 
 Carbonis patrio fuit instituto puro sermone assuefacta domus. 
 Apud Lacedaemonios disciplina Lycurgi, cui per septingentos 
 annos assueverant, sublata est. 
 
 Note 6. Occumbcrc is more frequently used with the ablative 
 morte, than the dative morti, sometimes with the accusative. 
 
 Cacus clava ictus morte occubuit. 
 
 Idcirco genueram. ut esset, qui pro patria mortem non dubitaret 
 occumbcre. 
 
36, 37. DATIVE CASE. 31 
 
 Note 7. As to the prepositions which, in case of repetition of 
 the preposition, may be used in the place of those of the com- 
 pounds : 
 
 For ad is used in; accedere in oppidum. 
 " in " ad; incumbere ad studia. 
 
 11 ob " in, ad, ante ; aliquid obrepit in animum ; obrepere 
 ad honores ; obambulare ante portas. 
 
 For pra is used ante; prcecurrere ante omnes. 
 tt p ro u ac i^ ante ; procumbere ante pedes, ad genua. 
 
 " sub u ad, in ; succedere ad or in urbem. 
 
 9. Other intransitive compounded verbs are construed, 36 
 even without a repetition of the preposition, with the same 
 case, which the preposition governs when it is not in 
 composition. This applies first, to the verbs compounded 
 with the prepositions ab, de, and ex ; as absisio, dbsti- 
 neo ; decedo, dejicio, depcllo ; evado, ezco, where the abla- 
 tive may also be deduced from their signification of a 
 division. Secondly, intransitives, compounded with cir- 
 cum, prater, trans, and a part of those compounded with 
 super, are used with the accusative ; as, circumeo, cir- 
 cumsideo, circumsisto, circumsto, circumvenio ; prcetereo, 
 prcetergredior, pr ester jluo, (and inter 'fluo), prcstervehor, 
 prcstcrvolo ; supergredior, supervado ; transeo, trano ; 
 transvolo. Others admit of either case, the dative or 
 accusative ; especially verbs signifying to. anticipate and 
 to surpass ; as antecedcre, anteire, antcvenire ; prcscedere, 
 prcecurrere, prcsgredi, prcsvenire. 
 
 Dies et noctes omnia nos undique fata circumstant . 
 
 Populus solet nonnunquam dignos prazterire. 
 
 Hannibal cum reliquis copiis Pyrenceum transgreditur. 
 
 Haec Fetialis, cum fines super scandit, haec portam ingrediens 
 peragit. 
 
 Attic us cum bidutim cibo se abstinuisset , levior morbus esse 
 coepit. 
 
 Fustuarium miles meretur, qui prasidio decedit. 
 
 Vulpecula evasit puteo. 
 
 Satis docuisse videor, hominis natura quanto omnes anteiret 
 ani?nantes. 
 
 Vestrae fortunes meis prcecedunt. 
 
 10. Finally; several of the intransitive verbs com- 37 
 pounded with prepositions assume a transitive meaning, 
 
32 USE OF CASES. 38. 
 
 and not only take an accusative in the active, but may in 
 the passive be used personally, which is not the case with the 
 preceding verbs ; particularly invado attack, alluo wash^ 
 ineo enter, adeo and convenio aliquem, accost, subeo, as peri- 
 culum, encounter, obeo and oppeto mortem, undergo and 
 seek death, obsideo besiege ; and the deponents adorior 
 and aggredior, attack, which of course have no passive. 
 But of the actives we may say, for example, Massilia 
 alluitur mari, hostes statim invadebantur, urbs obsidetur, 
 consilium nefarium initum est. 
 
 Note. The circumstance of the verb being used personally in 
 the passive, or not, determines whether it is to be considered a 
 transitive, or an intransitive with a preposition understood. 
 
 38 11. Adspergo and inspergo, circumdo and circumfundo, 
 dono and impertio, exuo and induo, are used, either with 
 an accusative of the thing and dative of the person, or 
 with an accusative of the person and ablative of the 
 thing ; e. g. circumdo alicui custodias, circumdo aliquem 
 custodiis ; whence, in the passive, custodice tibi circum- 
 dantur, or, (tu) custodiis circumdaris. So maculas ad- 
 spergo vitcB turn and maculis vitam tuam adspergo ; dono 
 tibi pecuniam and dono te pecunia ; impertio tibi laucles 
 and laudibus te impertio, fyc. Exuo tibi clipeum, induit 
 sibi torquem, or more commonly with the omission of the 
 dative of one's own person, exuo, induo vestem, 1 put off 
 (me), or on (me), a garment. Exuo te aliqua re is used 
 in a figurative sense, and signifies / rob thee of something. 
 Intercludo, I shut up, as hostibus fugam ; or in the sense 
 of to remove, aliquem aliqua re and ab aliqua re. Inter- 
 dico tibi aliquid, I forbid something to thee ; the con- 
 struction interdico te aliqua re is nowhere found, but a 
 mixture of the two interdico tibi aliqua re, I interdict 
 thee the use of something. 
 
 Orationi adspergentur etiam sales, qui in dicendo nimium 
 quantum valent. 
 
 Pythagoras ne Apollini quidem Delio hostiam immolare voluit, 
 ne aram sanguine adspergeret. 
 
 Parthi folia brati inspergunt potionibus. 
 
 Oleam sale inspergito. 
 
 Dionysius /bssam latam cubic ulari lecto circumdedit. 
 
39, 40. DATIVE CASE. 33 
 
 Deus animum circumdcdit corpore. 
 
 Equites Hannoni se circumfudtre. 
 
 Agesilaum amici, quod mel non habebant, cera circumfude- 
 runt. 
 
 Ciceroni populus Romanus ceternitatem immortalitatemque do- 
 navit. 
 
 Atticus Athenienses universos frumento donaiit. 
 
 Te exorabo, ut mihi tuae suavitatis aliquid impertias . 
 
 Doctrinis aetas puerilis impertiri debet. 
 
 Jam obduruimus et humanitatem omnem exuimus. 
 
 Caesar hostes omnes armis exuit. 
 
 A. Torquatuscum Gallo apud Anienem depugnavit, et ex 
 ejus spoliis sibi et tor quern et cognomen indvit. 
 
 Duabus quasi a natura induti sumus personis. 
 
 Pontis atque itinerum angustiae multiludini fitgam intercluse- 
 rant. 
 
 Galli consuetudine populi Romani commealibus nostros inter- 
 cludere instituunt. 
 
 Ariovistus omni Gallia inter dicit Eomanis. 
 
 Leges Caesaris jubent ei, qui de vi, itemque qui majestatis 
 damn at us sit, aqua et igni inter did, 
 
 12. With passive verbs the dative is sometimes used 39 
 alone, instead of ab with an ablative. 
 
 Quidquid in hac causa mihi suscepium est, Quirites, id omne 
 me rei publicae causa suscepisse confirmo. 
 
 Barbarus hie ego sum, quia non intelligor ulli. 
 
 Note. With the gerund and the future passive participle, which 
 is derived from the gerund, the dative is used instead of the abla- 
 tive with ab ; as moriendum mihi est. See sect. 15, 12. But for 
 this the dative with passive verbs might be considered altogether 
 a Grecism, inasmuch as the earlier prose writers, particularly 
 Cicero and Caesar, used it rarely, and, with six exceptions in 
 Cicero, only after the perfect passive participle and the tenses 
 formed with it. 
 
 13. Esse, with a dative of the person, means to have; 40 
 sunt mihi lib?*i } is equivalent to habeo libros, 
 
 Homini cum deo similitudo est. 
 
 An nescis longas re gibus esse manus. 
 
34 USE OF CASES. 41, 42. 
 
 Note. It is a Grecism, when Tacitus says : ut quibusque 
 bellum invitis aut cupientibus erat. 
 
 41 14. Mihi est nomen, therefore, is equivalent to I am 
 called, and the name itself may stand either in the nom- 
 inative, or in the dative by attraction to the dative of the 
 person. 
 
 Syracusis est fons aquae dulcis, cui nomen Arethusa est. 
 Consules leges decemvirales, quibus tabulis duodecim est 
 nomen, in aes incisas in publico proposuerunt. 
 
 Note. The same takes place with the passive expressions 
 datum, inditum, factum est nomen; e. g. Tarquinius, cui cogno- 
 men Superbo ex moribus datum. With the active verbs dare, 
 addere, indere, dicere, ponere, imponere, tribuere alicui nomen or 
 cognomen, the denomination is usually in the dative ) dare alicui 
 cognomen tardo et pingui ; but it is also found in the same case as 
 the word nomen or cognomen : e. g. puer, cui Ascanium parentes 
 dixere nomen. The name may also be put in the genitive, ac- 
 cording to the general rule, that when two substantives are con- 
 nected together, one of them takes the genitive; as, Q. Metellus 
 praetor, cui ex virtute Macedonici nomen inditum est ; but the 
 dative is to be considered as the peculiarly Latin construction. 
 
 42 15. With the verbs esse, dare, and venire, and others 
 of the same meaning, besides the dative of the person, 
 another is used to express the purpose and end. It an- 
 swers to the question, to what end? 
 
 Dare belongs to this class, not only in the simple sense 
 of giving, like mitto and relinquo, but also in that of 
 imputing ; apponere, ducere, habere, tribuere, and vertere, 
 have a similar meaning. The verb jprqficisci corresponds 
 to venire. 
 
 Virtutes hominibus decori gloriceque sunt. 
 
 Attalus, Asiae rex, regnum suum Romanis dono dedit. 
 
 Mille Plataeenses Atheniensibus adversus Persas auxilio vene- 
 runt. 
 
 Pausanias, quos Byzantii ceperat regis propinquos, huic muneri 
 misit. 
 
 Caesar quinque cohortes, quas minime firmas ad dimicandum 
 existimabat, castris prcesidio reliquit. 
 
 Vitio mihi dant, quod mortem hominis necessarii graviter fero. 
 
 Gloriari solebat Q. Hortensius, quod nunquam bello civili 
 interfuisset ; hoc Mi tribuebatur ignavice. 
 
43. 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 35 
 
 Note. There are many datives of this kind ; I give a thing 
 pramio, muneri, I leave something custodial, prasidio, something 
 is counted vitio, crimini, probro, opprobrio, laudi, saluti, utilitati, 
 emolumento, &c. To be noticed are also such datives as these, 
 esui, usui, derisui, cordi, cure, aliquid est; moreover canere 
 receptui, "to sound a retreat"; opponere pignori, "to give a 
 pledge." 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 1. When two substantives of different signification are 43 
 united with one another, (unless the one is added in 
 the same case with the other by way of explanation, 
 which is an apposition,) the one which denotes that from 
 which the other originates, or to which it belongs, or 
 which is the object of the action expressed by the other, 
 is in the genitive. This genitive, depending upon a 
 substantive, is in Latin of two kinds, the genitive of the 
 subject, or of the object. The genitive is subjective when 
 it denotes that which does something, or to which some- 
 thing belongs ; hominum facta, liber pueri ; it is objective, 
 when it denotes that which is the object of the action or 
 feeling spoken of; amor virtutis, tedium laboris, deside- 
 rium otii, remedium doloris. In English this latter rela- 
 tion of substantives is commonly expressed by prepositions. 
 Thus we cannot say virtue's love, &c, but the love of vir- 
 tue, the irksomeness of labor, the desire of ease. 
 
 Numa divini auctor juris fuit, Servius conditor omnis in civitate 
 discriminis ordinumque. 
 
 Jucunda est memoria preterit or urn malorum. 
 
 Custos virtutum omnium verecundia est. 
 
 Lucullus delectabatur mirifice lectione librorum, de quibus 
 audiebat. 
 
 Animi morbi sunt cupiditates immensae divitiarum, gloria, 
 dominationis, libidinosarum etiam voluptatum. 
 ■ Quid mihi erat utilius quam hominis nobilissimi atque honora- 
 tissimi conjunctio ? 
 
36 USE OF CASES. 43. 
 
 Note 1. Prepositions are sometimes used in Latin, instead of 
 the objective genitive, when perspicuity requires it ; yet by no 
 means so often as in English, where prepositions are commonly 
 used. 
 
 Nihil est tarn flexibile quam voluntas erga nos sensusque civium. 
 
 Hannibal Antiocho multa de fide sua et odio in Romanos cora- 
 memoravit. 
 
 Non solum in homines obsequia sed etiam in deos ceremonies 
 religionesque tolluntur. 
 
 Note 2. A combination of a subjective and objective genitive 
 in one expression, is not infrequent. 
 
 Pro veteribus Helvetiorum injuriis populi Romani ab iis pcenas 
 bello repetiit (for the old injuries which the Helvetii had done to 
 the Roman people). 
 
 C. Ccesaris pecuniarum translatio a justis dominis ad alienos 
 non debet liberalis videri. 
 
 Note 3. A substantive, especially verbaKsubstantives in or, ix 
 and io, may be connected with the genitive of a personal pro- 
 noun, which genitive is commonly objective, as miser icordiam 
 nostri habe, "have pity on us;" but instead of the subjective 
 genitive of personal pronouns the possessive pronouns are used. 
 There are, however, exceptions to both rules, as on the one 
 hand, ipse suus (for sui) fuit accusator ; terra altrix nostra (for 
 nostri); invldla tua (for tui) ; and on the other hand conspectus 
 vestri (for vester) venerabilis. In this connexion is to be noticed 
 mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, causa, for the genitives mei, tut, sui, 
 nostri, vestri causa (which are not used) ; for my sake, &c. 
 
 Misit filium non solum sui deprecatorem sed etiam accusatorem 
 mei. 
 
 Liber meus (not liber mei). 
 
 Ad Cyrum nobilissimum regem originem sui retulit (for origi- 
 nem suam). 
 
 Desiderium vestrum ferre non possum, 
 
 Vestra magis hoc causa volebam quam mea. 
 
 Filium tuum ea esse opinione et tua et ipsius et inprimis mea 
 causa gaudeo. 
 
 Note 4. To such a possessive pronoun the genitive of a pro- 
 noun or adjective referring to the person, implied in the possessive 
 pronoun, may be added. The genitive of a participle is some- 
 times, principally in poets, used in a like manner. This usage is 
 extended even to other adjectives. 
 
 Juravi rem publicam mea unius opera esse salvam. 
 Vestra ipsorum causa hoc feci. 
 
44. GENITIVE CASE. 37 
 
 Cum mea nemo scripta legat vulgo recitare timentis (for scripta 
 met timentis). 
 
 Hoc dicendi genus aptum videbatur ad senatoriam sententiam, 
 cujus erat ille princeps (for ad sententiam in senatu dicendam, 
 cujus erat princeps). 
 
 Note 5. It cannot be said that one genitive should not depend 
 upon another, inasmuch as there are instances in the best writers ; 
 but obscurity should be avoided. 
 
 Desinamus mirari, quae causa sit eloquentium paucitatis. 
 Juvabit me ipsum consuluisse memorise rerum gestarum princi- 
 pis t err arum populi. 
 
 Note 6. It is to be observed, that in some instances the geni- 
 tive is used in Latin where we should expect an apposition. This 
 is especially done with the nouns vox, nomen, verbum, and similar 
 ones. 
 
 Carum ipsum verbum est amoris, ex quo amicitiai nomen est 
 ductum (the term amicitia). 
 
 Triste est nomen ipsum carendi. 
 
 Metellus Macedonicus, qui se patris appellatione salutarent, 
 viginti septem reliquit. 
 
 Nocturnum frigus vehementius quam alias horrore corpora 
 affecit, opportunumque remedium ignis oblatum est (an opportune 
 remedy, viz. fire). 
 
 Collectis ceteris causis eluvionis, pestilentia, vastitatis, belluarum 
 etiam repentinge multitudinis , comparat quanto plures deleti sint 
 homines hominum impetu (having collected all other causes of 
 injury to men, viz. inundations, etc,). 
 
 Mala et impia consuetudo est contra deos disputandi (it is an 
 impious habit to speak). 
 
 2. The genitive is used to express that one thing is the 44 
 property or quality of another. This, however, can only 
 be done, when the substantive in the genitive is joined 
 with an adjective ; e. g. not homo ingenii, but homo ma- 
 gni, summi, excellent is ingenii. See the rules for the 
 ablative, sect. 6, 12. 
 
 Titus facilitatis tantce et liberalitatis fuit, ut nulli quidquam 
 negaret. 
 
 Tarquinius fratrem habuit Aruntem mitis ingenii juvenem. 
 4 
 
38 USE OF CASES. 45 
 
 Note 1. The genitive is used in a similar manner to denote the 
 number of which something consists, the extent, quantity, weight, 
 duration, age, etc. 
 
 Xerxis classis mille et ducentarum navium longarum fuit. 
 Julius Caesar annum ad solis cursum accommodavit, ut trecento- 
 rum sexaginta quinque dierum esset. 
 Colossus centum viginti pedum. 
 Corona parvi ponderis. 
 Aristides exilio decern annorum multatus est. 
 
 Note 2. The genitive must not be supposed to depend upon 
 esse ; but if no substantive is expressed, one must be understood, 
 as, homo, res, &c. 
 
 Magni judicii, summae ctiam facultatis esse debet orator. 
 Virtus non tantarum virium est, ut se ipsa tueatur. 
 
 Note 3. The following expressions, where the accusative is used 
 adverbially for the genitive, may be considered as exceptions. 
 Secus with the adjective virile or muliebre ; genus with the pro- 
 nouns hoc, id, illud, quod and the adjective omne ; and pondo with 
 the accusatives libram and libras. 
 
 Liberorum capitum virile secus ad decern millia capta. 
 
 Orationes aut aliquid id genus scribere (for ejus generis). 
 
 In verbis id genus, quae non declinantur. 
 
 Porticus avibus omne genus oppletae ( for omnis generis). 
 
 Dictator coronam auream libram pondo (weighing one pound) 
 in Capitolio Jovi donum posuit. 
 
 Paterae aureae fuerunt ducentas septuaginta sex libras ferme 
 omnes pondo. 
 
 45 3. The genitive is used to express the whole, of which 
 anything is a part (genitivus partitivus). This is done 
 with comparatives if two are spoken of, and superlatives 
 if more than two; e. g. cloctior duorumjuvenum, doctis- 
 simus Romanorum ; with all words which express a 
 number, whether numerals, adjectives, or pronouns ; 
 solus, nullus, nemo, nihil, multi, pauci, quis ? quotus- 
 quisque, unusquisque, aliquis, -quid-am, aliquot, nonnulli, 
 uter, alter, neuter, alteruter, utervis ; with such adverbs 
 as satis f parum, abunde, affatim, nimis ; and with nouns 
 which denote a measure or weight, as modius tritici, 
 libra f arris, magna vis auri. The genitive, which is 
 used with the superlative of adjectives, is used also with 
 those of adverbs ; e. g. optimus omnium, or optime omnium 
 vizit. 
 
45. % GENITIVE CASE. 39 
 
 Populus Romanus legem dedit, ut consilium alter e plebe 
 crearetur. 
 
 Grsecorum oratorum prastantissimi sunt ii, qui fuerunt Athenis, 
 eorum autem princeps facile Demosthenes. 
 
 Duo sunt aditus in Ciliciam ex Syria, quorum uterque parvis 
 praesidiis propter angustias intercludi potest. 
 
 Satis honorum, satis superque vital erat. 
 
 Pompeii Bithynici actio non satis commendabat orationem ; 
 in hac enim satis erat copiai, in ilia autem leporis parum. 
 
 Nonnulli nimis insidiarum ad capiendas aures adhibere vi- 
 dentur. 
 
 Note 1. With the above adjectives the genitive is not neces- 
 sarily used, but the adjectives may be put in the same case with 
 the noun ; multi milites is as correct as multi militum. 
 
 Note 2. Livy uses participles like partitives with the genitive ; 
 later prose writers and poets use even adjectives in the positive 
 degree. 
 
 Hannibal cum delectis peditum equitumque in Campaniam con- 
 tendit. 
 
 Nigra lanarum nullum colorem bibunt. 
 
 Note 3. The genitive cannot be used, if the numeral denotes 
 the number of which the whole consists. 
 
 Tarquinius sacella exaugurare statuit, qua aliquot ibi a Tatio 
 rege consecrata fuerant (which, being several in number). 
 
 Quaeritur, quot sint species rerum publicarum : quas tres ac- 
 cepimus, quae populi, quae paucorum, quae unius pote6tate rege- 
 rentur. 
 
 Note 4. The prepositions ante, de, ex, in, and inter, with their 
 respective cases (but never ah), serve as a circumlocution for the 
 genitive. 
 
 Acerrimus ex omnibus nostris sensibus est sensus videndi. 
 
 M. Calidius non fuit orator unus e multis; potius inter multos 
 prope singularis. 
 
 Themistocles noctu de servis suis, quem habuit fidelissimum } ad 
 regem misit. 
 
 * Alexander non salutari sed adorari se jubet ; acerrimus inter 
 recusantes Callisthenes fuit. 
 
 Thales sapientissimus in septem fuit. 
 
 Romulus fuit longe ante alios acceptissimus militum animis. 
 
40 USE OF CASES, ' 46- 
 
 Note 5. liter, alter, and neuter differ from quis, alius, and 
 nullus in this respect, that the former refer to a whole consisting 
 of two. 
 
 Note 6. As to the two forms of the genitive plural, nostri 
 vestri, and nostrum vestrum, it is to be observed that the latter is 
 the genitivus partitivus, the former the objective genitive. 
 
 Vitam omnium vestrum vobis conservatam ac restitutam videtis. 
 Incertum est, quam longa nostrum cujusque vita futura sit. 
 Maneat, quaeso, gentibus, si non amor nostri, at certe odium 
 sui. 
 
 Habetis ducem memorem vestri, oblitum sui. 
 
 It is to be noticed, however, that vestrum is sometimes found 
 without being a partitive genitive. Nostrum and vestrum are al- 
 ways used in connexion with omnium. 
 
 Noli me ad contentionem vestrum revocare. 
 Vestrum non sum securus. 
 Patria est communis omnium nostrum parens. 
 Tenentur ii, qui ad urbis incendium, ad vestrum omnium csedem 
 Romae restiterunt. 
 
 46 4. The nominative and accusative neuter of pro- 
 nouns, and of some adjectives which are used as pro- 
 nouns, take a genitive, either because they have virtually 
 become substantives, or because they denote a part of a 
 whole. Such neuters are tantum, quantum, aliquantum, 
 multum, plus, plurimum, minus, minimum, aliud, quid 
 with its compounds aliquid, quidquid, quippiam, and 
 quidquam ; hoc, id, illud, istud^ idem, quod. Nihil is 
 always a substantive. 
 
 It is to be observed, that these neuters can be used as 
 substantives only in the nominative and accusative, be- 
 cause it is only in those cases that they can be distin- 
 guished by the form from the masculine and feminine. 
 Further ; they must not depend on prepositions. 
 
 Quantum incrementi Nilus capit, tantum spei in annum est. 
 Procellae quanto plus habent virium, tanto minus temporis. 
 Pythagoras, cum in geometria quiddam novi invenisset, Musis 
 bovem immolasse dicitur. 
 
 Note 1. The genitive is often not a substantive, but the neuter 
 of an adjective, which has come to be used substantively, as 
 quiddam novi. It must be here remarked, that only adjectives in 
 urn can be used in this way ; and though aliquid novi may be said, 
 
46. GENITIVE CASE. 41 
 
 aliquid memorabilis cannot, but only aliquid memorabile, unless it 
 be in connexion with a neuter in urn, as, aliquid novi ac memora- 
 bilis. 
 
 Quanto, si quidquam in vobis non dico civilis sed humani esset, 
 favore vos indulgere comitati patrura atque obsequio plebis 
 oportuit. 
 
 Note 2. The adverbs of place, ubi, ubicunque, usquam, nus- 
 quam, {longe), unde, hie, hue, eo, eodem, quo, aliquo, are joined 
 with the genitives gentium, ten-arum, loci, locorum, and by that 
 addition have their meaning strengthened ; e. g. ubinam gentium 
 sumus? abes longe gentium ; aliquo terr arum migrandum est ; ubi 
 terrarum es? quo loci sum, i. e. ubi sum; eodem loci res est, quo 
 tu reliquisti. Terence has hie, hue vicinia, for here, hither in the 
 neighborhood. The adverbs hue, eo, quo, take, in the sense of de- 
 gree, also other genitives : hue arrogantia venerat, "he had come 
 to that degree of arrogance"; eo insolently furorisque processit ; 
 scire videmini, quo amentim progressi sitis. Minime gentium is 
 merely a stronger negation ; not in the least. 
 
 Ubi terrarum esses, ne suspicabar quidem. 
 
 Migrandum Rhodum aut aliquo terrarum arbitror. 
 
 Perseus perfugium sibi nusquam gentium esse ait. 
 
 Nostri tyrannicidae longe gentium absunt. 
 
 Quodsi hominibus magna cura esset, eo magnitudinis procede- 
 rent, ubi pro mortalibus gloria aeterni fierent. 
 
 Eo con&uetudinis adducta res erat, ut quocunque noctis tempore 
 porta aperiretur. 
 
 Note 3. The genitive seems to be pleonastically added in the 
 following expressions, which denote a point of time; turn {tunc) 
 temporis, " at that time " ; postea loci, " afterwards " ; ad id loco- 
 rum, " so far " ; postridie and pridie with ejus diet ; interea loci, 
 and adhuc locorum, "in the meanwhile," u and till now," in the 
 comic writers. Jn the phrase quantum or quoad ejus fieri potest, 
 or facere possum, ejus refers to the preceding proposition ; " so 
 much of it," or " so far as it is possible." 
 
 Astyages filiam ex gente obscura tunc temporis Persarum Cam- 
 bysi in matrimonium tradidit. 
 
 Postridie ejus did Caesar Bibracte ire contendit. 
 
 In senatu pulcherrime stabamus, quod jam illam sententiam 
 Bibuli de tribus legatis pridie ejus diei fregeramus. 
 
 Note 4. The peculiar expressions id temporis, id or hoc cetatis, 
 for eo tempore, ea or hoc atate, are to be noticed. Tacitus uses in 
 imitation of this, Romanorum nemo id auctoritatis aderat, for ea 
 auctoritate. 
 
 Venit ad me, et quidem id temporis. 
 Homo id cetatis. 
 
 4* 
 
42 use of cases. 47, 48. 
 
 47 5. -In poets and later prose writers (that is, after 
 Cicero), the neuters of adjectives in the singular, and 
 particularly in the plural, acquire a substantive signi- 
 fication, and are joined with a genitive; as exiguum campi 
 ante castra erat, " a little free space," where the com- 
 mon phrase is cxiguus campus ; further, in ultima Asia 
 penetrare for the common in ultimam Asiam ; summa 
 tectorum obtinere for summa tecta. 
 
 Apelles Veneris caput et summa pectoris politissima arte 
 perfecit. 
 
 Tarquinius et Collatinus Lucretiam in medio cedium sedentem 
 inveniunt. 
 
 Extremo cestatis patres Livium redire ad urbem jusserunt. 
 
 Note. Sometimes, however, the plural of neuter adjectives, 
 used substantively, has a peculiar meaning, as incerta, subita belli, 
 u the uncertain, sudden events of the war/' 
 
 Plana urbis Tiberis stagnaverat, 
 
 48 6. Many adjectives, particularly those which signify 
 sharing, desiring, being full, knowing, remembering, or 
 their contraries, are used with the genitive of a substan- 
 tive or pronoun : They are called relative adjectives. 
 
 The following in particular are construed in this way; 
 particeps, affinis, expers, inops, consors and exsors ; cu- 
 pidus, studiosus, avidus, avarus ; plenus, inanis, capax, 
 insatiabilis, fecundus, fertilis, ferax, sterilis ; peritus, 
 imperitus, rudis, conscius, inscius, nescius, gnarus> igna- 
 rus, prudens, providus ; insolens and insolitus or insuetus ; 
 compos, impos, patens and impotens ; memor, immemor, 
 tenax, curiosus, incuriosus. 
 
 Pythagoras sapientia siudiosos appellavit philosophos. 
 Conscia mens recti famse mendacia ridet. 
 , Themistocles peritissimos belli navalis fecit Athenienses. 
 
 Ventura? memor es jam nunc estote senectce. 
 Nescia mens hominum/^i sortisque futurse. 
 
 Note 1. The poets and those prose writers who affect to differ from 
 the common language, especially Tacitus, extend this rule and 
 construe all adjectives expressing an affection of the mind, with 
 the genitive of the thing to which the feeling is directed; as, 
 ambiguus consilii ; modicus v olup latum ; securus futuri ; piger 
 
49. GENITIVE CASE. 43 
 
 pcriculi i benignus vini ', cerlus sceleris ; dubius via ; impiger mili- 
 tia, etc. 
 
 Note 2. The same class of writers use the genitive after ad- 
 jectives, where the common language would employ the ablative; 
 as integer vita ; diver sus morum ; zetus operis ac laboris. 
 
 Note 3. Particularly to be noticed is the frequent addition of 
 animi to many adjectives, as, agcr, anxius, atrox, aver sus, cacus, 
 captus, covfidens, confusus, inccrtus, tcrritus, validus, exiguus, 
 ingens, modicus, immodicus, nimius. Verbs also denoting anx- 
 iety, and more rarely those denoting joy, are used with the geni- 
 tive animi, even in Cicero. 
 
 Absurde facis, qui te angas animi. 
 Ego quidem vehementer animi pendeo. 
 Recreabar animi. 
 
 Note 4. Refertus is usually joined to an ablative, being the 
 participle of a verb denoting fullness; plenus in the older prose 
 rarely. Jurisperitus and jurisco?isultus, as well as jureperitus and 
 jureconsultus (by abbreviation Ictus) are used. 
 
 Domus (Antonii) erat aleatoribus referta, plena ebriorum. 
 
 Note 5. Conscius is joined to the genitive and dative of the 
 thing. 
 
 Cadis conscia fuerat. 
 
 Huic facinori tanto mens tua conscia esse non debuit. 
 
 7. Participles of the present active, when, after the 49 
 manner of adjectives, they express a permanent quality, 
 and not a single action or transient state, govern the 
 genitive, and admit of comparison. Those occurring 
 most frequently in this way are : amans, appetens, colens, 
 fugiens, intelligens, metuens, negligent, observans, reti- 
 nens, tolerans, patiens and impatiens, temperans and zra- 
 temperans ; e. g. amans patriae ; Gracchi amantissimi 
 plebis Romance ; appetens laudis ; fugiens laboris ; im- 
 minentium intelligens ; officii negligcns ; miles patiens or 
 impatiens solis, pulve?'is, tempestatum. Miles patiens 
 frigus means a soldier who, in a particular instance, 
 bears cold, miles patiens frigoris, means one who always 
 bears it, is capable of bearing it. 
 
 Epaminondas adeo fuit veritatis diligens-, ut ne joeo quidem 
 mentiretur. 
 
 Roman i semper appetentes gloria prater ceteras gentes atque 
 avidi laudis fuerunt. 
 
44 USE OF CASES. 50, 51. 
 
 Alphenus est eques Romanus locuples, sui negotii bene 
 gerens. 
 
 Sumus natura appetentissimi honestatis. 
 
 Sanctus haberi justiticeque tenax factis dictisque mereris. 
 
 50 8. With verbs of remembering, reminding, and forget- 
 ting (admonere, commoner e 9 commonefacere ; meminisse, 
 reminisci, recordari, in mentem venire, oblivisci), the per- 
 son or the thing, of which any one reminds himself or 
 another, or which he forgets, is put in the genitive; 
 frequently also the thing is put in the accusative. 
 
 Medicus, ut primum mentis compotem esse regem sensit, 
 modo matris sororumque modo tantae victories appropinquantis 
 admonere non destitit. 
 
 Hannibal milites adhortatus est, ut reminiscerentur pristinae 
 virtutis suae, neve mulierum liberumque obliviscerentur . 
 
 Illud semper memento ; qui ipse sibi sapiens prodesse nequit, 
 nequidquam sapit. 
 
 Tu, C. Caesar, oblivisci nihil soles nisi injurias, 
 
 Non omnes possunt esse Scipiones aut Maximi, ut urbium 
 expugnationes, ut pedestres navalesque pugnas, ut bella a se 
 gesta triumphosque recordentur. 
 
 Note 1. With the verbs of reminding, besides the accusative 
 of the person, the accusative of the thing is commonly used only 
 when expressed by the neuter of a pronoun. 
 
 Discipulos id unum moneo, ut praeceptores suos non minus quam 
 ipsa studia anient. 
 
 Jugurtha viritim, uti quemque extulerat, commonefaciebat bene- 
 ficii sui. 
 
 Earn rem locus admonuit. 
 
 Note 2. With verbs of remembering or forgetting, the person 
 remembered or forgotten is rarely put in the accusative. 
 
 Note 3. Memini, recordor, and moneo with its compounds, are 
 sometimes used with the preposition de. 
 
 De homine importunissimo ne meminisse quidem volo. 
 
 51 9. The impersonal verbs, pudct, piget, posnitct, tadtt, 
 miser et,miseretur, miserescit, require the person who is the 
 subject of the feeling to be in the accusative case, and 
 the object which excites it in the genitive ; or, if it 
 
52. GENITIVE CASE. 45 
 
 be a verb, in the infinitive mood, or with quod, or an inter- 
 rogative particle. 
 
 Me non solum piget siultitia meae, sed etiam pudct. 
 
 Eorum nos magis miseret, qui nostram misericordiam non re- 
 quirunt, quam qui illam efflagitant. 
 
 Socratem non puduit fateri se multas res nescire. 
 
 Non poenitet me vixisse, quoniam ita vixi, ut non frustra me 
 natum existimem. 
 
 Quintum poenitet, quod animum tuum offendit 
 
 Disces, quamdiu voles ; tamdiu autem velle debebis, quoad te, 
 quantum proficias, non pcenitcbit. 
 
 Adolescentem vidi miser um, et me ejus miscritum est. 
 
 Note 1. Misercor and miseresco, when used personally, to take 
 pity upon, are also joined with the genitive ; miser emini sociorum ; 
 misertus tanti viri ; generis misercsce tui. On the other hand, 
 miserari and commiserari govern the accusative. 
 
 Deos immortales miscritos nominis Romani pepercisse innoxiis 
 exercitihus patres credebant. 
 
 Non queo satis communem omnium nostram/oriwriam miserari. 
 
 Note 2. Pvdet, frequently without an accusative, means also 
 to he put to the blush, to be ashamed of the presence of some one or 
 something. 
 
 Pudet hujus legionis, pudet quarta, quae pari virtute nostram 
 auctoritatem probans non ut consulem et imperatorem suum sed ut 
 hostem et oppugnatorem patriae reiiquit Antonium ; pudet optimi 
 exercitus, qui conjunctus est ex duobus; " this legion puts us 
 to the blush," &c. 
 
 Me tui pudet. 
 
 Nonne te hujus templi, non urbis, non vital, non lucis pudet? 
 
 10. The verbs of valuing, esteeming, and their pas- 52 
 sives (cesti?nare, taxare, ducere, facer e (pass, fieri), ha- 
 here, pendere, put 'are, and esse); verbs of buying, selling, 
 lending, or hiring [tmcre, vendere, conducerc, locare, and 
 as passives in sense, stare and constare, to cost ; prostare, 
 licere, to be exposed ; and venire), take a genitive of the 
 price or value, when expressed by an adjective indefi- 
 nitely. If it is expressed by a substantive, the price is 
 put in the ablative. See sect. 6, 5. Such genitives are 
 magni, permagni, pluris^ plurimi and maximi, parvi, 
 
46 USE OP CASES. 52. 
 
 minoris, minimi, tanti, quanti, tantidem, quantivis, quan- 
 ticunque; but never (or very seldom) multi and majoris. 
 
 Si prata et hortulos tanti cestimamus , quanti est cestimanda 
 virtus ? 
 
 Mea mihi conscientia pluris est quam omnium sermo. 
 
 Mercatores non tantidem vendunt, quanti emerunt. 
 
 Agere considerate pluris est quam cogitare prudenter. 
 
 Pluris putare, quod utile videatur, quam quod honestum, 
 turpissimum est. 
 
 Note 1. Besides the above genitives, the following: assis, 
 flocci, nauci, pensi, pili, (particularly with habere or more com- 
 monly non habere), nihili, and hujus, are to be noticed. 
 
 Intellectum est judices rem publicam ftocci non facere. 
 
 Noli spectare, quanti homo sit ; parvi enim pretii est, qui jam 
 nihili sit. 
 
 Non habeo nauci Marsum augurem. 
 
 M. Porcius Cato L. Flaminium e numero senatorum sustulit, 
 quia in provincia quendam damnatum securi percusserat, nee 
 pensi duxerat regis Philippi supplices manus. 
 
 Quod te purges, hanc injuriam mihi nolle factam esse, hujus 
 non faciam. 
 
 Note 2. Instead of nihili, pro nihilo is sometimes used. 
 
 Qui magno est animo atque forti, omnia, quae cadere in homi- 
 nem possint, despicit et pro nihilo putat. 
 
 Note 3. The expressions eequi boni or aqui bonique facere, con- 
 sulere ; boni consulere, " to consider something right and good, ,, 
 "to be satisfied," belong to this class. 
 
 Consul est a consulendo vel a judicando; unde adhuc remanet 
 illud : Rogat, boni consulas, id est, bonum judices. 
 
 Si vos, i^toli, nee cura Argorum civitatis nee periculum movet, 
 nos Rom an i aqui bonique facimus. 
 
 Note 4. The ablatives magno, permagno, plurimo, parvo, 
 nihilo, also are used with those verbs, although the ablative is 
 properly the case for the specified amount of the price. In par- 
 ticular they are used with verbs of buying, and selling, where the 
 genitive of those five words is not common, while the genitives 
 are the most frequent with the verbs of prizing ; therefore, con- 
 duxit in Palatio non magno domum ; decumas ejus agri permagno 
 vendidisti ; frumentum suum quam plurimo vendere ; parvo fames 
 constat, magno fastidium, " hunger costs little, satiety much." It 
 
53. GENITIVE CASE. 47 
 
 may be assumed, that this use of the genitive and ablative came 
 from the omission of the word pretii and pretio ; rem illam magni 
 sestimo, i. e. magni pretii ; or magno emi for magno pretio emi ; 
 which sometimes occurs. 
 
 Chrysogonus vas Corinthium tanto pretio mercatus est, ut, qui 
 praetereuntes pretium enumerari audiebant, fundum venire arbi- 
 trarentur. 
 
 Note. 5. Sometimes, but not frequently, the abverbs care, bene, 
 male, with their comparatives and superlatives, are used with 
 verbs of buying, selling, and prizing. 
 
 Ea emptione nos bene emisse judicati sumus. 
 Qusecunque in me bona sunt aut fortunae beneflcio tributa aut 
 meo labore parta a te propter amorem carius sunt aistimata. 
 
 Note 6. The genitive of the price is also used with the verbs 
 ccenare and habitare, as, quanti habitas, what is the price of thy 
 lodging. 
 
 11. The genitive is used to denote the crime or offence 53 
 with verbs of accusing, convicting, K condemning, acquit- 
 ting; accuso , incuso , arguo, insimulo, interrogo, increpo, 
 infamo; convinco, coarguo; damno, condemno ; absolvo, 
 libero, pur go, together with words which express, citing 
 before a court, as ago, arcesso, cito, defero, postulo, reum 
 facto, diem dico, with omission of the word crimine " on 
 the charge, accusation. " 
 
 Such genitives are, peccati, maleficii, sceleris, cadis, 
 veneficii, parricidii,furti, repetundarum, peculatus, falsi, 
 injuriarum, rei capitalis, proditionis, majestatis ; farther, 
 probri, stultitice, avaritice, audacice, vanitatis, levitatis, 
 temeritatisy ignavice, timoris, impietatis, and others. 
 
 Miltiades proditionis est accusatus, quod, cum Parum ex- 
 pugnare posset, a pugna discessisset. 
 
 Thrasybulus legem tulit, ne quis ante actarum rerum accusa- 
 retur, neve multaretur. 
 
 Quis non frangeret inferiorum libidines, nisi illi ipsi, qui eas 
 fr.angere deberent, cwpiditatis ejusdem tenerentur. 
 
 Coelius judex absolvit injuriarum eum, qui Lucilium poetam 
 in scena nominatim laeserat. 
 
 Note 1. To this class of verbs some adjectives, with the mean- 
 ing of participles, are to be joined : reus, compertus, noxius and 
 innoxius, insons, manifestus. 
 
48 USE OF .CASES. 54. 
 
 Hie dives, qui statuam pauperis inimici flagellis cecidit, reus est 
 injuriarum. 
 
 De manifestis rerum capitalium more majorum supplieium 
 sumendum. 
 
 Praetor homines sacrilegii compertos in vinculis Romam misit. 
 
 Note 2. The genitive of the crime is to be explained by sup- 
 plying the ablative crimine " on the charge," or nomine " under 
 the name or head " ; and these words are not unfrequently added. 
 
 Alcibiades postulabat, ne absens invidice crimine accusaretur. 
 Servi Leonidae nomine sceleris conjurationisque darnnati sunt. 
 
 Note 3. The preposition de is sometimes used instead of the 
 genitive. 
 
 Pilius de repetundis M. Servilium postulavit. 
 Non oportuit Sextium de vi reum fieri. 
 
 Note 4. The punishment to which one is sentenced is also ex- 
 pressed by the genitive, less frequently by the ablative, or the 
 prepositions ad or in ; as, capitis, mortis, multce, pecuniae, quadru- 
 pli, octupli ; or capite, morte, multa, pecunia ; or ad poenam, ad 
 bestias, metalla, in metallum f in expensas " to the costs." Voti or 
 votorum damnari, " to be condemned to fulfil one's vow," that is, 
 " to obtain one's wish." 
 
 Multi animos, quasi capite damnatos , morte multant. 
 
 Socratis responso sic judices exarserunt, ut capitis hominem 
 innocentissimum condemnarent. 
 
 Caligula multos honesti ordinis ad metalla et munitiones viarum 
 aut ad bestias condemnavit. 
 
 Furius dictator inter ipsam dimicationem eedem Junoni Monetae 
 vovit; cujus damnatus voti, curn victor Romam revertisset, di- 
 ctatura se abdicavit. 
 
 54 12. With the omission of the idea res, negotium, the 
 genitive is used with esse in the sense of belonging to, 
 being the business, office, or lot of any one, and with fieri 
 in the sense of becoming the property of; e. g. estjudicis, 
 " it is the business of a judge " ; non est mearum virium, 
 "it is not an undertaking for my strength " ; Asia Ro- 
 manorum facta est, "Asia came under the dominion of 
 the Romans." 
 
 Instead of the genitives of the personal pronouns, mei> 
 tui, sui, nostri, vestri, the neuters meum, tuum, suum, no- 
 strum, vestrum, are used in this sense. 
 
55. GENITIVE CASE. 49 
 
 Cujusvis hominis est errare, nullius nisi insipientis in errore 
 perse verare. 
 
 Sapientis judicis est semper, non quid ipse velit, sed quid lex 
 et religio cogat, cogitare. 
 
 Bello Gallico praeter Capitolium omnia hostium erant. 
 
 Tuum est, M. Cato, qui non mihi, non tibi, sed patriae natus 
 es, videre, quid agatur. 
 
 Omnia, quae mulieris fuerunt, viri Jiunt dotis nomine. 
 
 Rudem esse omnino in poetis inertissimae segnitice est. 
 
 Est hoc Gallicae consuetudinis , ut viatores etiam invitos con- 
 sistere cogant, et, quod o^uisque eorum de quaque re audierit 
 aut cognoverit, quaerant. 
 
 Philodamus negavit moris esse Graecorum, ut in convivio 
 virorum accumberent mulieres. 
 
 Note 1. Instead of this elliptical expression a complete one is 
 sometimes used, though more rarely. 
 
 Non horum temporum, horum hominum atque morum ncgotium. 
 Proprium est animi bene constituti lsetari bonis rebus. 
 Principum munus est resistere levitati multitudinis. 
 Neutiquam officium liberi esse hominis puto, cum is nil mereat, 
 postulare id gratiae apponi sibi. 
 
 Note 2. As the neuter of the possessive pronoun is used in the 
 place of the genitive of the personal, so the neuter of an adjec- 
 tive may be used in the place of the corresponding noun; as 
 humanum, regium, iinperatorium, Romanum est for hominis, regis, 
 imperatoris, Romani. 
 
 13. A similar ellipsis takes place with interest and 55 
 refert, it concerns, it is of importance, joined with a geni- 
 tive of the person whose interest is concerned. Here too 
 instead of interest mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, use is made 
 of the possessive pronouns, but in another case, the abla- 
 tive feminine, mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra. Some pas- 
 sages in Terence render it probable that these pronouns 
 are not the accusative plural, as was formerly thought, 
 but the ablative singular, causa being understood. * 
 
 The thing in which any one's interest is involved is 
 not expressed by a substantive, but by an infinitive, an 
 accusative with an infinitive, by ut, or the interroga- 
 tive particles with a subjunctive : as, rnultum mea interest, 
 ut diligens sis, or, te esse diligentem, or, (utrum) diligens 
 sis nec?ie. 
 
 5 
 
50 USE OF CASES. 56. 
 
 Semper Milo, quantum interesset P. Clodii se perire, cogitabat. 
 
 Caesar dicere solebat non tarn sua quam rei publicm interesse, 
 uti salvus esset. 
 
 Quid refert, utrum voluerim fieri, an factum gaudeam. 
 
 Inventse sunt epistolae, ut certiores faceremus absentes, si quid 
 esset, quod eos scire aut nostra aut ipsorum interesset. 
 
 Interest omnium recte facere. 
 
 In sole lucernam adhibere, nihil interest. 
 
 Non refert videre, quid dicendum sit, nisi id queas solute et 
 suaviter dicere. 
 
 Note 1. The nominative of a noun in one instance in Cicero 
 is to be noticed (ad Attic. 3, 19) : Itaque in Epirum ad te statui 
 me conferre ; non quo mea interesset loci natura, qui lucem 
 omnino fugerem ; sed ad salutem libentissime ex tuo portu pro- 
 ficiscar. 
 
 Note 2. Refert is, not, indeed, in Cicero, but in other writers^ 
 connected with the genitive of a person. 
 
 Ipsorum referre, si quos suspectos status praesens rerum faceret, 
 prohiberi potius, ne quid moliri possint, quam punire molientes. 
 
 Note 3. The degree of importance is expressed by adverbs, or 
 by the neuters of adjectives, or by their genitives ; magis, magno- 
 pere, vehementer, parum, minime, tarn, tantopere : multum, plus^ 
 plurimum, permultum, infinitum, mirum quantum, minus, nihil, 
 aliquid, quiddam, tantum, quantum; tanti, quanti, magni, per- 
 magni, parvi. 
 
 Note 4. The object with regard to which one is interested, is 
 expressed by ad, sometimes by the dative. 
 
 Magni ad honorem nostrum interest, quam primum ad urbem me 
 venire. 
 
 Flavius dicebat, non referre dedecori, si citharcedus demovere- 
 tur et tragcedus succederet. 
 
 56 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 1. The ablative is used in the Latin language to ex- 
 press certain relations of substantives, which in Eno-lish 
 are expressed by prepositions. 
 
57, 58. ABLATIVE CASE. 51 
 
 2. The ablative is used with passive verbs to express 57 
 the acting subject, which in the construction with the 
 active voice is in the nominative : as, sol munduni illu- 
 strat; passive: sole mundus illustratur ; fecunditas arborum 
 me delectat, fecunditate arborum delector. But if this 
 acting subject is a person, the preposition ab is used, with 
 the single exception of the participle of the verb H to be 
 born/' natus ; and in poets editus, genitus, ortus, satus. 
 
 Dei providentia mundus administrate. 
 
 Illud tibi affirmo fore, ut absens a multis, cum redieris, ab 
 omnibus collaudere. 
 
 Filii justa uxore nati. 
 
 Publius Africanus fidem fecit non sanguine humano sed 
 stirpe divina satum se esse. 
 
 Note. The preposition a is used, as stated above, also after in- 
 transitive verbs which may be interpreted as having a passive 
 meaning, as, vapulare (verberari), venire (vendi), bene or male 
 audire (laudari or vituperari). 
 
 Testis in reum rogatus est, an ab reo fustibus vapulasset. 
 
 3. Similar to this is the use of the ablative, to express 58 
 the efficient cause (ablativus causce) with adjectives, 
 where the periphrasis of the passive construction might 
 
 be used, as fessus, ceger, saucius, and with intransitive 
 verbs ; as doleo fratris morte. In this latter case, a change 
 to the transitive construction cannot be made with the 
 same verb, but with some similar transitive verb, as fratris 
 mors me angit, and passively, fratris morte angor. Lacri- 
 mabat gaudio may be changed into gaudium lacrimas ei 
 eliciebat, and passively, gaudio lacrimce ei eliciebantur. 
 
 Saepe homines cegri morbo gravi, cum aestu febrique jactantur, 
 si aquam gelidam biberint, primo ielevari videntur. 
 
 Minturnenses C. Marium fessum inedia jluctibusque recrea- 
 runt. 
 
 Nimio gaudio paene desipiebam. 
 
 Concordia res parvae crescunt, discordia maximae dilabuntur. 
 
 Diversis duobus vitiis, avaritia et luocuria, civitas Romana 
 laborabat. 
 
 Delicto dolere, correctione gaudere nos oportet. 
 
 Note 1. For this ablative, the ablative of cause, the prepositions 
 propter and per can be used, and with persons must be used; as 
 infelix sum, or doleo propter te. With transitive verbs the cause 
 
52 USE OF CASES. 59. 
 
 is expressed not by the ablative merely, but by the preposition 
 propter or causa with a genitive preceding, as, hoc feci propter 
 amicitiam nostrum, or amiciticc nostras causa ; or with the posses- 
 sive pronouns, mea, tua causa, etc. Sometimes a periphrasis is 
 used with the participles ductus, motus, captus ; as, hoc feci ami- 
 citia ductus. 
 
 Quod enim praemium satis magnum est tam benevolis, tam 
 bonis, tam fidelibus servis, propter quos (Milo) vivit ? 
 
 Quotiescunque me petisti,^er me tibi obstiti. 
 
 Homines novis affinitatibus adducti veteres inimicitias seepe 
 deponunt. 
 
 Note 2. Here may be mentioned the ablative with the defec- 
 tive adjective made and macti, honored, which is connected with 
 the imperative esto, este, and estote. 
 
 Macte virtute diligentiaque esto. 
 Made uterque ingenti merito. 
 
 Note 3. It is to be noticed as a peculiarity, that the accusative 
 vicem with a genitive or possessive pronoun , instead of the ablative 
 vice, is used after intransitive verbs and adjectives expressing an 
 affection of the mind, especially care, grief, anxiety. 
 
 Apparuit causa plebi suam vicem indignantem magistratu abisse 
 (on their account). 
 
 Remittimus hoc tibi, ne nostram vicem irascaris (on our ac- 
 count). 
 
 Suam vicem magis anxius, quam ejus, cui auxilium ab sepeteba- 
 tur. 
 
 Meam quoque,non solum rei publicai et exercitus vicem videbar 
 sollicitus. 
 
 Note 4. After transitive verbs the cause is rarely expressed 
 by the ablative alone ; propter or causa are used more fre- 
 quently. 
 
 Omnes intelligunt me non studio accusare sed officio defender e. 
 Hoc onus suscepi tua causa. 
 
 59 4. The ablative is used with verbs, to denote the in- 
 strument by which anything is done (ablativus instru- 
 ment i). 
 
 Benevolentiam civium blanditiis colligere turpe est. 
 Terra vestita est floribus, herbis, arbor ibus,fru gibus. 
 
 Note 1. If men are the instrument, it is expressed not by the 
 mere ablative, but generally by per, or by opera and the genitive. 
 This construction becomes with the possessive pronouns mea,tua, 
 vestra, &c, so common, that it is exactly the same as per me, per 
 te, per vos, and is used both in a favorable and unfavorable sense. 
 
60. ABLATIVE CASE. 53 
 
 Plura sunt detrimenta publicis rebus quam adjumenta per 
 homines eloquentissimos importata. 
 
 Placuit Lanuvinos, quorum opera feriae instauratae essent, hostias 
 praebere. 
 
 Mea opera Tarentum recepisti. 
 
 Lysander sic sibi indulsit, ut ejus opera in maximum odium 
 Graeciae Lacedaemonii pervenerint (through his fault, through 
 him). 
 
 Note. 2. The instrument is sometimes described by per, rather, 
 however, where the manner and the concurring circumstances are 
 to be expressed, than the direct means of bringing about the ef- 
 fect, as vi oppidum cepit, by storm; per vim ei bona eripuit, 
 violently. 
 
 Per simulationem amicitice me prodiderunt. 
 
 5. Hence with the verbs of buying and selling, of es- 60 
 timating and being valued, the price or cost is put in the 
 ablative, when expressed by a definite sum. (Of the in- 
 definite price, see sect. 5, 52). 
 
 Darius mille talentis percussorem Alexandri emere voluit. 
 Viginti talentis unam orationem Isocrates vendidisse traditur. 
 Denis in diem assibus anima et corpus militum astimantur. 
 Multo sanguine ea victoria Pcenis stetit. 
 In Sicilia sestertiis binis tritici modius erat. 
 
 Note 1. To this class of verbs belong moreover many others 
 which express an action or enjoyment for or at a stated price, as 
 lavor quadrante, habito triginta millibus sestertium, doceo talento, 
 parvo are mereo, '• I serve for little pay." 
 
 Note 2. The double construction of mutare and its compounds 
 commutare and permutare is to be noticed. The more common 
 construction in prose is to put the thing given in exchange in the 
 accusative, and the thing received in the ablative. But another 
 construction, the reverse of the preceding, occurs not only in 
 poets but also in prose writers. 
 
 Fidem suam et religionem pecunia mutare. 
 
 Cur valle permutem Sabina divitias operosiores (why should I 
 take riches in exchange for etc.). 
 
 Hisce temporibus non pessime cum iis est actum, quibus sine 
 dolore licitum est mortem cum vita commutare (to exchange life 
 for death). 
 
 5* 
 
54 USE OF CASES. 61, 62. 
 
 61 6. The ablative is added to nouns (both substantive 
 and adjective), and to verbs to express a circumstance by 
 which they are more exactly fixed and defined, where in 
 English the words in, as to, &c. would be used. 
 
 Agesilaus claudus fuit altero pede. 
 Sunt quidam homines non re sed nomine. 
 
 Note 1. Hence the use of many limiting and defining expres- 
 sions, mea sententia, mea opinione, meo judicio, with and without 
 quidem; natione Syrus, cognomine Barcas. 
 
 Isocratis gloriam nemo meo quidem judicio est postea consecu- 
 tus. 
 
 Laceda^moniorum moribus summa virtus in patientia ponebatur. 
 
 Note 2. The Latin poets put these limiting expressions in the 
 accusative case, especially when they refer to a part of the body, 
 following the idiom of the Greek. This use of the accusative is 
 most common after passive verbs, especially after perfect passive 
 participles. Tacitus and other later prose writers imitate the 
 poets. But the accusative of pars, magnam and maximum 
 partem, and the accusatives cetera and reliqua are common even 
 in Cicero. 
 
 Arminius impetu equi pervasit oblitus faciem suo cruore, ne 
 nosceretur. 
 
 Germanorum feminae 7iud<z brachia ac lacertos. 
 
 Magnam partem ex iambis nostra constat oratio. 
 
 Maximum partem ad injuriam faciendam aggrediuntur, ut adi- 
 piscantur ea, quae concupiverunt. 
 
 Proximum regnum cetera egregium (in other respects distin- 
 guished) ab una parte haud satis prosperum fuit. 
 
 Note 3. The ablative natu is thus joined to the adjectives 
 grandis, grandior , magnus, major, maximus ; minor, minimus. 
 
 Ennius fuit major natu quam Plautus et Naevius. 
 Q. Maximum Cato adolescens colere coepit non admodum 
 grandem natu, sed tamen jam setate provectum. 
 
 Note 4. With laborare, to suffer pain, ex is joined to denote 
 the part affected. 
 
 Dionysius Stoicus cum ex renibus laboraret, clamabat falsa esse 
 ilia, quae antea de dolore ipse sensisset. 
 
 62 7, Hence the ablative is used with verbs of abounding 
 and wanting (abundare, redundare, afflucre, circumfiuere, 
 scatere, Jlorere, and vigere in the figurative sense of 
 
63. ABLATIVE CASE. 55 
 
 abounding in any thing; car ere, egerc, indigcre, vacare), 
 and the corresponding transitive verbs of filling, endow- 
 ing, or depriving, and others of similar meaning ; (com- 
 plerc, explere, implore, cumulare, refcrcire, imbuere, satiare, 
 exsatiare, saturare, stiparc, constipare ; afficerc, donare, 
 remuncrari, locupletare, ornare, augere ; tollere, privare, 
 spoliare, orbare, fraudare, dcfraudare, nudare, exuere, 
 and many others). 
 
 Germania rivis fluminihusque abundat. 
 
 Quam Dionysio erat miserum carere consuetudine amicorum, 
 societate victus, sermone omnino familiari. 
 
 Arcesilas philosophus cum acumine ingenii floruit turn admi- 
 rabili quodam lepore dicendi. 
 
 Consilio et auctoritate non modo non orbari sed etiam augeri 
 senectus solet. 
 
 Note 1. The adjectives orhus, from orbare, vacuus, from va- 
 care, and refertus, from rrfercire, are, therefore, used with the 
 ablative, though the latter, following the analogy of plenus, with 
 the genitive also ; as, consilium periculo vacuum, gladius vagina 
 vacuus. 
 
 Referta Gallia negotiatorum est. 
 Xerxes refertus omnibus pramiis fortunae. 
 
 Orbus iis rebus omnibus, quibus et natura me et consuetudo 
 assuefecerat, mihi ipse displiceo. 
 
 Vacui curis etiam, quid in ccelo fiat, scire avemus. 
 
 Note 2. The genitive is, sometimes, used with egeo, and fre- 
 quently with indigeo. 
 
 Gravitas morbi facit, ut medicinal egeamus. 
 Virtus plurimaB exercitationis indiget. 
 
 Note 3. As to the varied construction of donare, exuere, and 
 others, see sect 4, 11. 
 
 Note 4. It will be readily perceived that, with many of these 
 verbs, the ablative may be considered as the ablative of the in- 
 strument, especially with those which denote to Jill. 
 
 8. Opus est, there is need, is either used impersonally, 63 
 in which case it has, like the verbs of wanting, an abla- 
 tive; e. g. multis mihi libris opus est; or personally, in 
 which case the thing wanted is in the nominative; multi 
 mihi libri opus sunt. This construction is most common 
 with the neuters of pronouns and adjectives. 
 
56 USE OP CASES. 64. 
 
 Athenienses cursorem Lacedsemonem miserunt, ut nunciaret, 
 quam celeri opus esset auxilio. 
 
 Themistocles ea prudentia erat, ut celeriter, qua opus erant, 
 reperiret. 
 
 Note 1. When the thing wanted cannot be expressed by a 
 substantive, either the accusative with the infinitive is used, or 
 the infinitive alone, the subject being left to be explained from 
 the connexion ; or the ablative of the perfect passive participle, 
 with or without a noun. The ablative of the supine is less com- 
 mon. In a few instances the genitive is used, as, temporis opus 
 esse, quanti argenti opus fuit. 
 
 Si quid erit, quod te scire opus erit, scribam. 
 
 Quid opus est tam valde affirmaref 
 
 Priusquam incipias, consulto, et ubi consulueris mature, facto 
 opus est. 
 
 Janitori opus esse sibi domino ejus convento extemplo ait (he 
 told the porter that he must immediately have a meeting with his 
 master). 
 
 Ita dictu opus est, si me vis salvum esse et filium. 
 
 Note 2. Usus est, there is need, is used impersonally, but it 
 generally occurs, in the best prose writers, without any case de- 
 pending on it. Livy uses it with the dative or ablative of the 
 relative pronoun ; Quintilian, with a genitive; the comic writers, 
 like opus. 
 
 De ceteris studiis alio loco dicemus, si usus fuerit. 
 Decretum est, ut Cn. Octavius reduceret naves, quibus consuli 
 usus non esset. 
 
 Proazmii non semper usus est. 
 
 64 9. The following nine deponent verbs, in part for rea- 
 sons contained in the above rules, take an ablative; utor, 
 fruor, fungor, potior, vescor, dignor, lector, glorior, nitor ; 
 with their compounds, abutor, perfruor^ defungor, per- 
 fungor. 
 
 Hannibal, quum victoria posset uti, frui maluit. 
 Qui adipisci veram gloriam volet, justitiae fungatur officiis. 
 Nulla re niti decet sapientem nisi virtute animique conscientia. 
 Haud equidem tali me dignor honore. 
 
 Note 1. Utor, fruor, fungor, potior, and vescor are sometimes, 
 though seldom, found with an accusative. This is the reason of 
 the construction with the participle in dus, even in good writers, 
 which would otherwise be impossible. 
 
65. ABLATIVE CASE. 57 
 
 Datames militare munus fungens primum, qualis esset, aperuit 
 in bello. 
 
 Ad agrum fruendum etiam invitat atque allectat senectus. 
 
 Ea, quautenda acceperis, majore mensura, si modo possis, jubet 
 reddere Hesiodus. 
 
 Note 2. Potiri also governs, in good writers, a genitive, es- 
 pecially in the phrase rcrum potiri, to obtain supreme dominion. 
 
 Cleanthes Stoieus solem dominari et rerum potiri putat. 
 
 Note 3. Glorior is also joined with the preposition de, when it 
 signifies to boast, and with in, when it signifies to place one's 
 glory in anything. 
 
 In virtute recte gloriamur. 
 
 Note 4. JVitor is also used with in and the ablative in the 
 figurative sense; joined with ad or in and the accusative, it means 
 to strive after. 
 
 In vita Pompeii nitebatur salus civitatis. 
 
 Optimi cujusque animus maxirne ad immortalitatem gloriae 
 nititur. 
 
 Note 5. Fido and confido are either used with the dative or 
 ablative; see sect. 4, 5, note 6. 
 
 Note 6. Stare, to abide by something, as, foedere, jurejurando, 
 is used both with the ablative and the preposition in. 
 
 Jam illis promissis standum non esse, quis non videt, quae 
 coactus quis metu promiserit. 
 
 Adversae invidias objici maluit ; stetitque in eadem sententia. 
 
 10. The adjectives dignns, indignus, fretus, alienus, 65 
 prceditus, and contentus, take an ablative. 
 
 Quam multi luce indigni sunt, et tamen dies oritur ! 
 Mens est pradita motu sempiterno. 
 
 Quod cuique temporis ad vivendum datur, eo debet esse con- 
 tentus. 
 
 Note 1. Mienus is more frequently joined with ah ; if used in 
 the sense of disinclined ', hostile, the preposition is rarely wanting. 
 In the sense of unsuitable to, the ablative either alone, or with ab 
 may be used. In the first meaning, hostile, the dative is some- 
 times used, in the second, the genitive. 
 
 Dii sunt benefici, neque hoc alienum ducunt majestate sua. 
 Hoc a te alienissimum est. 
 Homo alienus a Uteris. 
 
58 USE OF CASES. 66. 
 
 Testis id elicit, quod illi causes, maxime est alienum. 
 Quis alienum putet ejus esse dignitatis ? 
 
 Note 2. Dignus has in poets, but not in good prose writers, a 
 genitive. 
 
 66 11. With verbs of removing, keeping at a distance, 
 delivering, and others which imply a separation, the ab- 
 lative may be used, either alone or with the prepositions 
 ab, de, ex. With pellere, dcpcllcre, expellere, ejicere, abs- 
 terrere, detcrrcre, movcre, amovere, demovere, removere ; 
 abire, cxire, cedcre, decedere, disccdere, desistere, evadere 9 
 exulare ; arcere, prohibere, excludere, intercludcre, abs- 
 tinere ; liberare, solvere, expedirc, the preposition or the 
 ablative alone may be used ; with exsolvere, exonerare, 
 levare, the ablative alone is to be preferred : the verbs 
 which denote a difference, distinguere, discernere, secer- 
 nere, differre, discrepare, distare, abhorrere, alienare and 
 abalienare, are rarely found without a preposition. When 
 a separation from persons is spoken of, the preposition ab 
 must always be used with the verbs first enumerated. 
 
 Virtute Codri regis Athenienses hello liberati sunt. 
 
 TJsu urbis prohibere peregrinos inhumanum est. 
 
 Apud veteres Germanos quemcunque mortalium arcere tecto 
 nefas habebatur. 
 
 Tu, Jupiter, hunc a tuis oris, a tectis urbis, a mcenibus, a vita 
 fortunisque civium arcebis. 
 
 Note 1. Of the use of the dative with some of these verbs, 
 because compounded with prepositions, see above, sect. 4, 6. 
 
 Note 2. Prohibere, to keep at a distance, to keep apart, admits 
 of a double construction, so that either that which is kept apart, 
 or, which is the more common, that from which it is kept apart, 
 is put in the accusative. In the same manner defender e has either 
 that which is defended, or that against which it is defended, in 
 the accusative. 
 
 Erit humanitatis vestrae magnum civium numerum calamitate 
 prohibere. 
 
 Prohibere pradones procul ab insula Sicilia. 
 
 Note 3. Poets, in imitation of the Greek, use sometimes the 
 genitive instead of the ablative with verbs of separation, as, cum 
 famulis operum solutis ; and with adjectives of similar significa- 
 tion, as, liber laborum. 
 
67, 68. ABLATIVE CASE. 59 
 
 1*2. The ablative is used with esse, or without esse, to 67 
 express a quality, provided the quality is indicated, not by 
 a substantive only, but by a substantive having an adjec- 
 tive or adjective pronoun joined with it. 
 
 Agesilaus statura fuit humili et corpore exiguo. 
 Omnes dicuntur tyranni, qui potestate sunt perpetua in ea 
 civitate, quae libertate usa est. 
 
 Note 1. This ablative is explained by some by the ellipsis of 
 prceditus, by others by that of the (not used) participle of esse. 
 
 Note 2. An attempt is sometimes made to discover and es- 
 tablish a difference between this ablative, and the similar use of 
 the genitive (sect. 5,4), but unsuccessfully, as appears from those 
 instances, in which both constructions are combined ; except that 
 the genitive, but not the ablative, is used for definitions or ex- 
 pressions of measure. 
 
 Neque monere te audeo, prastanti prudentia virum, nee con- 
 firmare maximi animi hominem. 
 
 Thyum, hominem maximi corporis terribilique facie, optima 
 veste texit. 
 
 13. When one or more substantives are employed with 68 
 a verb to define more exactly the manner in which a thing 
 is done or takes place, the ablative is used with the prepo- 
 sition cum ; as literae cum cura diligentiaque scriptae, cum 
 fide amicitiam colere, cum voluptate audire; the same in 
 signification as diligenter scriptae, Jideliter colere, libenter 
 audire. If the manner is expressed by a substantive with 
 an adjective, or adjective pronoun, the ablative alone 
 (ablativus modi), or with cum, is used. The usual place 
 of cum is between the adjective and the substantive, but 
 it also stands first. 
 
 Epaminondas a judicio capitis maxima discessit gloria. 
 Sulla maximo cum labore Athenas expugnavit. 
 Verres Lampsacum venit cum magna calamitate et prope per- 
 nicie civitatis. 
 
 Note 1. In some phrases, the substantive, unaccompanied by 
 an adjective, is used without cum. 
 
 Omnes fere Stoici prudentissimi in disserendo sunt, et id arte 
 I faciunt. 
 
60 USE OF CASES. 69, 
 
 Existima modo et ratione omnia Romae Naevium fecisse, si hoc 
 recte atque ordine factum videtur. 
 
 Censores vitio creati non gesserunt magistratum. 
 
 Note 2. Accompaniment cannot be expressed by the ablative 
 alone, but requires, as a general rule, cum. To the same class be- 
 long such expressions as these, servi cum telis comprehensi sunt; 
 cum ferro in aliquem invadere ; cum occasu solis copias educere. 
 It is to be considered an exception that some writers, especially 
 Caesar and Livy, omit cum in certain military expressions ; as, 
 dictator ingenti exercitu ab urbe profectus ; exercitu haud minore, 
 qnam quern prius habuerat, ire ad hostem pergit ; egressus omni- 
 bus copiis. 
 
 Note 3. Cicero uses the participles junctus and conjunctus 
 also without cum. 
 
 Repente est exorta mulieris importunas nefaria libido non solum 
 dedecore verum etiam scelere conjuncta. 
 
 Infinitum bellum junctum miserrima fuga. 
 
 Dicendi vis egregia summa festivitate et venustate conjuncta. 
 
 69 14. The point of time is expressed by the ablative, 
 without the preposition in, in answer to the question 
 when ? 
 
 Qua nocte natus Alexander est, eadem Dianae Ephesiae tem- 
 plum deflagravit. 
 
 Pyrrhi temporibus jam Apollo versus facere desierat. 
 
 Pompeius extrema pueritia miles fuit summi imperatoris, 
 ineunte adolescentia maximi ipse exercitus imperator. 
 
 Note 1. By day, by night, is expressed by interdiu, noctu ; but 
 the ablatives die, nocte are not uncommon. The two phrases may 
 be combined ; die ac nocte, die noctuque, nocte et interdiu. 
 
 Note 2. In the evening, is vespere or vesperi, from the old form 
 vesper, vesperis, for which vesper {vesperi), and vespera are used. 
 
 Note 3. In good time, is in tempore or tempore (anciently 
 tempori or temperi, from which the comparative temperius). Other- 
 wise the preposition in is added, when tempus denotes difficulty, 
 as, in illo tempore ; hoc quidem in tempore. 
 
 Note 4. Ludis is used without a preposition, as denoting a 
 point of time, for tempore ludorum ; Latinis, for tempore feriarurft 
 Latinarum ; Saturnalibus , for tempore Saturnalium; gladiatoribus 9 
 for in ludis gladiatoriis. 
 
 Note 5. Bello alone, as well as joined with an adjective or 
 genitive, is frequently used for in hello, as bello Latino or bello 
 Latinorum. 
 
 Note 6. Some other expressions of a similar description are 
 used with and without in, as initio, principio, adventu and discessu 
 alicujus, comitiis, tumultu. 
 
70. ABLATIVE CASE. 61 
 
 Note 7. In speaking of the period of a person's life, it is more 
 common to use the concrete nouns puer, adolescens, juvenis, senex, 
 than the abstract nouns pueritia, adolescentia, juventus, senectus 
 with in. 
 
 Ego Q. Maximum adolescens ita dilexi senemut aequalem. 
 
 14. When we ask how long before ? or how long after 1 70 
 a point of time is denoted, and the time before and the time 
 after may be expressed by the ablative, followed by ante 
 or post. But the same words governing an accusative 
 express the same ; e. g. post tres annos decessit, or, tribns 
 annis post, or, tribns post annis. The ordinal numerals 
 may be used, as well as the cardinal ; post ttrtium annum, 
 and tertio anno post. Thus there are eight different ex- 
 pressions having the same meaning: 
 
 ante, post tres annos ; 
 
 ante, post ttrtium annum ; 
 
 tres ante, post annos ; 
 
 tertium ante, post annum ; 
 
 tribns annis ante, post ; 
 
 tertio anno ante, post ; 
 
 tribus ante, post annis ; 
 
 tertio ante, post anno. 
 Ante and post, when thus placed after the noun, may 
 govern an accusative of the event, from which the time is 
 reckoned. 
 
 Themistocles fecit idem, quod viginti annis ante fecerat 
 Coriolanus. 
 
 L Sextius primus de plebe consul factus est annis post 
 Eomam conditam trecentis duodenonaginta. 
 
 Cimon post annum quintum in patriam revocatus est. 
 
 Post diem tertium gesta res est. 
 
 Fabius tertio anno ante consul fuerat. 
 
 Note 1. Ante and post, even when governing the accusative, 
 are frequently placed after one of the accusatives, as, aliquot post 
 menses, paucos ante menses, tertium ante diem. 
 
 Note 2. Ante and post are even found before an ablative ; and 
 are sometimes placed before such ablatives, as have obtained an 
 adverbial signification, as ante annis octo, post paucis diebus ; post 
 aliquanto, post non multo, post paulo, ante paulo ; the reversed 
 order is, however, more common. 
 
 Note 3. When quam with a verb is added to post and ante, -we 
 may either say, tribus annis postquam venerat, post tres annos 
 
 6 
 
62 USE OF CASES. 71, 72. 
 
 quam venerat, tertio anno postquam venerat, post annum tertium 
 quam venerat ; or with the ablative alone, omitting post and ante, 
 tertio anno quam venerat, all in the same sense, three years after 
 he came. Instead of quam, ex quo and cum (quum) may be used 
 without post or ante; or the relative pronoun may be used agree- 
 ing with the preceding ablative. 
 
 Hamilcar nono anno, postquam in Hispaniam venerat, in prcalio 
 pugnando occisus est. 
 
 Saculis multis ante gymnasia inventa sunt, quam in his phi- 
 losophi garrire coeperunt. 
 
 Testamentum Augusti ante annum et quatuor menses, quam 
 decederet, factum ab eo virgines Vestales protulerunt. 
 
 Octavo mense, quam cceptum oppugnari, captum Saguntum 
 quidam scripsere. 
 
 Quern triduo, cum has literas dabam, expectabam. 
 
 Ipse octo diebus, quibus has literas dabam, cum Lepidi copiis me 
 conjungam. 
 
 Mors Sex. Roscii quatriduo, quo is occisus est, Chrysogono 
 nunliatur. 
 
 Accidit repentinum incommodum biduo, quo haec gesta sunt. 
 
 71 15. When the question how long before ? refers to the 
 present, the length of time is expressed by abhinc with 
 the accusative or ablative ; e. g. abhinc annos tres, or, 
 abhinc triginta diebus. The same is also expressed by 
 ante and the pronoun hie, as, ante hos tres annos, ante 
 hcec tria ssecula. 
 
 Pater Sosippi abhinc duo et viginti annos est mortuus. 
 Comitia jam abhinc triginta diebus erant habita. 
 
 Note. In some expressions, the time how long before is ex- 
 pressed by the ablative alone with hie and ille ; as, his diebus, in 
 these days, that is, a few days ago ; or paucis his diebus, paucis 
 illis diebus. 
 
 72 16. When the question is in how long time ? the answer 
 is expressed by the ablative ; but in connexion with nu- 
 merals (how many or how often in a given time) also by 
 in with the ablative. Intra with the accusative is used 
 with the same meaning. 
 
 Agamemnon cum universa Grsecia vix decern annis unam 
 cepisse urbem traditur. 
 
 Multi intra vicesimum diem dictatura se abdicaverunt. 
 
73, 74. ABLATIVE CASE. 63 
 
 Gracchus centum tria oppida intra paucos dies in deditionem 
 accepit. 
 
 Bis in die saturum fieri. 
 
 In hora saepe ducentos versus dictabat. 
 
 Fretum Euripi septies die reciprocal 
 
 17. The ablative, without a preposition, is used with 73 
 some general designations of place; terra marique, by 
 sea and land; loco and locis when they are joined with 
 adjectives and pronouns ; hoc loco, multis locis, aliquot 
 locis, sccundo loco, meliore loco res nostrae sunt, illustri 
 loco laus tua sita est. 
 
 Tuscorum ante Romanum imperium late terra marique opes 
 patuere. 
 
 Castra Gallorum opportunis locis erant posita. 
 
 Note. 1. Loco alone, or in loco, signifies in the right place, 
 equivalent to suo loco. 
 
 Quemadmodum qui ad nos intempestive adeunt, molesti saepe 
 sunt, sic epistolae ofFendunt non loco redditae. 
 
 Pecuniam in loco negligere maxumum interdum est lucrum. 
 
 Note 2. Loco and in loco, joined with a genitive, denote in- 
 stead. 
 
 Sic a majoribus nostris accepimus praetorem quaestori suo pa- 
 rentis loco esse opportere. 
 
 Note 3. Via and itinere, with an adjective, are used with- 
 out in. 
 
 Vienna equites mille via breviore praemisi. 
 
 Note 4. The ablative, if joined with the adjective totus, is 
 commonly used without in. 
 
 Concursabat tota urbe maxima multitudo. 
 
 Erat Menippus Stratonicensis meo judicio tota Asia illis tem- 
 poribus disertissimus. 
 
 Note 5. Poets allow themselves unlimited liberty in the omis- 
 sion of in, 
 
 18. The ablative is used with adjectives in the com- 74 
 parative degree, instead of quam with the nominative; 
 or, in the construction of the accusative with the infini- 
 tive, instead of quam with the accusative of the subject. 
 
64 USE OF CASES. 74. 
 
 If the thing surpassed be in any other case than the 
 nominative, or the accusative of the subject, quam must 
 be used. 
 
 Cicerone nemo Romanorum fuit eloquentior. 
 Neminem Romanorum Cicerone eloquentior em fuisse veteres 
 judicarunt. 
 
 Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. 
 Maluit servire gloriaa suae quam opibus. 
 Facilius ediscimus versus quam prosam orationem. 
 Pluris quam decern millibus emerunt. 
 
 Note 1. The ablative for the accusative of the object is fre- 
 quently found in poets, and sometimes in prose, especially with 
 pronouns; but no good writer uses the ablative for quam with any 
 other case. On the other hand, the nominative or accusative with 
 quam is often found where the ablative might have been used. 
 
 Est boni consulis suam salutem posteriorem salute communi 
 ducere. 
 
 Hoc mihi gratius nihil facere potes. 
 
 Neminem Lycurgo majorem Lacedaemon genuit. 
 
 Jgnoratio futurorum malorum utilior est quam scientia. 
 
 Note 2. If the verb cannot be supplied from the preceding part 
 of the sentence, esse is added to quam. But if the noun to which 
 the comparative belongs is in the accusative, quam may be used 
 with the same case without esse. 
 
 Argentum reddidisti L. Curidio, homini non gratiosiori, quam 
 Cn. Calidius est. 
 
 Drusum Germanicum minorem natu, quam ipse erat, fratrem 
 amisit. 
 
 Ego hominem callidiorem vidi neminem quam Phormionem (for 
 quam Phormio est). 
 
 Ut tibi multo majori, quam Africanus/wzJ (it could not be quam 
 Jlfricano), me non multo minorem quam Lalium (might be quam 
 fuit Lailius) et in re publica et in amicitia adjunctum esse patiare. 
 
 Note 3. Of a peculiar kind are such ablatives as these : 
 opinione, spe, nimio, cequo, necessario, justo, solito, dicto, vero, 
 which are to be explained by quam opinio, etc. est or erat. 
 
 Opinione omnium majorem animo cepi dolorem. 
 
 In oratione membrum longius justo tardum, brevius instabile est. 
 
75, 76. ABLATIVE CASE. 65 
 
 Note 4. Quam pro after a comparative means, than is, or was 
 to be expected in proportion to. 
 
 Prcelium atrocius quam pro numero pugnantium editur. 
 
 Note 5. The construction of alius with an ablative, instead of 
 ac 7 atque, or quam, is rare, and occurs chiefly in poets. 
 
 Nos ab intio spectasse otium, nee quidquam aliud libertate com- 
 muni quaesisse exitus declarat. 
 Ne putes alium sapiente beatum. 
 
 Note 6. Quamis commonly omitted after minus, plus, amplius, 
 and longius, without a change of the case of the following noun. 
 
 Constabat non minus ducentos Carthaginiensium equites fuisse. 
 
 Rex qua sex mensibus iter fecerat, eadem minus diebus triginta 
 in Asiam reversus est. 
 
 In eo proelio occiderant minus duo millia civium. 
 
 Decern haud amplius dierum frumentum in horreis fuit. 
 
 Gallorum copise non longius millia passuum octo ab hibernis 
 suis abfuerant. 
 
 19. The degree of superiority or inferiority of one 75 
 thing compared to another, is expressed by the ablative. 
 Paullo, multo, quo, eo, quanto, tanto, tantulo, aliquanto, 
 hoc, are to be considered as ablatives of this kind. 
 
 Hibernia dimidio minor est quam Britannia. 
 Homines quo plura habent, eo cupiunt ampliora. 
 Diogenes disputare solebat, quanto regem Persarum vita 
 fortunaque superaret. 
 
 20. The ablative is besides governed by the prepo- 76 
 sitions a, ab, abs, (absque), clam, coram, cum, de, e and 
 ex, prce, pro, sine, tenus (which is put after its case), in 
 and sub denoting the place where, and super when it 
 signifies concerning. Subter is used without distinction 
 with both cases, but more commonly with the accusative. 
 
 Note 1. The preposition in is commonly used with an abla- 
 tive, after the verbs pono, loco, colloco, statuo, constituo, consido, 
 although, strictly speaking, they express a motion. On the other 
 hand , advenire and adventare are used with in and the accusative, 
 or with the accusative, if joined with names of towns. 
 
 iEgyptii ac Babylonii omnem curam in siderum cognitione 
 posuerunt. 
 
 6* 
 
66 USE OF CASES, 77. 
 
 Herculem hominum faraa beneficiorum memor in concilio 
 ccelestium collocavit. 
 
 Note 2. Facere, in the significatien to do something with a 
 person or a thing is used with de, more frequently with the abla- 
 tive, or with the dative. 
 
 Nee, quid me nunc faciam, scio. Dav. Nee quid de me. 
 Quid de me fiet ? 
 Quid pecunice fiet ? 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 
 THE VOCATIVE. 
 
 77 1. The vocative stands in no close connexion with 
 either nouns or verbs, but is inserted (usually after a 
 clause, unless for the sake of strong emphasis) to express 
 the object to which the words are addressed. It is often 
 joined with interjections, but not necessarily, and with o ! 
 only in passages of strong emotion. 
 
 Urbem, urbem, mi Rufe, cole, et in ista luce vive. 
 O dii boni, quid est in hominis vita diu. 
 
 Qua? res unquam, pro sancte Jupiter, non modo in hac urbe 
 sed in omnibus terris est gesta major. 
 
 Note 1, Of other cases, besides the vocative, used with inter- 
 jections, see sect. 3, 25. 
 
 Note 2. The nominative is used in apposition with the voca- 
 tive. 
 
 Nate, meae vires, mea magna potentia solus. 
 Salve primus omnium parens patriae appellate, primus in toga 
 triumphum linguaeque lauream merite. 
 
 Note 3. Poets, in imitation of the Attic writers, sometimes use 
 the nominative for the vocative j the same is done in prose in 
 some particular phrases. 
 
 Vacuas aures mihi, Memmius, adhibe. 
 
 Decius consul : Agedum, inquit, pontifex publicus populi Ro- 
 mani, praai verba, quibus me pro legionibus devoveam. 
 Audi tu, populus Romanus. 
 
78, 79. USE OF ADJECTIVES. 67 
 
 Note 4. On the other hand, adjectives and participles are, in 
 poets and in one particular phrase in prose, in the vocative, when 
 the nominative would seem proper. 
 
 Stemmate quod Tusco ramum millesime ducis, censoremque 
 tuum vel quod trabeate salutas. 
 Made virtute esto. 
 
 USE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 SECTION VIII. 
 
 Some of the rules regulating the use of adjectives 
 have necessarily been anticipated in the section on the 
 Connexion of Subject and Predicate. 
 
 1. The adjectives primus, ultimiis, eztrcmus, postremus, 78 
 intimus, summus, medius, injimus, imus, reliqnus, ceterus, 
 even when they denote a part only, agree with the sub- 
 stantive in gender, number, and case. See sect. 5, 46. 
 
 Turpione Ambivio magis delectatur, qui in prima cavea 
 spectat ; delectatur tamen etiam, qui in ultima. 
 
 Antistius abdidit se in intimam Macedoniam. 
 
 Numa Janum ad infimum Argiletum indicem paeis bellique 
 fecit. 
 
 Jam pridem cupio Alexandrian! reliquamque JEgyptum viseie. 
 
 Note. Even pronouns are sometimes used in this manner. 
 
 Antequam ad earn Orationem (that part of my oration) venio, 
 quae est propria vestras qusestionis. 
 
 2. Several adjectives are joined to the same substan- 79 
 the without a conjunction, when one of them, commonly 
 
 ** 
 
68 . USE OF ADJECTIVES. 80-82. 
 
 that which stands next to it, is so closely united in sense 
 with the substantive, as to form one complex idea with it, 
 and is denned by the other or others. 
 
 Praetori urbis negotium datum, ut naves Ion gas triginta 
 veteres reficeret. 
 
 Atticus nullos habuit hortos, nullam suhurbanam aut mariti- 
 mam sumptuosam villam. 
 
 Urbis Acradinae partes una lata via perpetua multisque trans- 
 versis divisae sunt . 
 
 Note. The other adjectives thus joined to the first, which with 
 the substantive forms one complex idea, are chiefly adjectives 
 dtiioting size, number, and time, participles, pronouns, but rarely 
 adjectives denoting a quality. 
 
 80 3. Several adjectives are joined by means of conjunc- 
 tions, when they do not define or stand in apposition to 
 one another. 
 
 Cum Armeniorum rege Tigrane grave bellum perdiuturnum- 
 que gessimus. 
 
 Assentior Platoni nihil tarn facile in animos teneros atque 
 molles influere quam varios canendi sonos. 
 
 81 4. An adjective, participle, or adjective pronoun may 
 stand for a substantive, a substantive being understood, 
 and be connected with other adjectives, except those 
 denoting a quality ; and even with these when such an 
 adjective part of speech has, by usage, become a sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 Erubescunt pudici etiam impudica loqui. 
 
 Deoctra fidei testes esse solebant. 
 
 Mens est natalis. 
 
 Murenam accusat paternus inimicus Postumius, vetus vicinus 
 ac necessarius, 
 
 Omnes, qui Catilinae incepta probabant, malum publicum 
 alebat. 
 
 82 5. Some adjectives, in the neuter gender, are used as 
 adverbs, as, multum, multa, nimium quantum, mirum 
 quantum, facile, difficile, sublime, more rarely rectus. 
 
83-85. USE OF ADJECTIVES. 69 
 
 Coinmentabar declamitans, idque faciebam multum etiam 
 latine, sed graece saepius. 
 
 Sales in dicendo nimium quantum valent. 
 
 Id mirum quantum prof u it ad concordiam civitatis. 
 
 Sonus natura sublime fertur. 
 
 Astragalus difficile tunditur. 
 
 6. An adjective, qualifying the substantive or pronoun, 83 
 is sometimes used instead of an adverb, modifying the 
 verb. 
 
 Lceti pacem agitabamus. 
 
 Priori Remo augurium venit. 
 
 Note. Thus, nullus is used in the sense of not at all. 
 
 Philotimus nullus venit. 
 
 7. When two adjectives or adverbs are compared, 84 
 magis and quam are used ; or more frequently, both adjec- 
 tives or adverbs are used in the comparative. 
 
 Si mihi facere licuerit, quod jam dm cogito, perfectam artem 
 juris habebitis, magis magnam atque uberem quam difficilem 
 atque obscuram. 
 
 Octavius Reatinus ad dicendum veniebat magis audacter quam 
 parate. 
 
 Pestilentia coorta, minacior tamen quam periculosior, cogita- 
 tiones hominum a certaminibus publicis avertit. 
 
 Romani bell a quaedam fortius quam felicius gesserunt. 
 
 8. The second member of the comparison is omitted, 85 
 when it is easily understood. 
 
 Senectus est natura loquacior (sc. quam ceterae aetates). 
 
 Romani legibus annalibus grandiorem eetatem ad consulatum 
 constituebant. 
 
 Medici gravioribus morbis periculosas curationes et ancipites 
 adhibere coguntur. 
 
 Note. In many of these instances the comparative may be 
 translated by somewhat or too. 
 
 Frumentum in Gallia propter siccitates angustius provenerat 
 (somewhat scantily). 
 
 Voluptas cum major est atque longior, omne animi lumen ex- 
 tinguit (too great and too long continued). 
 
70 USE OF ADJECTIVES. 86-88. 
 
 86 9. Yet and still, with comparatives, are expressed in 
 the best writers, by etiam ; in later authors, by adhuc. 
 
 Ut in corporibus magnae dissimilitudines sunt, sic in animis 
 existunt etiam majores varietates. 
 
 Filiam quis habet 1 pecunia est opus ; duas? majore ; plures? 
 majore etiam, 
 
 Punctum est, quod vivimus, et adhuc puncto minus. 
 
 87 10. The superlative with quisque denotes distributively 
 each single one who possesses the quality in the highest 
 degree. The ordinal numbers are used in a similar 
 manner. 
 
 Epicureos doctissimus quisque contemnit. 
 
 Pecunia semper ab amplissimo quoque clarissimoque contempta 
 est. 
 
 In optimis quibusque honoris est certamen et gloriae. 
 
 Optimus quisque maxime posteritati servit. 
 
 Quinto quoque anno Sicilia tota censetur. 
 
 Caesar producta legione cognoscit non decimum quemque esse 
 relictum militem sine vulnere. 
 
 88 11. The force of the superlative is increased by the 
 addition of rnulto, longe,quam, vel ; and by quam, quan- 
 tus, qualis, ut, with posse. 
 
 Mihi nihil fuit optatius, quam ut quam gratissimus erga te 
 esse cognoscerer. 
 
 Ex Britannis omnibus longe sunt humanissimi, qui Cantium 
 incolunt. 
 
 In fidibus musicorum aures vel minima sentiunt. 
 
 Jugurtha quam maximas potest copias armat. 
 
 Statuo aliquem confectum tantis animi corporisque doloribus, 
 quanti in hominem maccimi cadere possunt. 
 
S9, 90. USE OF PRONOUNS. 71 
 
 USE OF PR©]\OlJ¥$. 
 
 SECTION IX. 
 
 1. The genitive plural of ego and iu has two forms, 89 
 nostrum and nostri, vestrum and vestri. The termination 
 urn is used with partitives ; in other connexions the form 
 
 in i. See sect 5, 45, note 6. 
 
 Tenentur ii, qui ad urbis incendium, ad vestrum omnium 
 caedem Romae restiterunt. 
 
 Quis nostrum exercitationem ullam corporis suscipit labori- 
 osam, nisi ut aliquid ex ea commodi consequatur. 
 
 Nostri melior pars animus est. 
 
 Non vereor, ne quis me hoc vestri adhortandi causa magnifice 
 loqui existimet. 
 
 2. Sui, sibi, se, is the pronoun of the third person in a 90 
 reflective sense, and is used when the subject of a pro- 
 position becomes the object of the predicate. It contin- 
 ues to be used through successive dependent propositions, 
 
 as long as it refers to the subject of the leading proposi- 
 tion ; while in merely annexed propositions is is used to 
 refer to the leading subject. 
 
 Ipse se quisque diligit, non ut aliquam a se ipso mercedem 
 exigat caritatis suce, sed quod per se sibi quisque carus est. 
 
 Dionysius verebatur, ne, si Dionem secum haberet, aliquam 
 occasionem daret sui opprimendi. 
 
 Tiberius Gracchus ejusque frater occisi sunt. 
 
 Athenienses urbem suam aede Minervae ornaverunt, eorumque 
 magnificentiam mirata est posteritas 
 
 Note 1. This relation is readily understood, when the depen- 
 dent proposition is connected by the conjunction that (ut), or by 
 interrogatives who, what, where, etc. But when the dependence 
 
72 USE OF PRONOUNS. 91,92. 
 
 is established and indicated by means of other conjunctions, such 
 as since, because, if, although, a mere reference to the subject is 
 not sufficient to use sui, but the dependent proposition must be 
 modified by the subject, that is, not express a fact, but the subject's 
 idea of the fact. It is another principle of the Latin language, 
 hereafter to be explained, that in such propositions the verb is 
 used in the subjunctive ; as, contemnebat divitias, quod se felicem 
 reddere non possent, or contemnebat divitias, quod eum felicem 
 reddere non poterant. In the former the idea of the subject is 
 given, therefore se and possent ; in the latter, the fact is stated ; 
 therefore eum and poterant. 
 
 Africanus, qui suo cognomine declarat tertiam partem orbis 
 terrarum se subegisse, tamen, si sua res ageretur, testimonium non 
 diceret. 
 
 Medeam prsedicant in fuga fratris sui membra in iis locis, qua 
 se parens persequeretur, dissipavisse. 
 
 Verres Milesios navem poposcit, quae eum praesidii causa 
 Myndum prosequeretur. 
 
 Note 2. Many instances occur in which there is necessarily an 
 ambiguity as to which of several subjects sui refers; in some cases 
 ipse is used to prevent a misunderstanding; in others the con- 
 nexion alone furnishes the right interpretation. 
 
 Agrippa Atticum orabat, ut se sibi suisque reservaret. 
 
 Romani legatos in Bithyniam miserunt, qui a rege peterent, ne 
 inimicissimum suum secum haberet sibique dederet. 
 
 Jugurtha legatos ad consulem mittit, qui ipsi liberisque vitam 
 peterent. 
 
 Caesar milites incusavit, cur de sua virtute aut ipsius diligentia 
 desperarent. 
 
 91 3. Suus is the adjective pronoun of the substantive 
 pronoun sui, sibi, se, and the principles stated in the prece- 
 ding rule, concerning the latter, apply strictly to the use 
 of the former. 
 
 Themistocles servum ad Xerxem misit, ut ei nuntiaret suis 
 verbis adversarios ejus in fuga esse. 
 
 92 4. On account of the reciprocal power of sui and 
 suus, they are used even when they do not refer to the 
 grammatical subject of the proposition. 
 
 Cui proposita sit conservatio sui, necesse est huic partes 
 quoque sui caras esse. 
 
 Caesarem sua natura mitiorem facit. 
 
95-96. USE OF PRONOUNS. 73 
 
 Sui cuique mores fingunt fortunam. 
 Furnium per se vidi libentissime. 
 Volaterranos in sua possessione retinebam. 
 
 5. The relative pronoun generally precedes the noun to 93 
 which it refers, which is then put in the same case, and 
 followed by hie, idem, is, ipse, these being necessary if the 
 verbs govern different cases. 
 
 Quam quisque novit artem, in hac se exerceat. 
 
 Accusator non ferendns est is, qui, quod in altero vitium 
 reprehendit, in eo ipso deprehenditur. 
 
 Expectationem nostram tu vinces, si hoc statueris, quarum 
 laudum gloriam adamaris ; quibus artibusese laudes comparantur, 
 in lis esse elaborandum. 
 
 6. The relative pronoun sometimes takes an adjective 94 
 after it, which properly belongs to the antecedent. 
 
 Alvus calore, quern multum habet, omnia conficit. 
 Inter jocos, quos inconditos jaciunt, Romulus ac parens patriae 
 appellatur. 
 
 7. The relative pronoun sometimes takes a substantive 95 
 in the way of apposition after it. 
 
 Eodem anno a Campanis Camas , quam Graci turn urbem 
 tenebant, capiuntur. 
 
 In astrologia C. Sulpicius, in geometria Sex. Pompeius, 
 multi in dialecticis, plures in jure eivili multum operae curaeque 
 posuerunt, qua omnes artes in veri investigatione versantur. 
 
 8. The relative pronoun is sometimes used in the sense 96 
 of as or such as, the antecedent is, denoting such, being 
 either expressed or understood. 
 
 Nos ii sumus, qui esse debemus, id est studio digni ac literis 
 nostris. 
 
 Spero, quce tua prudentia et temperantia est, te jam, ut 
 volumus, valere. 
 
 Qua es pradentia, nihil te fugiet, si meas literas diligenter 
 legeris. 
 
 7 
 
74 USE OF PRONOUNS. 97-101. 
 
 97 9. The relative pronoun sometimes takes its number 
 and gender from the personal pronoun which is implied in 
 the possessive. 
 
 Omnes laudare fortunas meas, qui gnatum haberem tali 
 ingenio praeditum. 
 
 98 10. Ipse, as distinguished from is and ille, serves em- 
 phatically to distinguish that to which it is applied from 
 all others. 
 
 Pythagorei, si ex iis quaereretur, quare ita esset, respondere 
 soliti sunt ipse dixit. 
 
 99 11. Ipse is frequently used to express the coincidence 
 or agreement of two defining circumstances, when it may 
 usually be translated the very ; in connexion with nu- 
 merals it indicates that the number is to be taken in its 
 literal meaning, exactly. 
 
 Pridie nonas Sext. Dyrrhachio sum profectus, ipso illo die, 
 quo lex est lata de nobis. 
 
 Triginta dies erant ipsi, cum has dabam literas, per quos 
 nullas a vobis acceperam. 
 
 100 12. Ipse in connexion with other personal pronouns is 
 in the nominative, or, in the accusative with the infinitive, 
 in the accusative, if the idea of the subject is to be made 
 prominent ; otherwise it is in the same case as the. other 
 pronoun. 
 
 Non potest exercitum is continere imperator, qui se ipsum non 
 continet. 
 
 Non egeo medicina ; me ipse consolor. 
 Deforme est de se ipsum praedicare. 
 
 101 13. Et ipse is used, when the same predicate is attrib- 
 uted to a second subject. 
 
 Antoninus Commodus nihil paternum habuit, nisi quod contra 
 Germanos feliciter et ipse (he, too,) pugnavit. 
 
 In a similar manner idem is used, when tivo predicates 
 are attributed to one subject. 
 
 Asiam istam refertam et eandem delicatam sic obiit, ut in ea 
 neque avaritiae neque luxuriae vestigium reliquerit. 
 
102-104. USE OF PRONOUNS. 75 
 
 14. Is is used when something mentioned before is re- 102 
 ferred to simply and without any emphasis; ille, with 
 emphasis, denoting that which is of general notoriety. 
 
 If the thing referred to is to be repeated with an addition 
 et is, atque is, isque, et is quidem, and, with a negative, 
 nee is are used. 
 
 Vercingetorix respond it : summam imperii se consulto nulli 
 discedentem tradidisse, ne is multitudinis studio ad dimicandum 
 impelleretur. 
 
 Antipater Me Sidonius solitus est versus hexametros fundere 
 ex tempore. 
 
 Vincula vero, et ea sempiterna, certe ad singularem pcenam 
 nefarii sceleris inventa sunt. 
 
 Oratorem celeriter complexi sumus, nee eum primo eruditum, 
 aptum tamen ad dicendum, post autem eruditum. 
 
 15. Hie, iste, and ille differ, as to their meaning and 103 
 application, in this way. Hie refers to that which is near 
 
 or belongs to the person speaking ; iste to the person ad- 
 dressed ; ille to some more remote person or object. 
 Thence hie is sometimes called the demonstrative pronoun 
 of the first, iste of the second, and ille of the third person. 
 
 Q. Catulus non antiquo Mo more sed hoc nostro fuit eruditus. 
 
 Capitolium saxo quadrato substructum est, opus vel in hac 
 magnificentia urbis conspiciendum. 
 
 Homines sapientes et ista auctoritate praeditos, qua vos estis, 
 his rebus mederi convenit. 
 
 Note. The same difference of meaning and use is to be ob- 
 served in the compounds of these three pronouns, hicce and 
 hiccine, istic, and illic. 
 
 16. Quisquam, any one, is used only in propositions 104 
 which involve an universal negative, or in an interrogation 
 which has a negative force, or in a conditional sentence, 
 
 or a clause containing a comparative, or after the adverb 
 vix, and the preposition sine. 
 
 Fieri nullo modo potest, ut quisquam plus alterum diligat 
 quam se. 
 
 J.n quisquam potest sine perturbatione mentis irasci ? 
 
 Nihil turpius physico quam fieri sine causa quidquam dicere. 
 
76 USE OF PRONOUNS. 105-107. 
 
 Aut enim nemo, quod quidem magis credo, aut, si quisquam, 
 ille sapiens fuit. 
 
 Omnino si quidquam est deorum, nihil est profecto magis 
 quam aequabilitas universae vitse. 
 
 Tetrior hie tyrannus Syracusanus fuit quam quisquam supe- 
 rior um. 
 
 Vix quidquam spei est. 
 
 Note 1. Ullus has the same meaning as quisquam, but is an 
 adjective, while quisquam is most commonly used substantively. 
 
 Diutius in hac urbe quam in alia ulla commoratus est. 
 Filio meo, si erit ulla res publica, satis amplum patrimonium in 
 memoria nominis mei relinquam. 
 
 Note 2. The neuter quidquam is sometimes used for the mas- 
 culine quisquam, as nihil for nemo. 
 
 Non potest insipiente fortunato quidquam fieri intolerabihus. 
 Hoc victore nihil moderatius est. 
 
 105 17. Aliquis and quispiam are particular in their mean- 
 ing, some one, some one or other ; quispiam increases the 
 uncertainty implied in aliquis. 
 
 Hereditas est pecunia, quae morte alicujus ad quempiam 
 pervenit jure. 
 
 106 18. Quidam differs from aliquis, by implying that the 
 object designated is definitely known, though indefinitely 
 described. 
 
 Ut saltatori motus non quivis, sed certus quidam est datus ; 
 sic vita agenda est certo genere quodam, non quolibet. 
 
 107 19. Alius is used in a peculiar manner with other cases 
 of the same word, or with adverbs derived from it, as 
 aliud aliis videtur optimum, " one thing appears best to 
 one, another to another." 
 
 Virtutum in alia alius mavult excellere. 
 Natura aliud aliis commodi aliquo adjuncto ineommodo mune- 
 ratur. 
 
 Aliter cum aliis loquitur. 
 
 Alius alio modo interpretatur. 
 
 Note. Alter is used in the same manner when speaking of two. 
 
 Sergius Virginiusque, naxii ambo, alter in alterum causam 
 conferunt. 
 
108, 109. USE OF THE TENSES. 77 
 
 USE OF THE TE1VSES. 
 
 SECTION X. 
 
 1. In order to determine the tense, i. e. the time of a 103 
 verb, we must inquire both whether the action or con- 
 dition to be expressed falls in the present, the past, or the 
 future; and also, what was its state with reference to 
 other actions connected with it, whether it was completed 
 
 or still going on. For example, Iicas writing, and Iliad 
 written, are both actions which fall in the past time ; but 
 their state is different. When I say I was tcriting, when 
 he came in, I represent the action as not completed at 
 his entrance; when I say I had written, when he came in, 
 I represent one action as already terminated, when the 
 second took place. The same difference exists between 
 to-morrow I shall write, and to-morrow I shall have writ- 
 ten ; between I am icriting to-day, I am engaged in an 
 act not yet completed, and I have written to-day, by 
 which an act already terminated is expressed. 
 
 2. There are, therefore, in Latin, two tenses for each 109 
 of the three divisions of time, past, present, and future ; 
 one expressing a complete, the other an incomplete action. 
 
 f scribo, I write, or am writing, present time, action continuing. 
 
 I scrtpsi, I have written, present time, action completed. 
 
 ( scribebam, I wrote, or was writing, past time, action continuing. 
 
 \ scripseram, I had written, past time, action completed. 
 
 ( scribam, I shall write, or be writing, future time, action con- 
 
 < tinuing. 
 
 ( scripsero, I shall have written, future time, action completed. 
 
 Dum vitant stulti vitia, in contraria currunt. 
 
 Qua tempestate Carthaginienses plerseque Africa imperita- 
 bant, Cyrenenses quoque magni atque opulenti fuere. 
 
 TJt voles me esse, ita ero. 
 7* 
 
78 USE OF THE TENSES. 110, 
 
 Eas leges, quas Caesar nobis inspectantibus recitavit, pro- 
 nuntiavit, tulit, nos evertendas putabimus 1 
 
 Pausanias eodem loco sepultus est, ubi vitam posuerat. 
 Ut sementem feceris, ita metes. 
 
 110 3. The passive has the same tenses with a correspond- 
 ing meaning, but with this difference, that they express 
 no action, but the times and states of a condition of 
 suffering. 
 
 ( laudor, I am praised, present time, condition continuing. 
 
 < laudatus sum, I have been praised, present time, condition 
 ( completed. 
 
 ( laudabar, I was praised, past time, condition continuing. 
 
 < laudatus eram, I had been praised, past time, condition com- 
 ( pleted. 
 
 ( laudabor, I shall be praised, future time, condition continuing. 
 
 < laudatus ero, I shall have been praised, future time, con- 
 ( dition completed. 
 
 Note 1. Instead of laudatus sum and eram, laudatus fui and 
 fueram were sometimes used, and laudatus fuero generally for 
 ero ; which is only an attempt to express again by the auxiliary, 
 the completeness of the action, which is already expressed by 
 the participle of the perfect passive. In the subjunctive likewise 
 laudatus fuissem is often used for laudatus essem. So the in- 
 finitive laudatum fuisse for laudatum esse. 
 
 Nunquam enim nobilitas, integra praesertim atque innocens, a 
 populo Romano supplex repudiata fuit. 
 
 Marius a subselliis in rostra recta ivit, idque, quod communiter 
 compositum fuerat, solus edixit. 
 
 Note 2. The English language is destitute of a form for ex- 
 pressing the peculiar sense of the Latin present tense passive ; 
 namely, that the act under which the person or thing spoken of is 
 passive, is still going forward at the time supposed. / am being 
 praised, or / am in the act of being praised, would express this, but 
 neither phrase is agreeable to the idiom of the English. The 
 same remark applies to the imperfect and future passive, which 
 express the incompleteness of that which was or will be under- 
 gone. 
 
 Note 3. The Latin present, joined with an adverb or other 
 expression of past time, including the past and present, has the 
 force of a perfect. 
 
 Putarem te, inquit, ambitiosum esse, si, ut dixisti, ii, quos 
 jamdiu colligis, viverent. 
 
 Jam pridem cupio Alexandriam visere. 
 
Ill, 112. USE OF THE TENSES. 79 
 
 4. The tenses of the present and past time, i. e. Ill 
 present and perfect, imperfect and pluperfect, have also a 
 subjunctive mood ; scribam and scripserim ; scriberem and 
 scripsissem ; in the passive scribar and scriptus sim, scri- 
 berer and scriptus essem. The connexion in which they 
 are respectively used will be explained hereafter, sect. 12 ; 
 
 as tenses, they do not vary from the signification of the in- 
 dicative. 
 
 5. Neither the active nor the passive voice has a sub- 112 
 junctive of the future. When the expression of futurity 
 
 is contained in another part of the proposition, the other 
 subjunctives supply the place of the subjunctive of the 
 future, which is wanting ; e. g. ilia de re promisit se 
 scripturum, cum primum nuntium accepisset. Here acce- 
 pisset serves instead of a subjunctive of the future perfect ; 
 for in the indicative it would be, cum primum nuntium 
 accepero, scribam tibi. So in the passive : hoc tibi 
 affirmo, si illud beneficium mihi tribuatur, me magnopere 
 gavisurum ; where tribuatur, the subjunctive of the pres- 
 ent, stands for the future ; gaudebo si mihi tributum sit^ 
 or fucrit, where fuerit (ftomfuerim, not from fuero) is in 
 like manner used for the subjunctive of the future. The 
 choice of one or other of these subjunctives depends 
 upon the tense of the leading verb in the sentence, and 
 the complete or incomplete state of the action. 
 
 Non committam, ut turn res judicetur, cum haec frequentia 
 totius Italiae Roma discesserit. 
 
 Turnum dixisse ferunt nullam breviorem esse cognitionem 
 quam inter patrem et filium, paucisque transigi verbis posse ; 
 ni pareat patri, habiturum infortunium esse. 
 
 Haec profecto vides, quanto illustriora futura sint, cum 
 aliquantum ex provincia atque ex imperio laudis accesserit. 
 
 De Rosciorum audacia turn me dicturum pollicitus sum, cum 
 Erucii crimina diluissem. 
 
 Note. It is to be observed that in the last two examples the 
 perfect subjunctive accesserit and the pluperfect diluissem are in 
 English rendered by the same tense. The use of different tenses 
 in Latin is owing to the difference of the leading verbs, video and 
 pollicitus sum. 
 
80 USE OF THE TENSES. 113-115. 
 
 113 6. If no future has gone before, and the construction 
 of the proposition demands the subjunctive, the participle 
 of the future active is employed for this purpose, together 
 with the proper tense of the verb esse, expressing simply 
 futurity, not intention; e. g. non dubito, quin rediturus 
 sit; non dubitabam, quin rediturus esset. 
 
 His de rebus quid acturus sis, rescribas mihi velim. 
 Bonum virum fingimus, qui celaturus Rhodios non sit, si id 
 turpe judicet. 
 
 Note 1. The perfect and pluperfect rediturus fuerim and 
 rediturus fuissem retain their original meaning of intention, as 
 non duhito quin rediturus fuerit, " I do not doubt that he has had 
 the intention to return." 
 
 Note 2. If simple futurity in the past is to be expressed, the 
 circumlocution with futurum sit and futurum esset is to be used, 
 as nescio, num futurum sit, ut eras hoc ipso tempore jam redierit, 
 " I do not know whether he will have returned to-morrow at this 
 very time ; " and, nesciebam, num futurum esset, ut postridie eo 
 ipso tempore jam redisset, " I did not know whether he would 
 have returned the day after at this very time." 
 
 114 7. In the passive voice, as the participle in dus is not 
 properly a future, but denotes what ought to be done, the 
 circumlocution of futurum sit, or esset with ut may be 
 employed ; as non dubito, quin futurum sit, ut laudetur, 
 " I do not doubt that he will be praised; " multi non 
 dubitabant, quin futurum esset, ut Ccesar a Pompcio 
 vinceretur. 
 
 115 8. The conjugatio periphrastica, formed from the par- 
 ticiple of the future active with the auxiliary esse, is used 
 to denote that some one is about to perform an action, or 
 meditates its performance. This can be done through all 
 the six tenses of the verb, but the second future of this 
 periphrastic conjugation does not occur. 
 
 Tibi de nostris rebus nihil sum ante mandaturus per liter as, 
 quam desperaro coram me tecum agere posse. 
 
 In urbis incremento semper, quantum moenia processura erant, 
 tantum termini consecrati proferebantur. 
 
 Nunc jam, quod crediturus tibi fui, omne credidi. 
 
 JEmilius Paullus Delphis inchoatas in vestibulo columnas, 
 quibus imposituri statuas regis Ferseifuerant, suis statuis victor 
 destinavit. 
 
116. USE OF TENSES. 81 
 
 Teneat oportet orator eorum, apud quos aget aut erit acturus, 
 mentes, sensusque degustet. 
 
 Ut scribas quam saepissime, ut, et quid tu agas, et quid 
 agatur, scire possim, et etiam quid acturus sis, valde te rogo. 
 
 Docuit nos idem (Epicurus), natura effectum esse mundum, 
 tamque earn rem esse facilem, ut innumerabiles natura mundos 
 effectura sit, efficiat, effecerit. 
 
 Ne literas quidem ullas accepi, quae me docerent, quid ageres, 
 aut ubi te visurus essem. 
 
 C. Livius neminem fidelius dare posse consilium dixit quam 
 eum, qui id alteri suaderet, quod ipse, si in eodem loco esset, 
 f acturus fuerit. 
 
 Aut non fato interiit Flaminii exercitus ; aut si fato, etiamsi 
 obtemperasset auspiciis, idem eventurum fuisset. 
 
 Sanguinem pluisse senatui nuntiatum est, deorum etiam 
 sudasse simulacra ; num censes his nuntiis Thalen aut Anaxa- 
 goram crediturum fuisse t 
 
 Note. The perfect and pluperfect indicative of this periphrastic 
 conjugation are often used, in conditional sentences, in the sense 
 of the pluperfect subjunctive. 
 
 Mazaeus, si transeuntibus flumen supervenisset, haud dubie 
 oppressurus fuit incompositos. 
 
 Quid enim futurum fuit, si ilia plebs agitari coepta esset 
 tribuniciis procellis. 
 
 9. The future passive participle, as it is called, forms 116 
 with the tenses of the verb esse a peculiar conjugation 
 through all the tenses, with the signification of necessity, 
 not of a future condition ; for epistola scribenda est, 
 means not " a letter will be written/ 5 for that would be 
 expressed by epistola scribetur, but " a letter must be 
 written." 
 
 Regulo non fuit Jupiter metuendus, ne iratus noceret, qui 
 neque irasci solet nee nocere , 
 
 Hi tibi tres libri inter Cratippi commentarios tamquam hospites 
 erunt recipiendi. 
 
 Si longior complectenda memoria fuerit (fut. perf.) oratio, 
 proderit per partes ediscere. 
 
82 USE OP THE TENSES. 117.| 
 
 Note. The past tenses of this conjugation also, the imperfect, 
 perfect, and pluperfect indicative are, in conditional propositions, 
 used for the pluperfect subjunctive. 
 
 Quae si hoc tempore non suum diem obisset, paucis post annis 
 tamen ei moriendum fuit. 
 
 117 10. The perfect indicative, both active and passive, has 
 in Latin, besides its signification of an action completed 
 in present time, that of an aorist ; i. e. it is used to relate 
 events, simply as happening in past time, without refer- 
 ence to their having been completed, or not completed, in 
 respect to each other ; e. g. Itaque Caesar armis gerere 
 rem constitute, exercitum finibus Italiae admovit, Rubi- 
 conem transiit, Rom am et aerarium occupavit, Pompeium 
 cedentem devicit, Pompeium fugientem persequutus est, 
 eumque in campis Pharsalicis devicit. This is expressed 
 in English by the use of the past tense, M Caesar deter- 
 mined, marched,'' &,c. 
 
 Yerres turn se in conspectum nautis paullisper dedit. Stetit 
 soleatus praetor populi Romani cum pallio purpureo tunicaque 
 talari. 
 
 Hoc ipso istum vestitu Siculi saepe viderunt. 
 
 Note 1. The Imperfect is never used so, but always expresses 
 a continuing incomplete action or condition, in past time ; as, 
 Caesar armis rem genere constituit : videbat enim inimicorum in dies 
 majorem fieri exercitum, suorum animos debilitari, reputabatque 
 appropinquare hiemem : itaque exercitum admovit, etc. The per- 
 fect and imperfect are sometimes, very significantly, joined. 
 
 iEqui se in oppida receperunt, murisque se venebant (the former 
 expressing a momentary, the other a continued action). 
 
 Dicebat melius quam scriysit Hortensius. 
 
 Inter quae L. Piso ambitum fori, corrupta judicia increpans, 
 
 abire se et cedere urbe testabatur, et simul curiam relinquebat. 
 
 Commotus est Tiberius, et quamquam Pisonem mitibus verbis 
 
 permulsisset, propinquos quoque ejus impulit, ut abeuntem aucto- 
 
 1 ritate et precibus tenerent. 
 
 Note 2. In Latin as in English, when the past is represented 
 in a lively manner as though it were present, use is made of the 
 present tense, instead of the aorist of narration. 
 
 Erat in luctu senatusj squalebat clvitas publico consilio mutata 
 veste, cum subito edicunt consules, ut ad suum vestitum senatores 
 redirent. 
 
IIS. USE OF THE TENSES. 83 
 
 Dimisso senatu decemviri prodeunt in concionem, abdicantque 
 se magistratu ingenti hominum laetitia. Kuntiantur hasc plebi ; 
 legatos, quidquid in urbe hominum supererat, prosequitur. Huic 
 multitudini laeta alia turba ex castris occurrit ; congratulantur 
 libertatem concordiamque civitati restitutam. 
 
 Note 3. That the present, in such instances, is by the writer 
 himself felt to be used for the perfect, appears sometimes from 
 the tense of dependent verbs. 
 
 Diodorus, homo frugi ac diligens, qui sua servare vellet, ad 
 propinquum suum scribit, utiis, qui a Verre venissent, responderet, 
 illud argentum se paucis illis diebus misisse Lilybaeum. 
 
 Deinde L. Flaccus et C.Pomptinus praatores, quod eorum opera 
 forti usus essem, laudantur. 
 
 II. The Latin imperfect indicative, expressing like the \M 
 English compound tense formed by the auxiliary and 
 participle (I was speaking) an action or state continuing 
 and not completed, at some given point of past time, is 
 often used of actions frequently repeated, of manners, 
 customs, and institutions formerly existing. 
 
 Socrates dicere solebat (or dicebat) omnes in eo, quod scirent, 
 satis esse eloquentes. 
 
 Anseres Romae publice alebantur in Capitolio. 
 
 Note 1. Tt is often optional, whether we describe the dura- 
 tion of an action by the imperfect, or simply declare its past 
 existence by the perfect; we may say, Socrates solitus est dicere, 
 as well as solebat; the former expression declares a fact, the latter 
 represents the continuance and repetition of the act. The per- 
 fect may be used of a continued action, if its continuance is not 
 the circumstance which it is meant to bring prominently into 
 view. 
 
 Note 2. In writing letters, the Romans used the imperfect or 
 perfect (according as the action is to be represented as continu- 
 ing or completed), to denote what was going on at the time when 
 they wrote, putting themselves, as it were, in the place of the 
 person who receives the letter, and using the tense which would 
 be proper when it comes to his hands. In this case nunc and 
 etiamnunc, which properly can be used with the present tense 
 only, are used in connexion with past tenses without being 
 changed into the corresponding tunc and etiamium. 
 
 Haec scripsi media nocte. Novi nihil erat apud nos, si quidem 
 certa tibi afferri vis. Quas ad earn diem, cum haec scribebam, 
 audiveramus, inanis rumor videbatur. 
 
 Bibulus ne cogitabat quidem etiam nunc in provinciam suam 
 accedere. 
 
84 USE 0E THE TENSES. 119, 120. 
 
 119 12. The subjunctive of the perfect has not the same lat- 
 itude of meaning as the indicative of this tense, but is 
 confined to a completed action and the present time. But 
 the imperfect of the subjunctive has the force which be- 
 longs to the perfect of the indicative, that of relating an 
 event which has occurred in some past time, without 
 reference to its being complete or incomplete ; so that in 
 a narrative, the imperfect of the subjunctive follows the 
 perfect of the indicative, without implying a continuance 
 of the action or condition. 
 
 It will be readily perceived that when I say, Puer de 
 tecto decidit, ut crus fregerit, I do not relate an event as 
 happening in past time, but speak of an event com- 
 pleted at the present time, and of a state now existing, 
 the consequence of that event. When, on the other hand, 
 I say, Puer de tecto decidit, ut crus f r anger et, I use the 
 perfect in its narrative or aorist sense, and join, therefore, 
 the imperfect with it. 
 
 Mulier tarn vehementer lapidem de tecto dejecit, ut 'regis 
 (Pyrrhi) caput et galeam perfringeret. 
 
 Aristides, cum tantis rebus praefuisset, in tanta paupertate 
 decessit, ut, qui efferretur, vix reliquerit. 
 
 Quae te ratio in earn spem adduocit, ut eos tibi fideles putares, 
 quos pecunia corrupisses. 
 
 Romani ex loco superiore stragi ac ruina fudere Gallos, ut 
 nunquam postea nee pars nee universi tentaverint tale pugnae 
 genus. 
 
 120 13. The duration and completion of one action with 
 reference to another are, in Latin, expressed by the imper- 
 fect and pluperfect with greater precision than is some- 
 times done in English. If the one action must be com- 
 pleted before the other can take place, the former is 
 expressed by the pluperfect. 
 
 Pausanias eodem loco sepultus est, ubi vitam posuerat. 
 Irruerant Danai, et tectum omne tenebant. 
 
 Note. The distinction between the two tenses is especially to 
 be noticed in sentences with cum. 
 
 Zenonem, cum Athenis essem, audiebam frequenter. 
 Thucydides libros suos turn scripsisse dicitur, cum a re publica 
 remotus atque in exilium pulsus esset. 
 
121. USE OF THE TENSES. 85 
 
 14. Postquam or posteaquam, ubi, ubi primum, ut, ut 121 
 primum, cum primum, simul ut, simulac or simulajtque, in 
 the sense of when, as soon as, are usually joined with the 
 indicative perfect, when the narrative is direct ; e. g. ubi 
 Ulud audivit, nuntium ad regem misit; postquam nihil 
 extorquere potuit, in hiberna cohortes misit; Verres, si- 
 mulatque ei provincia Sicilia sorte obvenit, statim quaerere 
 ccepit. The accuracy with which the Latin language 
 usually distinguishes the times of consecutive actions, 
 would lead to the expectation, that the pluperfect should 
 rather be used in this case than the perfect. 
 
 Unus ex iis (captivis) domum abut, quod fallaci reditu in 
 castra jurejurando se exsolvisset. Qundubi innotuit relatumque 
 ad senatum est, omnes censueruntcompreheiidendum et custodi- 
 bus publice datis deducendum ad Hannibalem esse. 
 
 Postquam divitiae honori esse coepere, et eas gloria, imperium, 
 potentia sequebatur, hebescere virtus, paupertas probro haberi, 
 innocentia pro malevolentia duci ccepit. 
 
 Philodamus 'posteaquam jus suum obtinere non potuit, ut hu- 
 manitatem consuetudinemque suam retineret, laborabat. 
 
 Inter miracula iEgypti fait Memaonis saxea effigies, ubi ra- 
 diis icta est, sonum reddens. 
 
 Ubi spectaculi tempus venit, deditceque eo mentes cum oeulis 
 erant, turn ex composito orta vis, signoque dato juventus Ro- 
 mana ad rapiendas virgines discurrit. 
 
 Romam ut nuntiatum est Vejos captos, velut ex insperato 
 immensum gaudium fuit. 
 
 Heri non multum, postquam tu discessisti, urbani quidam 
 literas ad me attulerunt. 
 
 Note I. It is to be observed that, according to the general 
 principle, the imperfect is used, if the action is not yet completed, 
 as appears from the second and fifth examples ; for dedita erant 
 is to be considered as the imperfect of deditus sum, I am engaged. 
 
 Note 2. Postquam or posteaquam is sometimes found with the 
 pluperfect, but not very frequently. 
 
 Posteaquam tantam multitudinem collegerat emblematum, ut ne 
 unum quidem cuiquam reliquissel, instituit officinam Syracusis in 
 regia. 
 
 8 
 
86 USE OF THE TENSES. 122, 123. 
 
 Note 3. There is a remarkable use, in a few instances in Cicero, 
 of the imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive after post eaquam. 
 
 Qui posteaquam maximas cedificasset ornassetq\ie classes, legatos 
 ac literas misit. 
 
 122 15. Dum in the sense of during the time that, whilst, 
 has, generally, not only in connexion with the tenses of 
 the present, but also with those of the past time, a present 
 indicative, to denote the duration of an action during the 
 occurrence and chancre of others. 
 
 o 
 
 Dum pauca mancipia retinere vult, fortunas omnes perdidit. 
 
 Dum eocpectat, quidnam sibi certi ofFeratur, ante horam tertiam 
 noctis de foro non discessit. 
 
 Dum ea Romani par ant consultantque, jam Saguntum summa 
 vi oppugnabatur . 
 
 Dum in Asia bellum geritur, ne in iEtolis quidem quietae res 
 fuerant. 
 
 123 16. In the use of the futures, the Latin language is 
 more accurate than our own. When a future action is 
 spoken of, either in the future, or in the imperative, or in 
 the subjunctive used imperatively, and another is joined 
 with it, which has not yet come to pass, the latter is also 
 put in the future ; in the first future, if the actions are 
 supposed to continue together ; in the future perfect, if 
 the one must be completed before the other can begin. 
 In English this verb is often put in the present tense ; 
 e. g. faciam. si potero, " I will do it if I can" ; facito 
 hoc, ubi voles, "- do this when you please" 
 
 Adolescentes cum dare se jucunditati volent, caveant intempe- 
 rantiam. 
 
 Ut sementem feceris, ita metes. 
 
 De Carthagine vereri non ante desinam, quam illam excisam 
 esse cognovero. 
 
 Malevolentiae hominum in me, si poteris, occurres ; si non 
 potueris, hoc consolabere, quod me de statu meo nullis con- 
 tumeliis deterrere possunt. 
 
 Note 1. Exceptions to this rule occur, although rarely. 
 
 Si reus condemnatur, desinent homines dicere, his judiciis 
 pecuniam plurimum posse; sin absolvitur, desincmus nos de 
 judiciis transferendis recusare. 
 
124. USE OF THE TENSES. 87 
 
 Note 2. The future perfect is sometimes used for the first 
 future, to express haste, something future being thus represented 
 as already past. 
 
 Da mini hoc, jam tibi maximam partem defensionis pr&cideris. 
 
 17. All these tenses may be used in connexion, accord- 124 
 ing to circumstances ; as, I write now, but yesterday I 
 was walking, hodie scribo, at heri ambulabam. But only 
 the similar tenses, i. e. those which relate to the same 
 time, can be made dependent on each other ; that is, the 
 tenses of the present time, namely, the present and per- 
 fect by themselves, and the tenses of the past, namely, 
 the imperfect and pluperfect by themselves. In the doc- 
 trine of the dependence of tenses (consecutio temporum), 
 regard must, therefore, be had to the time; for present 
 only can be connected with present, and past with past. 
 The state of the action depends solely on itself, and of 
 course is never doubtful. And now this principle is to be 
 held firmly in view, that the perfect of itself as such, and 
 in the subjunctive always, expresses present time ; so that 
 On the present and perfect the present and perfect may 
 
 folloiD, 
 
 On the imperfect and pluperfect the imperfect and plu- 
 perfect; 
 
 as, scio, quid agas, and scio, quid egeris, " I know what 
 you are doing/' and " I know what you have done." 
 But sciebam, quid ageres, and sciebam, quid egisses; in 
 English, " I knew what you did," and " I knew what you 
 had done " ; further, audiveram, quid ageres, and audive- 
 ram, quid egisses, " I had heard what you did," and " I 
 had heard what you had done." 
 
 Exstant epistolse et Philippi ad Alexandrum et Antipatri ad 
 Cassandrum et Antigoni ad Philippum nlium, quibus prcecipiunt, 
 ut oratione benigna multitudinis animos ad benevolentiam 
 alliciant, militesque blande appellando deleniant. ■ 
 
 Non est provincia excepta dumtaxat Africa et Sardinia, quam 
 non adierit Augustus. 
 
 Barbarus nihil doli subesse putans adeo angusto mari confliocit 
 ut ejus multitudo navium explicari non potuerit. 
 
 Trajanus ita rem publicam administravit, ut omnibus princi- 
 pibus merito anteferatur. 
 
88 USE OF THE TENSES. 125. 
 
 Chabrias vivebat laute, et indulgebat sibi liberalius, quam ut 
 invidiam vulgi posset efrugere. 
 
 Unum illud extimescebam, ne quid turpiter facerem, vel jam 
 effecissem. 
 
 Dolabella venerat ipse, qui esset in consilio, et primus sen- 
 tentiam diceret. 
 
 Plato a Dionysio tyranno crudeliter violatus erat, quippe quem 
 venumdari jussisset. 
 
 Note. There are single instances which form an exception 
 to this rule, inasmuch as sometimes tenses of the past time de- 
 pend on those of the present time, and the reverse. The latter is 
 especially the case when the result of a past action extends to 
 the present time. 
 
 Scitote oppidum esse in Sicilia nullum ex iis oppidis, in quibus 
 consistere praetores et conventum agere soleant, quo in oppido non 
 isti delecta mulier ad libidinem esset (for fuerit). 
 
 Ardebat autem Hortensius cupiditate dieendi sic, ut in nullo 
 unquam flagrantius studium viderim (so that I have not,, to the 
 present moment, seen). 
 
 125 18. A difficulty is introduced into the simple rule given 
 above on the connexion of the tenses, by the double signi- 
 fication of tbe Latin perfect indicative. In the pre- 
 ceding paragraph it has been considered (like the English) 
 merely as a present of perfect action, but it is likewise an 
 aorist of the past (see 117, 10), and as such it is con- 
 nected with the tenses of past time, the imperfect and 
 the pluperfect. In this latter case it is translated in 
 English by the imperfect. The Latin perfect, in the 
 aorist sense, may be called the historic perfect, and we 
 must add to the rule ; 
 
 On the historic perfect follows the imperfect and pluper- 
 fect ; 
 as, audivi (I heard, narrating), quid ageres and quid 
 egisses. 
 
 Conon cum patriam obsideri audivisset, non quasivit, ubi ipse 
 tutus viveret, sed unde prsesidio posset esse civibus suis. 
 
 Id factum graviter tulit Indutiomarus, et, qui jam ante inimico 
 in nos animo fuisset, multo gravius hoc dolore exarsit. 
 
126, 127. USE OF THE TENSES. 89 
 
 Note. It must be observed that, from the frequent connexion of 
 the perfect with the imperfect of the subjunctive, it became 
 almost an idiom of the Latin language, to use the imperfect, even 
 where a present action was spoken of, if it were possible to con- 
 ceive it as progressive, and therefore as in one part past, even 
 while another part continued. 
 
 Adduxi enim hominem, in quo satisfacere exteris nationibus 
 possetis. 
 
 Quoniam, quae subsidia novitatis haberes, et habere posses, 
 ezposui, nunc de magnitudine petitionis dicam. 
 
 19. The futures are simila?* to the tenses of the present. 126 
 Therefore the present and perfect follow a future, and a 
 future (of course of the periphrastic conjugation) follows 
 the present and perfect ; as, mox intelligam, quantum me 
 ames or amaveris ; it is incorrect to say quantum me 
 amares or amasses. It is just so with the future perfect ; 
 
 as, si cog?iovero, quemadmodum te geras or quemadmodum 
 te gesseris. 
 
 Reperiam multos, quibus, quidquid velim, facile persuadeam. 
 
 Equidem miles nihil dicam de imperatore meo, cui prsesertim 
 gratias sciam ab senatu actas, quod non desperaverit de re 
 publica. 
 
 Quotusquisque tarn patiens est, ut velit discere, quod in usu 
 non sit habiturus. 
 
 Defectiones solis et lunse cognitce prcedictceque sunt, qua?, 
 quantse, quando futurce sint. 
 
 20. But in as far as the four subjunctives of the peri- 127 
 phrastic conjugation are considered as subjunctives of 
 proper futures, it may be assumed that two of these 
 (formed with essem and fuissem) depend on the tenses of 
 the past ; and hence the rule, that between presents and 
 futures a reciprocal connexion exists, but between pre- 
 terites and futures a partial connexion, inasmuch as fu- 
 tures may be made to depend on preterites, but not pre- 
 terites on futures. 
 
 Non verebar, ne mea vitse modestia parum valitura esset contra 
 falsos rumores. 
 
 Scripserat mihi, quamobrem non venturus esset. 
 8* 
 
90 USE OF THE MOODS. 128-130. 
 
 128 21. Thus, therefore, the entire rule for the connexion 
 of tenses will be this : 
 
 On the tenses of the present and future,, i. e. on the 
 present, the perfect as such, and on the two futures, fol- 
 low the tenses of the present, i. e. the present and perfect 
 subjunctive; and on the tenses of the past, i. e. on the 
 imperfect and pluperfect, and on the historic perfect, fol- 
 low the tenses of the past , i. e. the imperfect and pluper- 
 fect subjunctive. 
 
 USE OF THE 9EQO&S. 
 
 SECTION XI. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 129 1. The indicative is used in every proposition, the mat- 
 ter of which is declared absolutely and as a fact ; e. g. he 
 walks, thou writest, I believe. 
 
 Note. The indicative is used even with conjunctions express- 
 ing a condition, such as si, nisi, and others, if the condition is 
 represented not as a matter of opinion, but as a fact. 
 
 Mors aut plane negligenda est, si omnino extinguit animum, 
 aut etiam optanda, si aliquo eum deducit, ubi sit futurus aeternus. 
 
 Ista Veritas, etiamsi jucunda non est, mihi tamen grata est. 
 
 Adhuc certe, nisi ego insanio, stulte omnia et incaute fiunt. 
 
 Si te amicus tuus moriens rogaverit, ut hereditatem reddas suae 
 filiae, nee usquam id scripserit, nee cuiquam dizerit, quid faeies. 
 
 130 2. No further rule can be given ; the indicative being 
 the proper mood to be used, where there is no reason for 
 using another. Yet the following peculiarities of the 
 Latin usage, in respect to this mood, deserve notice. 
 
131. INDICATIVE MOOD. 91 
 
 3. The words oportere, necesse esse, debere, convenire, 131 
 licerc, and posse ; par, fas aquum, consent aneum, just urn, 
 and aquius, melius, optabilius, utilius esse, and others of 
 the same kind, are put in the indicative of past time, to 
 express that something should have been done, which in 
 fact has not been done ; e. g. hoc facere debebas ; " thou 
 shouldst have done this"; longe utilius fuit angustias 
 aditus occupare, "it would have been much better to 
 seize the pass." With the participle of the future passive 
 in dus, the indicative of sum in past time is much more 
 commonly used than the subjunctive; e. g. Hsec via tibi 
 ingredienda erat ; " this path should have been taken by 
 thee." 
 
 Aut non suscipi bellum oportuit, aut geri pro dignitate populi 
 Romani. 
 
 Tiberius Gracchus vitam, quam gloriosissime degere potuerat, 
 immatura morte finivit. 
 
 Jeci fundamenta rei publicae serius omnino, quam decuit. 
 
 Liberos tuos instituere atque erudire ad majorum instituta 
 atque civitatis disciplinam, non ad tua flagitia debuisti. 
 
 Hoc quidem praeceptum ad tollendam amicitiam valet ; illud 
 potius prsecipiendum fuit, ut diligentiam adhiberemus in ami- 
 citiis comparandis. 
 
 Note 1. This use of the indicative is, sometimes, even then 
 retained, when a conditional clause with the pluperfect subjunc- 
 tive is added. 
 
 Quern hominem, si qui pudor in te, atque adeo si qui metus 
 fuisset, sine supplicio dimittere non debuisti, hunc abs te sine 
 prsemio discedere noluisti. 
 
 Quodsi ita putasset, certe optabilius Miloni fuit dare jugulum. 
 
 Note 2. The difference between the English and Latin idiom, 
 as regards the moods, is more apparent than real ; ought and 
 should being really past indicatives of the verb to owe, and 
 another of the same meaning, now obsolete. But as they are also 
 used potentially in English, it is necessary to consider whether 
 they denote a present, a past, or a contingent obligation or pro- 
 priety ; and express them accordingly in Latin by an indicative 
 present, or past, or a tense of the potential mood. 
 
 Note 3. An obligation to do something at a given point of past 
 time, is expressed in Latin by an infinitive of the present tense, 
 as, debebas hoc facere ; in English by an infinitive of past time, as, 
 you ought to have done this. 
 
92 USE OF THE MOODS. 132, 133. 
 
 132 4. In the consequent member of a conditional propo- 
 sition, the past tenses are frequently put in the indicative, 
 in the place of the pluperfect subjunctive, although in 
 the conditional clause the imperfect or pluperfect subjunc- 
 tive has been used ; e. g. perieram, nisi tu accnrrisses. 
 
 Pons sublicius iter psene hostibus dedit, ni unus vir fuisset, 
 Horatius Codes. 
 
 Otacilius frumentum Syracusas misit ; quod ni tarn in tempore 
 subvenisset, victorious victisque pariter perniciosa fames instabat. 
 
 Cum dominatu unius omnia tenerentur, nee me angoribus 
 dedidi, quibus eram confectus, nisi iis restitissem, nee rursum 
 indignis homine docto voluptatibus. 
 
 Prseclare viceramus, nisi spoliatum, inermem, fugientem Le- 
 pidus recepisset Antonmm. 
 
 Note 1. It is sometimes possible to consider this indicative as 
 an indicative in sense, denoting that a part of the action of the con- 
 sequent member has taken place; e. g. Britanni degredi paullatim 
 et circumire terga vincentium coeperant, ni id ipsum veritus Agri- 
 cola quatuor equitum alas venientibus opposuisset. Jam fames 
 quam pestilentia tristior erat. ni annonse/orei subvention. Yet in 
 a majority of the cases, the indicative is actually used for the plu- 
 perfect subjunctive, in order to give more animation by represent- 
 ing that as having actually happened, which after all only exists 
 in the mind. 
 
 Note 2. It is to be observed that Cicero uses this indicative in 
 the consequent member of a conditional proposition, only with 
 those verbs and phrases stated above (131). 
 
 Note 3. The past tenses of the indicative are sometimes, 
 though seldom, used for the imperfect subjunctive. 
 
 Admonebat me res, ut hoc quoque loco intermissionem elo- 
 quentiae, ne dicam interitum, deplorarem, ni vererer, ne de me 
 ipse aliquid viderer queri. 
 
 Nam omnino supervacua erat doctrina, si natura sufficeret. 
 
 133 5. The indicative is commonly used after many general 
 and indefinite expressions, some fact being implied. Such 
 are quitquis, quotquot, quicunque, quantnscunqne, quanta- 
 luscnnqiie, utut, utcunqiie, ubiubi, ubicunque, undcunde, 
 undecunque, quoquo, quocunque, quaqua, quacunque, and 
 others of the same kind. 
 
 Quidquid id est, timeo Danaos et dona ferentes. 
 Quoquo modo se res habet, peto a te, ut tan turn Hippiae com- 
 modes, quantum tua fides dignitasque patitur. 
 
134-136. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 93 
 
 Omnino qui rei publicae praesunt, utilitatem civium sic 
 tueantur, ut, qucecunque agunt, ad earn referant obliti comrao- 
 dorum suorum. 
 
 Regis Deiotari voluntatem et copias, quantcecunquce sunt, 
 nostras esse duco. 
 
 6. In the same way propositions with sive — sive are 134 
 in the indicative. 
 
 Nam illo loco libentissime uti soleo, sive quid mecum ipse 
 cogito, sive quid aut scribo aut lego. 
 
 Tu tamen, sive habes aliquam spem de re publica, sive despe- 
 ras y ea para, meditare, cogita, quae esse in eo civi ac viro debent, 
 qui sit rem publicam in veterem dignitatem ac libertatem vindi- 
 caturus. 
 
 SECTION XII. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 1. The subjunctive is used, when a proposition is 135 
 stated not as matter of fact, but as conceived by the 
 mind. 
 
 Note. This does not mean that such a proposition as I believe, 
 he guesses, must be put in the subjunctive mood ; because here a 
 real fact, my belief, his conjecture, is stated. But when I say J 
 would believe, I might believe. &c. the subjunctive mood expresses 
 that my belief is not any thing actual, but something that either 
 does not yet exist, or may never exist. So in propositions which 
 imply a design, that which is to be effected or guarded against is 
 put in the subjunctive, as something not actual but contemplated 
 by the mind. Illud feci, ne putet me sibi inimicum esse, or, ne 
 putaret. 
 
 2. A difference is to be remarked between the four 136 
 tenses of the subjunctive, in conditional propositions, 
 both in the conditional clause depending on si, nisi, etsi, 
 ttiamsi, tametsi, and the consequent member. The pres- 
 
 lent and perfect describe some action or event, as conceived 
 lof by the mind, without necessarily implying that it does 
 Inot actually exist, or may not exist; the imperfect and 
 Ipluperfect exclude the idea of its actual existence ; e. g. 
 
94 USE OF TttE MOODS. 136. 
 
 si velit does not exclude his actually being willing, and is 
 followed by possit, poterit; si vellet implies that in point 
 of fact he is not willing, and is followed by posset. So 
 without si ; facerem, I would do it, but I do it not ; 
 cupiam, I may desire, which is so far from excluding the 
 actual desire, that it sometimes serves to express it. The 
 imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive, therefore, 
 must be used (with si, or alone); but, with a very slight 
 change of meaning, the indicative may stand, instead of 
 the present or the perfect subjunctive. The subjunctive 
 is used in preference, when the event is intended to be 
 set forth rather as something conceived of, than really 
 existing ; and with si and its compounds, where they have 
 the force of even if, even although, admitting that, &,c. ; 
 e. g. etiamsi id non consequare, tamen, &c, is said more 
 contingently and doubtfully than etiamsi id non consequere, 
 or consequere, which bring it much nearer to reality. 
 
 Tu si hie sis, aliter sentias. 
 
 Nisi in Uteris viverem, haud possem vivere. 
 
 Si hsec non gesta audiretis, sed picta videretis, tamen appare- 
 ret, uter esset insidiator, 
 
 Antiochus si tarn in agendo bello parere voluisset consiliis 
 Hannibalis, quam in suscipiendo instituerat, propius Tiberi quam 
 Thermopylis de summa imperii dimicasset. 
 
 Si ridere concessum sit, vituperetur tamen cachinnatio. 
 
 Omnia brevia tolerabilia esse debent, etiamsi magna sint, 
 
 Ista Veritas, etiamsi jucunda non est, mihi tamen grata est. 
 
 Dies dejiciat, si velim numerare, quibus bonis male evenerit, 
 nee minus, si commemorem, quibus improbis optime. 
 
 Note 1. It is a peculiarity of the Latin language, that even 
 completed actions of the past time, sometimes in the conditional, 
 sometimes in the consequent member of the proposition, are ex- 
 pressed by the imperfect. 
 
 Hujus si vita, si mores, si vultus denique non omnem commen* 
 dationem ingenii everteret (for evertisset), majus nomen in pa- 
 tronis fuisset. 
 
 Quod certe non fecissent, si suum numerum nautarum naves 
 haberent (for habuissent). 
 
137. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 95 
 
 Mortuis tarn religiose jura majores nostri tribuerunt, quod non 
 fecissent profecto, si nihil ad eos pertinere arbitrarentur (for arbi- 
 trati essent). 
 
 Nam si quam Rubrius injuriam suo nomine ac non impulsu tuo 
 et tua cupidine fecisset : de tui comitis injuria questum ad te 
 potius, quam te oppugnatum venirent (for venissent). 
 
 Esset (for fuisset) enim ip>i (Antonio) certe statim serviendum, 
 si Caesar ab eo regni insigne accipere xoluisset. 
 
 Note 2. With nisi, nisi forte, and nisi vero the indicative is 
 commonly used, when the preceding sentence is corrected. The 
 use of nisi forte to express irony is especially to be noticed. 
 
 Nemo fere saltat sobrius, nisi forte insanit. 
 
 Erat autem nihil novi, quod aut scriberem, aut ex te quaererem, 
 nisi forte hoc ad te yutas pertinere. 
 
 3. The present and perfect of the subjunctive are 137 
 used, to soften an assertion or statement; e. g. nemo 
 istud tibi concedat (concesserit) ; dixerit quispiam. The 
 perfect subjunctive especially is used frequently in this 
 way, with the force of the present. The signification 
 does not essentially differ from that of the future indica- 
 tive. 
 
 Hoc sine ulla dubitatione, confirmaverim eloquentiam rem 
 esse omnium difficillimam. 
 
 Excellentibus ingeniis citius defuerit ars, qua civem regant, 
 quam qua hostes superent. 
 
 At non historia cesserim Graecis, nee opponere Thucydidi 
 Sallustium verear. 
 
 Ubi socordiae te atque ignaviae tradideris, nequidquam deos 
 implores (you will implore) ; irati infestique sunt. 
 
 Note. The imperfect of the subjunctive of dicere, putare, cre- 
 dere, is used in the second person singular, in the sense of one 
 might say, one might think, implying that one does not. 
 
 Romani injussu signa referunt, mcestique (crederes victos) re- 
 deunt in castra. 
 
 Quo postquam venerunt, mirandum in modum (canes venaticos 
 diceres) ita odorabantur omnia et pervestigabant, ut, ubi quidquid 
 esset, aliqua ratione invenirent. 
 
96 USE OF THE MOODS. 138, 139 
 
 138 4. In like manner the subjunctive is used with ques- 
 tions, which imply a doubt respecting the probability or 
 propriety of an action; e. g. quis credat? quis hoc facere 
 ausit ? quid loquamur de hac re ? these are but milder 
 expressions for nemo credit, nemo audebit, non loquemur. 
 
 Quis dubitet, quin in virtute divitiae sint? 
 
 Quid enumerem artium multitudinem, sine quibusvita omnino 
 nulla esse potuisset ? 
 
 Ubi istum invenias, qui honorem amici anteponat suo 1 
 
 Valerius quotidie cantabat ; erat enim scenicus ; quid faceret 
 aliud? 
 
 Apud exercitum mihi fueris, inquit, tot annos 1 forum non 
 attigeris ? abfueris tamdiu t et cum longo inter vallo veneris, 
 cum iis, qui in foro habitarint, de dignitate contend as? 
 
 Caesar in earn spem venerat se sine pugna et sine vulnere 
 suorum rem conficere posse, quod re frumentaria adversarios 
 intercludisset ; cur etiam secundo prcelio aliquos ex suis emit- 
 teret? cur vulnerari pateretur optime de se meritos milites? 
 cur denique fortunam periclitaretur . 
 
 139 5. The subjunctive of the present, and sometimes of 
 the perfect, is also used, in the place of an imperative, to 
 express a wish, a request, a precept, or, with we, a prohi- 
 bition. 
 
 Emas, non quod opus est, sed quod necesse est. 
 
 Meminerimus etiam adversus infimos justitiam esse servandam. 
 
 Imitemur nostros Brutos, Camillos, Decios ; amemus patriam ; 
 pareamus senatui ; consulamus bonis ; id esse optimum putemus, 
 quod erit rectissimum. 
 
 Nihil incommodo valetudinis tuee feceris. 
 
 Note 1. The notion that the subjunctive is a more mild and 
 polite mode of command is erroneous; the fact is, that the sub- 
 junctive is rarely used in the second person instead of the impera- 
 tive; but the subjunctive in the third person is common, because 
 the imperative is defective in that person, having the third person 
 of the second form only. See sect. 13, 1. 
 
 Sit igitur sermo lenis minimeque pertinax; insit in eolepos; 
 nee vero, tamquam in possessionem venerit, excludat alios, sed 
 cum in reliquis rebus turn in sermone communi vicissitudinem non 
 
140, 141. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 97 
 
 iniquam putct, ac vldeat imprimis, quibus de rebus loquatur ; si 
 seriis, severitatem ad/ubcat ; si jocosis, leporem. 
 
 Note 2. Non is sometimes used with the subjunctive when ex- 
 pressing a prohibition or invitation, and, consequently, ncque is 
 used for neve in connecting such subjunctives. 
 
 JYon desperemus. 
 
 Difficilem et morosum offendet garrulus; ultro non etiam sileas. 
 
 JYon ancilla tuum jecur ulceret ulla puerve. 
 
 6. All dependent propositions, in which a purpose or 140 
 object is expressed, take the subjunctive. The conjunc- 
 tions, ut, ?ie, quo, quin, quominus, serve to connect such 
 propositions, and therefore govern a subjunctive, the tense 
 
 of which depends upon that of the leading verb. See 
 sect. 10, 124. 
 
 7. Ut f or uii 9 signifying in order that, so that, supposing 141 
 that, although, takes a subjunctive after it. It either con- 
 tains a reference to something future, which is the object, 
 purpose, or effect of another action, or it more exactly 
 defines the state or nature of a thing, with such words as 
 sic, it a, tarn, talis, tardus, tjusmocli, preceding. 
 
 Esse oportet, ut vivas, non vivere, ut edas. 
 
 Sol efficit, ut omnia jloreant. 
 
 Adeo Pylades Orestem dilexit, ut pro eo mori paratus esset. 
 
 Ut desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas. 
 
 Note 1. The adverbs ita, sic, tarn, are frequently omitted, in 
 which case ut has the meaning of so that. 
 
 Epaminondas fuit etiam disertus (for tarn disertus), ut nemo 
 Thebanus ei par esset eloquentja. 
 
 Note 2. Tantum abcst has the peculiarity, owing indeed to its 
 meaning, of being usually followed by two clauses withut. Some- 
 times the second clause is changed into the principal one, preceding 
 tantum abest, sometimes the second ut is turned into vix or etiam 
 with the indicative. 
 
 Tantum abest, ut cnervetur oratio compositione verborum, ut 
 aliter in ea vis esse non possit. 
 
 Tantum abest, ut nostra miremur, ut usque eo difficiles et morosi 
 simus, ut nobis non satis facial ipse Demosthenes. 
 
 Tantum abfuit, ut Rhodiorum prsesidio nostram frmaremus 
 classem, ut etiam a Rhodiis urbe, portu, commeatu, aqua denique 
 prokiberentur nostri milites. 
 9 
 
98 USE OF THE MOODS. 142, 143. 
 
 Vinculo, amoris nostri sunt arctissima ; tantum abest, ut ego ex 
 eOj quo adstricti sumus, laxari aliquid velim (for tantum abest, ut 
 ego ex eo vinculo, quo adstricti sumus, laxari aliquid velim, ut 
 vincula amoris nostri sint arctissima). 
 
 Tantum abfuit, ut inflammares nostros animos; somnum isto 
 loco vixtenebamus (for ut somnum isto loco vix teneremus). 
 
 142 8. Ne, in order that not, lest, expresses a negative pur- 
 pose, i. e. that something is to be guarded against ; e. g. 
 cura, ne denuo in morbum incidas : it is therefore not 
 equivalent to ut non, when ut expresses a consequence or 
 an effect; e. g. turn forte aegrotabam, ut ad nuptias tuas 
 venire non possem ; where ne could not have been used. 
 
 Scipio in Literninum concessit certo consilio, ne ad causam 
 dicendam adesset. 
 
 Cimon nunquam in hortis custodem imposuit, ne quis im- 
 pediretur, quominus ejus rebus, quibus quisque vellet, frueretur. 
 
 Nee itaclaudenda est res familiaris, ut earn benignitas aperire 
 non possit ; nee ita reseranda, ut pateat omnibus. 
 
 Note 1. Ut non is to be used, also, when the negation does not 
 belong to the whole clause, but to a single part or word. 
 
 Confer te ad Manlium, ut a me non ejectus ad alienos, sed in- 
 vitatus ad tuos isse videaris. 
 
 Note 2. Instead of ne, ut ne is frequently found, except after 
 verbs of fearing. 
 
 Non peto, ut decernatur aliquid novi, quod solet esse difficiJius, 
 sed ut ne quid novi decernatur. 
 
 In illam curam incumbe,mi Plamce, ut ne qua scintilla teterrimi 
 belli reiinquatur. 
 
 143 9. We have here to remark a peculiarity of the Latin 
 language, which considers the verbs of fearing, or caus- 
 ing f ear > as among those which imply a purpose. After 
 the verbs metuo, timeo, vereor, ne is therefore used, when 
 the following verb expresses a result contrary to our wish, 
 ut when it is agreeable to it; e. g. metuo, ne frustra labo- 
 rem susceperis; I fear that you have undertaken this labor 
 h*vain. Vereor, ut mature veniat; I fear that he may 
 not come in time. Ne, therefore, after these verbs, must 
 be rendered by that, or lest, and ut by that not, or lest 
 
143. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 99 
 
 not. This rule is not limited to verbs, but equally applies 
 to phrases, substantives, and adjectives, expressing fear. 
 
 Metuo, ne, dum minuere velim laborem, augeam. 
 
 Adulatores, si quern laudant, vereri se dicunt, ut illius facta 
 verbis consequi possint. 
 
 Vereor, ut satis diligenter actum in senatu sit de literis meis. 
 
 Non est periculum, qui leonem aut taurum pingat egregie, ne 
 idem in multis aliis quadrupedibus facere non possit. 
 
 Certe, ne lassescat fortuna, metus est. 
 
 Est et in rnetu peregrinantium, ut tentent valetudinem aquae 
 ignotae. 
 
 Bomilcar timore socii anxius, ne omisso vetere consifio novum 
 qucereret, literas ad eum mittit. 
 
 Note 1. Cavere in the signification to beware, to guard against, 
 is construed in the same manner with ne ; but in the signification 
 to provide, to take measures for, with ut; videre and observare in 
 the signification to look out, to beware, with ne. 
 
 Cavendum est, ne assentatoribus patefaciamus aures, neu adulari 
 nos sinamus. 
 
 Epicurus testamento cavit, ut dies natalis suus ageretur. 
 Vide, ne hoc tibi obsit. 
 
 Note 2. The accusative with the infinitive after timere is very 
 rare. 
 
 Quod (Sulla) timens suo corpori posse accidere, igni voluit 
 cremari. 
 
 Note 3. Neve or neu is compounded of ne and ve, and means 
 or that not, and that not; it must not, therefore, be confounded 
 with neque ; neque answers to non, neve to ne. The instances, 
 however, are not few where neque stands for et ne. 
 
 Caesar milites cohortatus, uti suae pristinae virtutis memoriam 
 retinerent, neu perturbarentur animo. 
 
 Persuadent, ut paterentur, nee (for neve) ultima experiri vellent. 
 
 Note 4. JYe non, after verbs of fearing, is equivalent to ut, the 
 negatives cancelling each other. * • 
 
 Non sum veritus, ne sustinere tua in me beneficia non possim. 
 Vereor, ne consolatio nulla possit vera reperiri. 
 Unum vereor, ne senatus Pompeium nolit dimittere. 
 
100 USE OF THE MOODS. 144, 145. 
 
 144 10. Quo is properly the ablative of the relative pro- 
 noun, and stands for ut eo ; in order that, that by this 
 means ; it is commonly joined with the comparative. Non 
 quo is not as if, instead of which non quod also is used ; 
 or, with a negative sense, not as if not, non quin, or non 
 quo non, answering to which, in the subsequent part of 
 the sentence, is sed, sed quod, or sed quia, but because, or 
 a proposition with ut. 
 
 Ilium cohortari non intermittemus, quo indies longius discendo 
 exercendoque se procedat. 
 
 Ager non semel aratur, quo meliores fructus possit et grandi- 
 ores edere. 
 
 Legem* brevem esse oportet, quo faeilius ab imperitis teneatur. 
 
 Ad te literas dedi, non quo liaberem magnopere, quod seribe- 
 rem, sed ut tecum loquerer absens. 
 
 Mihi quidem laudabiliora videntur omnia, quse sine vendita- 
 tione et sine populo teste fiunt , non quod fugiendus sit, sed 
 tamen nullum theatrum virtuti conscientia majus est. 
 
 Saepe soleo audire Roscium, cum ita dicat se adhuc reperire 
 diseipulum, quern quidem probaret, neminem ; non quo non 
 essent quidam probabiles, sed quia, si aliquid modo esset vitii, id 
 ferre ipse non posset. 
 
 Consilium tuum reprehendere non audeo, non quin ab eo 
 dissentiam, sed quod ea te sapientia esse judicem, ut meum con- 
 silium non anteponam tuo. 
 
 Note 1. The correctness of this use of non f/owas formerly ques- 
 tioned, but is now established. It cannot, however, be denied, that 
 non quod, non eo quod, non ideo quod, non quoniam, and in later 
 writers non quia, are more frequent. 
 
 Note 2. When quo stands for et eo, or refers to a following eo 
 or hoc, being simply a relative, not expressive of an intention, it 
 is joined with the indicative. 
 
 Romani gratulantes Horatium accipiunt; eo majore cum gaudio, 
 quo prope (quo magis prope) metum res fuerat. 
 
 145 11. Quin is used after negative propositions, or doubt- 
 ing questions, which carry a negative sense, in two ways, 
 Pirst, for qui non, qucenon, quod non (which may equally 
 well be used), after nemo, nullus, nihil — est, repcritur, 
 invenitur, viz est, cegrc reperitur. Secondly, after non 
 dubito, non est dubium, non ambigo, facere non possum, 
 
145. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 101 
 
 Jieri non potest, nihil (or haud multum, hand pro cul) abest, 
 nihil prater mitt o, non recuso, non abstineo, non impedio, 
 tenere me or temperare mihi non possum, and other nega- 
 tive propositions, with which also viz and cegre may be 
 joined. 
 
 Hominem esse arbitror neminem, qui nomen Yerris audierit, 
 quin facta quoque ejus nefaria commemorare possit. 
 
 Qais est, quin cernat, quanta vis sit in sensibus. 
 
 Nihil tarn difficile est, quin quserendo possit investigari. 
 
 Quis igitur dubitet, quin in virtute divitiae sint ? 
 
 Ego nihil praetermisi, quin Porapeium a Caesaris conjunctione 
 ax near em. 
 
 Infesta concio iHx inhiberi potuit, quin protinus saxa in 
 Polemonem jaceret. 
 
 Note 1. Quin is also used for the accusative, but very seldom. 
 Nego ullam picturam fuisse, quin (for quam non) conquisierit. 
 
 Note 2. It is to be observed with regard to quin of the second 
 part of the rule, that the negation contained in it, is not always 
 expressed in the translation. If, therefore, the dependent clause 
 is to be expressed negatively, non, or another negation, is added. 
 
 % In quibus non dubito, quin offensionem negligentiae vitare atque 
 effugere non possim. 
 
 Dubitandum non est, quin nunquam possit utilitas cum hone- 
 state contendere. 
 
 Note 3. After dubito and non dubito in the sense of scruple, 
 hesitate, the infinitive properly follows, if the subject does not 
 change, though in a few passages of Cicero quin is used in this 
 sense also. But after non dubitare, signifying not to doubt that, it 
 is less agreeable to good usage to employ the infinitive, than the 
 subjunctive with quin, though an exception occurs in Cicero. 
 
 Is, qui domino inspectante non dubitavit sedificium exstruere in 
 alieno. 
 
 Nemo dubitabat, quin voluntatem spectaret ejus (for eum volunta- 
 tem spectare ejus), quern statim de capite suo putaret judicaturum. 
 
 Dubitatis, judices, quin ab hoc ignotissimo Phryge nobilissimum 
 civem vindicetis (for ab hoc ignotissimo Phryge nobilissimum 
 civem vindicare) ? 
 
 Pompeius non dubitai ea, quae de re -publica nunc sentiat, mihi 
 valde probari (for quin ea mihi probentur). 
 
 9* 
 
102 USE OF THE MOODS. 146. 
 
 Note 4. I doubt whether, is dubito num ; for dubito an has, like 
 nescio an and hand scio an, an affirmative sense. 
 
 Dubito, num idem tibi suadere debeam. 
 
 Si per se virtus sine fortuna ponderanda sit, dubito, an hunc 
 primum omnium ponam. 
 
 Note 5. Quin is used in another sense with the indicative, as 
 a question and exhortation, why not? being evidently compounded 
 of qui non. 
 
 Quin conscendimus equos ? 
 
 Quin continetis vocem, indicem stultitiae vestrae ? 
 
 Quin igitur ulciscimur Grceciam, et urbi faces subdimus? 
 
 Note 6. Closely connected with the preceding use of quin, is 
 that with the imperative and first person plural of the subjunc- 
 tive. 
 
 Quin die statim. 
 
 Quin sic attendite, judices. 
 
 Quin experiamur. 
 
 146 12. Quominus, for ut eo minus (in order that not), is 
 used after verbs which express an hindrance, where also 
 ne, and, if a negative precedes, quin may be used. Such 
 verbs are arcere, defender e (to keep off), deter r ere, i?n- 
 pedire, intcrcedere, obsistere, obstarc, officere, prohibere, 
 recusare, repugnare, vetare, and many others which have a 
 similar meaning. 
 
 Cimon nunquam in hortis custodem imposuit, ne quis i?npedi- 
 retur, quominus ejus rebus, quibus quisque vellet, frueretur. 
 
 Parmenio deterrere regem voluit, quominus medicamentum 
 biberet, quod medicus dare constitueret. 
 
 Memoria pessimi proximo bello exempli terrebat consules, ne 
 rem committerent eo, ubi duae simui acies timendae essent. 
 
 Sulpicius inter cesser at , ne exules reducerentur . 
 
 Hanno neque intercludi ab Agrigento, nee, quin erumperet, 
 ubi vellet, prohiberi poterat. 
 
 Note. With prohibere, impedire, recusare, and vetare, the in- 
 finitive is not unfrequently used; and once ut is found in Cicero. 
 
 Hoc fieri in provincia nulla lex vetat. 
 
 Prohibentur parentes adire ad filios, prohibentur liberis suis 
 cibum vestitumque ferre. 
 
147-149. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 103 
 
 Quid est igitur, quod me impediat ea, qua? mihi probabilia vide- 
 antur, sequi? 
 
 D'\ prohibeant, judices, ut hoc, quod majores consilium publicum 
 vocari voluerunt, praesidium sectorum existimetur. 
 
 13. The particles utinam, more rarely ut, and o si, ex- 147 
 pressing a wish, are connected with the present and perfect 
 subjunctive, when the fulfilment of the wish is to be con- 
 sidered possible, or at least not impossible ; and with the 
 imperfect and pluperfect, when it is to be considered im- 
 possible. Comp. 136. 
 
 Utinam conata efficere possim ! 
 
 TJtinam tarn facile vera invenire possem, quam falsa convin- 
 cere ! 
 
 TJtinam in Ti. Graccho Cajoque Carbone talis mens ad rem 
 publicam bene gerendam fuisset, quale ingenium ad bene dicen- 
 dum fuit ! 
 
 O si angulus Die proximus accedat, qui nunc denormat 
 agellum ! 
 
 Ut te omnes dii deaeque perduint ! 
 
 Note 1. The negative wish, oh that not, ought to be expressed 
 by utinam ne, but utinam non is frequently used. 
 
 Illud utinam ne vere scriberem! 
 
 Haec ad te die natali meo scripsi, quo utinam susceptus non 
 essem, aut ne quid ex eadem matre postea natum essett 
 Note 2. The particle is sometimes omitted. 
 Tecum ludere sicut ipsa possem (oh that 1 could). 
 
 14. The subjunctive is used in the intermediate clauses 143 
 after relatives, and after conjunctions, if the clause is 
 meant to express the thought or the discourse of another, 
 
 or of one's self, viewed as another. This is sometimes 
 called oratio obliqua. For the sake of greater perspi- 
 cuity, the cases where such intermediate clauses occur, 
 will be mentioned separately. 
 
 15. Intermediate clauses in the construction of the 149 
 accusative with the infinitive. Here the rule is, if the 
 clause conveys the thought or discourse of the person 
 spoken of, or if it necessarily belongs to the accusative 
 with the infinitive as an essential part, then the verb of 
 that clause must be in the subjunctive. 
 
104 USE OF THE MOODS. 150. 
 
 Socrates dicere solebat, omnes in eo, quod scirent, satis esse 
 eloquentes. 
 
 Satis nobis persuasum esse debet, si omnes deos hominesque 
 celare possimus, nihil tamen in juste esse faciendum. 
 
 Quid potest esse tarn apertum tamque perspicuum, cum 
 ccelum suspeximus, ccelestiaque contemplati sumus, quam esse 
 aliquod numen praestantissimse mentis, quo hsec regantur. 
 
 Quis confidit semper sibi illud stabile et iirmum permansurum, 
 quod fragile et caducum sit. 
 
 Credidit Quintius eum, qui orationem bonorum imitaretur, 
 facta quoque imitaturum. 
 
 Atticum ipsum vere gloriantem audivi se nunquam cum sorore 
 in simultate fuisse, quam prope aequalem habebat. 
 
 Cato mirari se ajebat, quod non rideret haruspex, haruspicem 
 cum vidisset. 
 
 Socrates solitum ajunt dicere perfectum sibi opus esse, si quis 
 satis esset concitatus cohortatione sua ad studium cognoscendae 
 percipiendaeque virtutis ; quibus enim id persuasum esset, ut nihil 
 mallent se esse quam bonos viros, iis reliquam facilem esse do- 
 ctrinam. 
 
 Note. Explanatory clauses, circumlocutions, with the relative 
 pronoun, are sometimes found with the verb in the indicative. 
 
 Itaque ille Marius item eximie L. Plotium dilexit, cujus ingenio 
 putabat ea, quce gesserat, posse celebrari. 
 
 150 16. When a proposition depends on another expressed 
 in the subjunctive mood, the subjunctive is used in the de- 
 pendent proposition, if it forms an essential part of the 
 leading proposition, being included in the object, the pur- 
 pose, or the circumstances supposed. 
 
 Rex imperavit, ut, quce bello opus essent, pararentur. 
 
 Eo simus animo, ut nihil in malis ducamus, quod sit a deo 
 immortali constitutum. 
 
 Si aliter accidisset, qui possem queri, cum mihi nihil improviso 
 nee gravius, quam expectavissem, pro tantis meis factis evenisset. 
 
 Breviter dicendum est, ne in hujusmodi rebus diutius, quam 
 ratio prsecipiendi postulet, commoremur. 
 
151. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 105 
 
 Note 1. It is to be observed that not all clauses with the sub- 
 junctive express an object or purpose but some, ita, tarn, talis, and 
 similar expressions preceding, simply express a quality; in this 
 case the intermediate clauses have the verb in the indicative. 
 
 Asia vero tarn opima est et fertilis, ut multitudine earum rerum, 
 quce exportantur, facile omnibus terris antecellat. 
 
 Note 2. As in the preceding rule (149, note), so here, the in- 
 dicative is used in circumlocutions. 
 
 Eloquendi vis efficit, ut ea, quce ignoramus, discere, et ea, quce 
 scimus, alias docere possimus. 
 
 Efficiatur autem ab oratore, necne, ut ii, qui audiunt, ita 
 afficiantur, ut orator velit, vulgi assensu et populari approbatione 
 judicari solet. 
 
 17. When a proposition, containing the statement of a 151 
 fact, and therefore being in the indicative mood, has 
 another dependent upon it, connected by a causal con- 
 junction or relative, in which something is alleged as the 
 sentiment or language of the person spoken of, or some 
 other, and not of the writer, the dependent proposition is 
 in the subjunctive mood. By the proposition : noctu 
 ambulabat in publico Themistocles, quod somnum capere 
 non posset ; it is asserted, that Themistocles himself assign- 
 ed that reason. If the writer means to give the reason as 
 his own remark, he must say potcrat in the indicative, as 
 well as ambulabat. 
 
 Socrates accusatus est, quod corrumperet juventutem. 
 
 Aristides -nonne ob earn causam expulsus est patria, quod 
 praeter modum Justus esset ? 
 
 Bene majores nostri accubitionem epularem amicorum, quia 
 vitas conjunctionem haberet, convivium nominarunt. 
 
 Recte Socrates exsecrari enm solebat, qui primus utilitatem a 
 natura sejunxisset. 
 
 The clause, introduced by quod corrumperet, is the as- 
 sertion of the accusers ; in the second example, the 
 subjunctive expresses, that the reason was given by the 
 Athenians according to the well-known story, but does 
 not decide whether he was in reality so just or not. With 
 the indicative it would not have been so. 
 
106 USE OF THE MOODS. 152. 
 
 Note 1. When such a dependent clause is announced as com- 
 ing from the mind of the subject in the leading proposition, or is 
 given as his remark, all references which are made to that sub- 
 ject by means of pronouns must be made by the reflective pronoun 
 sui, sibi, se, and the possessive derived from it, suus. It is not 
 so in English. Thus : Rex militi aperuit, quis esset, multa polli- 
 cens, si se conservasset. In English him. 
 
 Nam mihi scito jam a regibus ultimis allatas esse literas, quibus 
 mihi gratias agant, quod se mea sententia reges appellaverim. 
 
 Quaedam Italiae civitates diem, quo primum ad se venisset 
 Augustus, initium anni fecerunt. 
 
 Ex prcelio ad Trasimenum sex millia ferme primi agminis ignari 
 omnium, quae post se agerentur, ex saltu evasere. 
 
 Turn ei dormienti idem ille visus est rogare, ut, quoniam sibi 
 vivo non subvenisset, mortem suam ne inultam esse pateretur. 
 
 Note 2. Cicero frequently uses the verbs dico, puto, arbitror, 
 and others of the same meaning, in the subjunctive by a sort of 
 attraction, although strictly this mood belongs to the verb which 
 expresses what was thought or said. 
 
 Cum enim Hannibalis permissu exisset de castris, rediit paullo 
 post, quod se oblitum nescio quid diceret (for quod nescio quid 
 oblitus esset). 
 
 Cui cum esset nuntiatum, quod ilium iratum allaturum ad se 
 aliquid contra patrem arbitraretur, surrexit e lectulo (for quod ille 
 iratus allatur us esset ad se aliquid contra patrem). 
 
 Ab Atheniensibus, locum sepultures intra urbem ut darent, im- 
 petrare non potui, quod religione se impediri dicerent (for quod 
 religione impedirentur). # 
 
 152 18. All sentences which contain an indirect question, 
 i. e. which do not put a question, but state the subject of 
 a question, dependent upon some other verb or propo- 
 sition, are in the subjunctive mood. All the words which 
 are used, in direct questions, with the indicative mood, 
 have in this way a subjunctive; quis, quce, quid; qui, 
 qua, quod ; quot, qualis, quantus, quam, ubi, undc, quare, 
 cur, uter, quo, quomodo, utrum, an, ne (enclitic), num. 
 
 Ssepe ne utile quidem est scire, quid futurum sit. 
 Qualis sit animus, ipse animus nescit. 
 Incertum est, quo te loco mors expectet. 
 
 Tarquinius Superbus Prisci Tarquinii regis filius neposne 
 fuerit, parum liquet. 
 
152. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 107 
 
 Note 1. There are a few exceptions to this rule in which the 
 indicative occurs, but they are of no weight compared to the in- 
 numerable instances in which the subjunctive is used. 
 
 Note 2. As to the double question, whether — or, whether di- 
 rect or indirect, it is to be remarked that or is never expressed by 
 aut, but by an or the enclitic ne. The first question may be in- 
 troduced by utrum, num, or likewise by ne, or it may stand with- 
 out any interrogative particle. Thus there is a fourfold form of 
 these double interrogates : 
 
 1 . utrum (num) — an 
 
 2. — an 
 
 3. ne enclitic — an 
 
 4. — ne enclitic. 
 
 Postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit, ne in versu quidem refert. 
 
 Refert, oratorem qui audiant, senatus an populus an judices, 
 frequentes an pauci an singuli. 
 
 Albus ateme fueris, ignorabat. 
 
 Coriolano Veturia: Sine, priusquam complexum accipio, sciam, 
 inquit, ad hostem an ad fiiium venerim, captiva materwe in castris 
 tuis sim. 
 
 Quaeritur, virtus suamne propter dignitatem an propter fructus 
 aliquos expetatur. 
 
 Pompeius humanitate tanta est, ut difficile dictu sit, utrum hostes 
 magis virtutem ejus pugnantes timuerint, an mansuetudinem victi 
 dilexerint. 
 
 Utrum tandem existimas facilius fuisse, Tubero, Ligarium ex 
 Africa exire, an vos in Africam non venire ? 
 
 Illud considerandum videri solet, num propter imbecillitatem 
 atque inopiam desiderata sit amicitia, an esset antiquior et pul- 
 chrior et magis a natura ipsa profecta alia causa. 
 
 JYum igitur, si cui fundus inspiciendus sit, Magonis Karthagini- 
 ensis sunt libri perdiscendi, an hac communi intelligentia contenti 
 esse possumus ? 
 
 Note 3. If in the second clause or not stands without its own 
 verb, necne or an minus are commonly used ; but an non when 
 the former verb is repeated. It is to be observed, however, that 
 there are many exceptions to both parts of this rule. 
 
 Sunt haec tua verba necne ? 
 
 Quid possit effici necne, maxime ex causis iis, quae quamque rem 
 efficiant, est videndum. 
 
 Dicam huic, an non dicam ? 
 
108 USE OF THE MOODS. 152. 
 
 Dii ita vos potentes hujus consilii fecerunt, ut, Latium deinde, 
 an non sit, in vestra manu posuerint. 
 
 Hoc doce, doleam, necne doleam, nihil interesse. 
 Qnaeritur, Corinthiis bellum indicamus, an non. 
 Deliberet renuncietque hodie mihi, velitne, an non. 
 
 Note 4. With regard to an it should be observed that in the 
 writers of the best age, and in Cicero in particular, it is principally 
 used to introduce the second member of a double question, and 
 signifies, therefore, or whether. From this usage there are but two 
 exceptions, the one apparent, the other real, which deserve special 
 attention. 
 
 a. The first exception is when an (also anne, an vero), with the 
 signification of or, introduces a direct question, no other question 
 preceding it ; e. gr. invitus te offendi, an putas me delectari 
 lxdendis hominibus? " I have offended thee against my will, or 
 do you think I take pleasure in giving pain ? " It is apparent 
 that the expression is elliptic, a previous question being under- 
 stood, viz. " do you not believe it. or do you think," etc. 
 
 A rebus gerendis senectus abstrahit. Quibus ? Jin his, quae 
 geruntur juventute ac viribus (from all, or from those which re- 
 quire youth and strength) ? 
 
 Recte requiris, inquam, Attice ; sed audies ex me fortasse, quod 
 non omnes probent. Jin tu, inquit, id laboras, si huic modo Bruto 
 probaturus es (why do you say this ? or do you care, etc.)? 
 
 Cur tandem ? inquam ; an expectas, quid ego judicem de istis 
 (do you really wish for information concerning them, or do you 
 want to ascertain my opinion of them) ? 
 
 b. The second exception is, when an, in the signification of 
 whether not, or but, follows dubito, dubium est, incertum est, 
 delibero, haisito, and especially nescio or hand sclo, all of which 
 express doubt, but with an inclination to the affirmative, " I rather 
 think." These expressions may be considered as adverbial phrases 
 signifying perhaps. If the dependent clause is negative, it is ex- 
 pressed by nullus, nemo, nunquam, not ullus, quisquam^ unquam. 
 The verb of the dependent clause is, of course, in the subjunc- 
 tive. 
 
 JYescio an reliquis in rebus omnibus idem eveniat (I do not know 
 but the same takes place in all other things; I rather think it 
 does). 
 
 Eloquentia quidem nescio anhabuisset parem neminem (I do not 
 know but he would not have had an equal in eloquence; perhaps 
 he would not have had an equal). 
 
153, 154. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 109 
 
 Mea quidem sententia haud scio an nulla (senectus) beatior esse 
 possit. 
 
 There is but one instance in Cicero, where quidquam stands for 
 nihil, de Amic.6; but even there the manuscripts are at variance : 
 qua quidem haud scio an excepta sapientia quidquam (or nihil) 
 melius homini sit datum. 
 
 It is probably owing to the adverbial character of this phrase, 
 haud scio an (perhaps), that in one passage the dependent verb is 
 in the indicative, Terence Adelphi 4, 5, 33 : qui infelix haud scio 
 an illam misere nunc amat. 
 
 19. Relative pronouns and relative adverbs are used 153 
 with the subjunctive (besides the cases already mentioned, 
 148-150), when the proposition which they introduce 
 does not merely contain some additional descriptive cir- 
 cumstance, but expresses a consequence, a defining circum- 
 stance, or a purpose and motive. 
 
 Note. In the sentence, miles, quern metus mortis non perturbaret, 
 the relative does not merely introduce a circumstance, descriptive 
 of an individual already mentioned to have been a soldier, but 
 ascribes to him a degree of courage, of which the consequence 
 was, that he could not be alarmed with the fear of death. When 
 I say, O miserum senem, qui mortem contemnendam esse in tam 
 longa aetate non viderit ! qui non viderit is not merely descriptive 
 of the old man, but contains the reason why the epithet miser is 
 applied to him. The Latin relative governing the subjunctive 
 is, in English, usually expressed by some other part of speech; 
 e. g. a soldier not to be disturbed by the fear of death. O wretched 
 old man not to have learnt ! &c. 
 
 The following are the several cases of this use of the 
 relative with a subjunctive. 
 
 20. When a demonstrative, sic, ita, tam, talis, is (in the 154 
 sense of such), hvjusmodi, &c. has gone before, and the 
 relative which follows can be resolved by ut, so that cujus 
 
 is equivalent to ut, mei, tui, sui, illius, ejus ; cut, to ut 
 with the dative ; quern, to ut with the accusative, and so 
 in the plural. 
 
 Multae res sunt ejusmodi, quarum exitus nemo providere 
 possit. 
 
 Qui potest temperantiam laudare is, qui summum bonum in 
 voluptate ponat J 
 
 Non sumus ii, quibus nihil verum esse videatur, sed ii, qui 
 omnibus veris falsa quaedam adjuncta esse dicamus. 
 10 
 
110 USE OF THE MOODS. 155. 
 
 In C. Ccelio fuit eloquentiae tantum, quod esset in re publica 
 ipsius dignitati satis. 
 
 Nihil tanti fuit, quo venderemus fidem nostram et libertatem. 
 
 Nulla gens tarn fera, nemo omnium tarn immanis est, cujus 
 mentem non imbuerit deorum opinio. 
 
 Innocentia est affectio talis animi, qua noceat nemini. 
 
 Habetis eum consulem, qui parere vestris decretis non dubitet. 
 
 Note. The person of the verb connected with qui depends 
 upon the preceding clause. 
 
 Non sum ego is consul, qui ut plerique nefas esse arbitrer 
 Gracchos laudare. 
 
 Denique te noli oblivisci Ciceronem esse et eum, qui aliis con- 
 sueveris prsecipere. 
 
 155 21. Even when no demonstrative precedes, the relative 
 sometimes takes a subjunctive mood, if a demonstrative be 
 implied. 
 
 Nonne satius est mutum esse, quam, quod nemo intelligat, 
 dicere. 
 
 Nunc dicis aliquid, quod ad rem pertmeat. 
 
 Audies ex me fortasse, quod non omnes probent. 
 
 Mea quidem sententia paci, qua nihil habitura sit insidiarum, 
 semper est consulendum. 
 
 Oratorem plane perfectum, et cui nihil admodum desit, De- 
 mosthenem facile dixeris. 
 
 Inter bellorum magnorum curas intercessit res parva dictu, 
 sed qua studiis in magnum certamen excesserit. 
 
 Tamen ante Periclem, cujus scripta quaedam feruntur, et 
 Thucydidem, qui non nascentibus Athenis sed jam adultis 
 fuerunt, litera nulla est, qua quidem ornatum aliquem habeat, et 
 oratoris esse videatur. 
 
 Note. Here is also to be mentioned the use of the relative pro- 
 noun with the subjunctive, to express a limitation or qualification; 
 as, quod ego intelligam, " as far as I understand it" ; quod intel- 
 ligi possit ; quod conjectura provideri possit ; quod salva fide 
 possim ; quod commodo tuo fiat, " as far as it can be done without 
 injury to thee " ; etc. Quidem is frequently added. 
 
 Omne argentum ablatum ex Sicilia est, nihil cuiquam, quod 
 suum dici vellet, relictum. 
 
156, 157. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Ill 
 
 Refertae sunt Catonis orationes amplius centum quinquaginta, 
 quos quidem aut invenerim aut legerim, et verbis et rebus illustribus. 
 
 Neque quidquam est de hac re post Panaetium explicatum, quod 
 quidem mihi probaretur de iis, qua in manus meas venerint. 
 
 22. The subjunctive is used after comparatives with 156 
 quam qui in all its cases. 
 
 Major sum, quam cui possit fortuna nocere (i. e. quam ut 
 mihi possit nocere). 
 
 Philippo insueto vera audire ferocior ^Emilii oratio visa est, 
 quam qua habenda apud regem esset. 
 
 Majus gaudium fuit, quam quod universum homines caperent. 
 
 Campani major a deliquerant, quam quibus ignosci posset, 
 
 Macedones et majorcs et magis ramosas arbores caedebant, 
 quam quas ferre cum armis miles posset. 
 
 Note. The subjunctive is used after a comparative and quam, 
 even without a relative pronoun. 
 
 Postea quidquid erat oneris in nautis remigibusque exigendis, in 
 frumento imperando. Segestanis praeter eeteros imponebat ali- 
 quanto amplius, quam ferre possent. 
 
 Zeno Eleates perpessus est omnia potius, quam conscios delendas 
 tyrannidis indicaret. 
 
 Pausanias epulabatur more Persarum luzuriosius, quam, qui 
 aderant, ferre possent. 
 
 23. With indefinite general expressions (both affirma- 157 
 tive and negative) the relative, introducing the circum- 
 stance which characterizes the class indefinitely referred 
 
 to, takes the subjunctive after it. Such expressions are 
 est, sunt, reperiuntur, inveniuntur, existunt, exoriuntur 
 (supply homines); est uhi, est uncle; general negatives, 
 nemo, nullus, nihil est ; interrogative expressions, implying 
 a negative, quis est J quid est, qui, quce, quod (interrogative), 
 quotusquisqne, quantum est, and similar phrases. A de- 
 monstrative can generally be supplied before the relative. 
 
 Sunt, qui censeant una animum et corpus occidere animumque 
 in corpore extingui. 
 
 Nihil est, quod tarn miseros faciat quam impietas et scelus. 
 
 Quotus enim quisque est, cui sapientia omnibus omnium 
 divitiis praeponenda videatur? 
 
 Quce latebra est, in quam non intret metus mortis 1 
 
112 USE OF THE MOODS. 158. 
 
 Quis est, qui utilia fugiat f 
 
 Quotus quisque est, qui voluptatem neget esse bonum ? 
 
 Helvetiis omnibus fructibus amissis domi nihil erat, quo famem 
 tolerarent. 
 
 Beperies multos, quibus periculosa et calida eonsilia quietis et 
 cogitatis et splendidiora et majora videantur. 
 
 Note 1. The same is the case with these expressions; est quod, 
 " there is reason why " ; non est, quod ; nihil est, quod (or quare y 
 or cur), " there is no reason why " ; quid est, quod • quid est, cur, 
 u what reason is there why ; " habeo or non habeo, quod dicam, " I 
 have something", or a I have nothing to say". 
 
 In viam quod te des hoc tempore, nihil est. 
 Quid tandem est, cur festines ? 
 
 Si unquam ante alias ullo in bello fuit, quod diis immortalibus 
 gratias ageretis, hesternum id prcelium fuit. 
 Non est, quod te pudeat sapienti assentiri. 
 Nihil est, quod quisquam magnitudinem artium pertimescat. 
 Non habeo, quod quern accusem meorum. 
 Quid habes, quod reprehendas f 
 
 Note 2. As the use of the subjunctive in these expressions de- 
 pends on the relative's characterizing the class which is indefinitely 
 referred to : so the indicative is used, if there be anything which 
 fixes the verb to a definite person or thing. 
 
 Sunt nonnullce discipline, quae propositis bonorum et malorum 
 finibus officium omne pervertunt. 
 
 Sunt^besticB quadam, in quibus inest aliquid simile virtutis. 
 
 Note 3. There are instances, however, where after such ex- 
 pressions when used definitely, the subjunctive occurs, and, on 
 the other hand, when used indefinitely, the indicative; yet the 
 latter is to be considered a Grecism, and is generally confined to 
 poets. 
 
 Sunt enim permulti optimi viri, qui valetudinis causa in haec loca 
 veniant. (Yet in the same letter Cicero says : sunt enim permulti 
 optimi viri, qui valetudinis causa in his locis conveniunt.) 
 
 Sunt enim, qui quod sentiunt, etsi optimum sit, tamen invidiae 
 metu non audent dicere. 
 
 158 24. When the proposition introduced by the relative 
 contains the reason of what goes before, the subjunctive is 
 used. 
 
 O fortunate adolescens, qui tuae virtutis Homerum praeconem 
 inveneris. 
 
159. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 113 
 
 Caninius fuit mirifica vigilantia, qui suo toto consulate so- 
 mnum non viderit. 
 
 Quern ardorem studii censetis fuisse in Archimede, qui, dum 
 in pulvere quaedam describit attentius, ne patriam quidem captam 
 esse senserit 1 
 
 O magna vis veritatis, qace contra hominum ingenia facile se 
 per se ipsa defendat. 
 
 Nunquam laudari satis digne poterit philosophia, cui, qui 
 pareat, omne tempus setatis sine molestia possit degere. 
 
 Tarquinio quid impudentius, qui bellum gereret cum iis, qui 
 ejus non tulerant superbiam. 
 
 Note 1. What is thus expressed by qui alone, is more forcibly 
 expressed by ut qui, quippe qui, utpote qui, in all cases. Ut qui, 
 which is frequent in Livy and later writers, is not used by Cicero. 
 
 Convivia cum patre non inibat, quippe qui ne in oppidum qui- 
 dem nisi perraro veniret. 
 
 Plato a Dionysio tyranno crudeliter violatus est, quippe quern 
 venumdari jussisset. 
 
 Sunt homines natura curiosi, ut qui sermunculis etiam fabellisque 
 ducantur. , 
 
 A Catilina in Galliam properante Antonius non procul aberat, 
 utpote qui magno exercitu locis aequioribus expedito in fuga seque- 
 retur. 
 
 Note 2. The person of the verb connected with either of these 
 relative pronouns, depends upon the preceding clause, as in 154, 
 Note. 
 
 25. When the proposition introduced by the relative 159 
 expresses the end and motive of the action mentioned in 
 the preceding proposition, so that ut might be substituted 
 for it, the verb must be in the subjunctive mood. 
 
 Sunt autem multi, qui eripiunt aljis, quod aliis largiantur. 
 
 Populus Romanus sibi tribunos plebis creavit, per quos contra 
 senatum et consules tutus esse posset. 
 
 Super tabernaculum regis, unde ab omnibus conspici posset, 
 imago solis crystallo inclusa fulgebat. 
 
 Socrates, cum ei scriptam orationem disertissimus orator 
 Lysias attulisset, quam, si ei videretur, edisceret, ut ea pro se in 
 judicio uteretur, non invitus legit, et commode scriptam esse 
 dixit. 
 
 10* 
 
114 USE OF THE MOODS. 160-162. 
 
 Messanam sibi Verres urbem delegerat, quam haberet adju- 
 tricem scelerum. 
 
 In funeribus Atheniensium sublata erat celebritas virorum ac 
 mulierum, quo lamentatio minueretur. 
 
 Non oris causa modo homines aequum fuit sibi habere specu- 
 lum, ubi os contemplarent suum, sed qui perspicere possent cor. 
 
 160 26. After the adjectives dignus, indignus, aptus, and 
 idoneus, the relative with the subjunctive is commonly 
 used ; as, digitus est, cvjus exemplum imitere, " he deserves 
 that you should imitate his example" ; indignus est, qui 
 laudetur. 
 
 Voluptas non est digna, ad quam sapiens respiciat. 
 
 Qui modeste paret, videtur, qui aliquando imperet, dignus 
 esse. 
 
 Forsitan non indigni sumus, qui nobismet ipsi multam irro- 
 gemus. 
 
 Academici et Peripatetici mentem volebant rerum esse judi- 
 cem ; solam censebant idoneam, cui crederetur. 
 
 In Catone majore Catonem induxi senem disputantem, quia 
 nulla videbatur aptior persona, qua de setate loqueretur. 
 
 161 27. Lastly the subjunctive is sometimes used in a nar- 
 rative, after relative pronouns and adverbs, in the imperfect 
 and pluperfect, when a repeated action is spoken of, when 
 in Greek the relative with the optative is used. 
 
 Nee quisquam Pyrrhum, qua tulisset impetum, sustinere va- 
 luit. 
 
 Semper habiti sunt fortissimi, qui summam imperii potirentur. 
 
 Ut quisque maxime laboraret locus, aut ipse occurrebat, aut 
 aliquos mittebat. 
 
 Consilium etmodum adhibendo, ubi res posceret, priores erant. 
 
 Quemcunque lictor prehendisset, tribunus mitti jubebat. 
 
 162 23. It has been already observed (147-150), that all 
 conjunctions (especially the causal) take the subjunctive, 
 when they stand in clauses conveying the sentiment or the 
 words of another. Further : of the subjunctive with si 
 and its compounds, see 129 of this section. It remains 
 to speak of those conjunctions, which of themselves re- 
 quire an indicative or a subjunctive mood. They are 
 
163. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 115 
 
 commonly of such a kind, that the reason for using one 
 or the other mood is easily discoverable from the con- 
 nexion of the ideas. 
 
 29. Quasi, quam si, velut, velut si, ianquam, ac si, just 163 
 as if; dummodo, provided only (for which dum and modo 
 alone are used), and joined with a negation, dummodo ne, 
 dum ne, modo ne, always denote something supposed, as 
 distinguished from something real, and therefore admit 
 only a subjunctive. The tense depends upon the tense of 
 the leading verb. 
 
 Sic cogitandum est, tamquam aliquis in pectus intimum in- 
 spicere possit. 
 
 Multi omnia recta et honesta negligunt, dummodo potentiam 
 consequantur . 
 
 Stultissimum est in luctu capillum evellere, quasi calvitio 
 mceror levetur. 
 
 Sic Plancius quaestor est factus, quam si esset summo loco 
 natus. 
 
 Me juvat, velut ipse in parte laboris ac periculi fuerim, ad 
 finem belli Punici pervenisse.' 
 
 Milites, quis impugnandus agger, ut si murum succederent, 
 gravibus superne ictibus conflictabantur. 
 
 Caligula tragicurn illud subinde jactabat : oderint, dum metu- 
 ant. 
 
 Manent ingenia senibus, modo permaneat studiumet industria. 
 
 Gallia oranes aequo animo belli patitur injurias, dummodo 
 repellat periculum servitutis. 
 
 Dum ille nesis, quern ego esse nolo, sis mea causa, quilubet. 
 
 Mediocritas placet Peripateticis, et recte placet, modo ne 
 laudarent iracundiam. 
 
 Sit summa in jure dicendo severitas, dummodo ea ne varietur 
 gratia, sed conservetur sequabilis. 
 
 Note. The subjunctive is for the same reason used after non 
 quo, non eo quod, non ideo quod, non quia, generally followed by 
 another clause with sed quod or sed quia and the indicative, be- 
 cause in this the real reason is assigned. See 144. 
 
 Pugiles vero, etiam cum feriunt adversarium, in jactandis 
 caestibus ingemiscunt, non quod doleant animove succumbant, sed 
 quia profundenda voce omne corpus intenditur, venitque plaga 
 vehementior. 
 
116 USE OF THE MOODS. 164, 165. 
 
 164 30. Quamvis, distinguished from quamquam, is used 
 with the subjunctive, when it signifies however much, like 
 quantum vis and quamlibet. Licet, properly a verb, but 
 which has become a conjunction, although, (or he, she, 
 they may,) always takes the subjunctive mood. Ut in the 
 signification, although, or supposing that, and ne, although 
 not, or supposing that not, take the subjunctive. 
 
 Homines, quamvis in turbidis rebus sint, tamen, si modo 
 homines sunt, interdum animis relaxantur. 
 
 Quod turpe est, id, quamvis occultetur, tamen honestum fieri 
 nullo modo potest. 
 
 Vitia mentis, quantumvis exigua sint, in majus excedunt. 
 
 Licet strenuum metum putes esse, velocior tamen spes est. 
 
 Licet ex his orationibus eligant, quae notatione et laude digna 
 sint, omnes oratoriae virtutes in iis reperiuntur. 
 
 Detrahat auctori multum fortuna licebit, tu tamen ingenio clara 
 ferere meo. 
 
 Ut desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas. 
 
 Ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est. 
 
 Note 1. Quamquam has generally the indicative, a few in- 
 stances only being found in Cicero in which it is used with the 
 subjunctive. 
 
 Note 2. In later writers, Tacitus for example, quamvis and 
 quamquam have changed their signification, and quamquam, is 
 used with the subjunctive, quamvis with the indicative. 
 
 165 31. Nedum, not to say that, much less, as well as ne 
 which frequently occurs in the same signification, are 
 always used with the subjunctive. 
 
 Optimis temporibus clarissimi atque amplissimi viri vim tri- 
 buniciam sustinere non potuerunt ; nedum his temporibus sine 
 judiciorum remediis salvi esse possimus. 
 
 Novam earn potestatem (tribunorum plebis) eripuere patribus 
 nostris, ne nunc dulcedine semel capti ferant desiderium. 
 
 Note 1. Nedum, without a verb of its own, becomes an ad- 
 verb, much less. 
 
 iEgre inermis tanta multitudo, nedum armata, sustineri potest. 
 
 Note 2. Livy uses sometimes nedum ut, as a conjunction, for 
 the simple nedum. 
 
166, 167, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 117 
 
 Nee cetera modo tribuni tranquillo peregere ; sed refecti quoque 
 in insequentem annum ne voce quidem incommoda, nedum ut ulla 
 vis fieret, paullatim permulcendo tractandoque mansuefecerant 
 plebem. 
 
 32. Antequam and priusquam, before, have commonly 166 
 in a narrative the imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunc- 
 tive : with the present, the indicative and subjunctive are 
 equally used, as antequam dico and antequam die am. It 
 
 is to be observed that these two conjunctions, like post- 
 qua?n, occur frequently divided into the words of which 
 they are composed. 
 
 Hannibal omnia et in proelio apud Zamam et ante aciem, 
 priusquam excederet pugna, erat expertus. 
 
 Saepe magna indoles virtutis, priusquam rei publicse prodesse 
 potuisset, extincta fuit. 
 
 Csesar ad Pompeii castra pervenit prius, quam Pompeius 
 sentire posset. 
 
 Ante videmus fulgurationem, quam sonum audiamus. 
 
 Membris utimur prius, quam didicimus, cujus ea utilitatis 
 causa habeamus. 
 
 Omnia experiri certum est, priusquam pereo. 
 
 33. The particles of time, dum, donee, quamdiu, and 167 
 quoad, have an indicative, when they signify as long as. 
 
 In the sense of until, they may have either mood ; the 
 indicative, if the action is represented as a fact ; the sub- 
 junctive, if it is merely conceived as possible, or if an 
 object or intention is to be expressed. 
 
 Lacedsemoniorum gens fortis fuit, dum Lycurgi leges vigebant. 
 
 Iratis aut subtrahendi sunt ii, in quos impetum conantur 
 facere, dum se ipsi colligant, aut rogandi orandique sunt, ut, si 
 quam habent ulciscendi vim, differant in tempus aliud, dum 
 defervescat ira. 
 
 Quoad per ventum sit eo, quo sumpta navis est, non domini est 
 navis sed navigantium. 
 
 Cato quoad vixit, virtutum laude crevit. 
 
 Delibera hoc, dum ego redeo. 
 
 De comitiis, donee rediit Marcellus, silentium fuit. 
 
118 USE OF THE MOODS. 168, 169. 
 
 168 34. The general rule respecting the use of cum is, that 
 cum tern par ale takes an indicative, cum causale, a subjunc- 
 tive. But this requires some explanation. 
 
 169 35. Cum is properly a relative adverb (the demonstra- 
 tive of which is turn) and signifies token, in which sense 
 it governs an indicative mood. But it is also made to re- 
 fer to a process of thought, and expresses the relation of 
 cause to effect; like the English since. In this sense it 
 is construed with the subjunctive; as, cum sciam, cum 
 scirem, cum intellexerim, cum intellexissem, " since I know, 
 since I knew, &x. &,c, — therefore I did this or that." 
 In the sense of although, the clause with cum does not, it 
 is true, express the reason of the former proposition, but 
 indicates a connexion of thought, and therefore takes 
 likewise the subjunctive; as, homines, cum multis rebus 
 infirmiores sint, hac re maxime bestiis prsestant, quod 
 loqui possunt. 
 
 Praedones sine ullo metu in portum ipsum Syracusarum pene- 
 trare cceperunt. Cum in portum dico, in urbem dico. 
 
 Quid, cum dabas legatis Appianis literas, non eos ad me ven- 
 turos arbitrabare 1 
 
 Patro Epicureus et initio Romae, cum te quoque et tuos omnes 
 observabat, me coluit in primis, et nuper, cum ea, quae voluit, 
 consecutus est, me habuit suorum defensorem fere principem. 
 
 Dabo operam, ut te videam, cum id satis commode facere 
 potero . 
 
 Turn, cum in Asia res magnas permulti amiserant, scimus 
 Romae solutione impedita fidem concidisse. 
 
 Cum solitudo et vita sine amicis insidiarum et metus plena sit, 
 ratio ipsa mo net amicitias comparare. 
 
 Dionysius cum in communibus suggestis consistere non aude- 
 ret, concionari ex turri alta solebat. 
 
 De pietate Attici quid plura commemorem, cum hoc ipsum 
 vere gloriantem audierim in funere matris suae, quam extulit 
 annorum nonaginta, cum esset ipse septem et sexaginta, se 
 nunquam cum matre in gratiam rediisse. 
 
 Socratis ingenium variosque sermones immortalitati scriptis 
 suis Plato tradidit, cum ipse literam Socrates nullam reliquisset. 
 
169. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 119 
 
 Non intelligo, quare Rullus quemquam intercessurum putet, 
 cum intercessio stultitiam intercessoris significatura sit. 
 
 Cum omnibus virtutibus me affectum esse cupiam, tamen nihil 
 est, quod malim quam me et gratum esse et videri. 
 
 Ego me ssepe nova videri dicere intelligo, cum pervetera 
 dicam. # 
 
 Apollonius Alabandensis cum mercede doceret, tamen non 
 patiebatur eos, quos judicabat non posse oratores evadere, 
 operam apud sese perdere, dimittebatque. 
 
 Toto prcelio, cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit, 
 aversum hostem videre nemo potuit. 
 
 Note. Cum, when followed by turn, in double clauses, deserves 
 attention both with regard to its meaning and construction. Cum — 
 turn differs essentially in meaning from turn — turn and et—et; the 
 last two represent the two clauses as of equal importance; but of 
 the two clauses introduced by cum and turn, the second is repre- 
 sented as of more importance, as more distinguished; it may be 
 translated by both — and particularly. Vero, certe, etiam, pracipue, 
 inprimis, maxime, are frequently added to turn for the purpose of 
 marking still more forcibly its peculiar meaning. As to the con- 
 struction, the clause with cum has the subjunctive as well as the 
 indicative. The former was undoubtedly the original usage, the 
 clause with cum stating the premises, and the clause with turn the 
 application to the particular case. But in consequence of the fre- 
 quent use of this mode of joining clauses, cum began to be looked 
 upon simply as a particle, without any influence upon the mood 
 of the verb, and the instances of the indicative are more frequent. 
 
 Cum plurimas et maximas commoditates amicitia contineat, turn 
 ilia nimirum praestat omnibus, quod bona spe praslucet in poste- 
 rum. 
 
 Cum maximam cepissem laetitiam ex humanissimi patris epistola, 
 turn vero jucundissimse tuae literae cumulum mihi gaudii attulerunt. 
 
 Cum ipsam cognitionem juris augurii consequi cupio, turn 
 mehercule tuis incredibiliter studiis delector. 
 
 Cum te semper maxime dilexi, turn fratrum tuorum singularis 
 pietas nullum me patitur officii erga te munus praetermittere. 
 
 Fortuna cum in reliquis rebus turn prcecipue in bello plurimum 
 potest. 
 
 Thus far the doctrine of the use of cum is simple. Cum 
 when it signifies a relation of time takes the indicative ; 
 when it denotes a connexion of thought, the subjunctive. 
 
120 USE OF THE MOODS. 170. 
 
 170 36. A difficulty arises from the construction of cam in 
 narration, where it is joined with the imperfect or pluper- 
 fect subjunctive, though it is translated in English by when, 
 and seems only to express a relation of time. This is a 
 peculiarity of the Latin language, and it is only to be ob- 
 served, that 4(iis is the established manner, though the 
 grammatical relation of the sentences would seem to ad- 
 mit another. 
 
 Zenonem, cum Athenis essem, audiebam frequenter. 
 
 Hsec scripsi postridie ejus diei, cum castra haberem in agro 
 Mopsuhestise. 
 
 Cum in ea parte, in qua Camillus erat, ea fortuna esset, aliam 
 in partem terror ingens ingruerat. 
 
 Atticus cum septem et septuaginta annos complesset, nactus 
 est morbum. 
 
 Thueydides libros suos turn scripsisse dicitur, cum arepublica 
 remotus at.que in exsilium pulsus esset. 
 
 Epaminondas cum vicisset Laeedsemonios apud Mantineam, 
 atqne ipse gravi vulnere exanimari se videret, qusesivit, salvusne 
 esset clypeus. 
 
 Note I. It has been attempted to explain this peculiarity of 
 the Latin language by the fact, that, in most instances, the events, 
 which are declared to be simultaneous or successive to each other, 
 are considered as having to a certain degree the connexion of 
 cause and effect. But it must be confessed that there are many in- 
 stances, to which this explanation does not apply ; and we are 
 obliged to rest satisfied with the well established fact, that such is 
 the usage of the language. 
 
 Note 2. Such propositions as the following, are convenient to 
 show the difference between cum of 169 and that of 170. 
 
 At ego, cum casu diebus iis itineris faciendi causa decedens e 
 provincia Puteolos forte venissem, cum plurimi et lautissimi solent 
 esse in iis locis, concidi paene, judices, cum ex me quidam qucesisset, 
 quo die Roma exissem, et numquid in ea esset novi. 
 
 Note 3. It is not to be denied, that there are striking excep- 
 tions from this rule concerning cum as a particle of time, which 
 can only be accounted for by a particular partiality for the use of 
 the subjunctive. 
 
 Neque enim, si tibi turn, cum peteres (for petebas) consulatum, 
 affui, idcirco nunc, cum Murenam ipsum petas (for petis) adjutor 
 eodem pacto esse debeo. 
 
171, 172, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 121 
 
 37. Cum, when it denotes an action or occurrence of 171 
 the past, frequently repeated, the verb of the correspond- 
 ing clause being in the imperfect, is joined with the 
 imperfect and pluperfect of the indicative, with the signifi- 
 cation whenever, as often as. The verbs of both clauses 
 are in the tenses of the present, if the proposition is not 
 confined to the past, but is general. 
 
 Cum autem ver esse cceperat, cujus initium iste non a Favonio 
 neque ab aliquo astro notabat, sed cum rosam viderat, tunc in- 
 cipere ver arbitrdbatur , dabat se labori at que itineribus. 
 
 Sic confecto itinere, cum ad aliquod oppidum venerat, eadem 
 lectica usque in cubiculum deferebatur. 
 
 Philosophise praecepta ne obsolescerent, renovabam, cum lice- 
 bat, legendo. 
 
 Cum tetra prodigia nuntiata sunt, decemviri libros Sibyllinos 
 adire jubentur. 
 
 Note. The sense of the second proposition would be a different 
 one, if it were expressed thus : Sic confecto itinere, cum ad ali- 
 quod oppidum venisset, eadem lectica usque in cubiculum delatus 
 est. Instead of expressing an action frequently repeated, it would 
 denote some particular instance; not as often as he came, but when 
 he had come. 
 
 38. It is to be noticed as a peculiarity that cum temporale 172 
 is used with the indicative of the perfect or imperfect to 
 designate contemporary facts, where we should say at 
 ichich time, or white. This meaning is made still more 
 distinct by the addition of inter ea or interim. The perfect 
 
 is used in an historical account, the imperfect in a de- 
 scription. 
 
 Catulus cum ex vobis quaereret, si in uno Cn. Pompeio omnia 
 poneretis, si quid eo factum esset, in quo spem essetis habituri ; 
 cepit magnum suae virtu tis fructum ac dignitatis, cum omnes 
 prope una voce in eo ipso vos spem habituros esse dixistis. 
 
 Bellum subito exarsit, quod, qui erant in Africa, ante audie- 
 runt geri quam parari. Quo audito partim cupiditate incon- 
 siderata partim caeco quodam timore primo salutis post etiam 
 studii sui quaerebant aliquem ducem : cum Ligarius domum 
 spectans et ad suos redire cupiens nullo se implicari negotio 
 passus est, 
 
 11 
 
122 USE OF THE MOODS. 173. 
 
 Sed pretium rogationis statim socii flagitare : cum interim 
 imparem Drusum aegrumque rerum temere motarum matura (ut 
 in tali discrimine) mors abstulit. 
 
 Caedebatur virgis in medio foro Messanae civis Romanus, 
 
 judices, cum interea nullus gemitus, nulla vox alia istius miseri 
 
 inter dolorem crepitumque plagarum audiebatur nisi hsec : civis 
 
 Eomanus sum. 
 
 Note. Instead of the imperfect, the historical infinitive is fre- 
 quently used. 
 
 iEgerrime id plebs ferebat jacere tamdiu irritas sanctiones, quas 
 de suis commodis ferrentur; cum interim de sanguine et supplicio 
 suo latam legem confestim exerceri et tantam vim habere. 
 
 Nee multum erat progressa navis, cum dato signo ruere tectum 
 loci. 
 
 Victor tot intra paucos dies bellis Romanus promissa consulis 
 fidemque senatus expectabat ; cum Appius quam asperrime poterat 
 jus de creditis pecuniis dicere. 
 
 173 39. Closely connected with the peculiarity stated in the 
 preceding paragraph, is the use of cum with the indicative 
 of other tenses, especially of the present, in the animated 
 narration, when it is not the former, but rather the conse- 
 quent member of the sentence. The adverbs jam, vix, 
 nondum, are frequently used in the first member of the 
 clause. 
 
 Jamque, qui Darium vehebant equi, confossi hastis et dolore 
 efFerati jugum quatere et regem curru excutere caper ant, cum 
 ille veritus, ne vivus veniret in hostium potestatem, desilit, et in 
 equum, qui ad hoc sequebatur, imponitur. 
 
 Jam in conspectu sed extra teli jactum utraque acies erat, cum 
 priores Persas inconditum et trucem sustulere clamorem. 
 
 Evolabat jam e conspectu fere fugiens quadriremis, cum 
 etiamtum ceteras naves suo in loco moliebantur. 
 
 Non dubitabat Minucius, qui Sopatrum defendebat, quin iste, 
 quoniam consilium dimisisset, illo die rem illam quaesiturus non 
 esset, cum repente jubetur dicere. 
 
 Jam ver appetebat, cum Hannibal ex hibernis movit. 
 
 Vix annus intercesserat ab hoc sermone cohortationis mese, 
 cum Sulpicius accusavit C. Norbanum defendente me. 
 
174, 175. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 123 
 
 Vix explicandi ordinis spatium Etruseis fuit, cum pugna jam 
 ad gladios, ubi Mars est atrocissimus, verier at, 
 
 Nondum centum et decern anni sunt, cum de pecuniis repe- 
 tundis a L. Pisone lata lex est, nulla antea cum fuisset. 
 
 SECTION XIII. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 1. The imperative has in the active and passive two 174 
 forms, of which the first has only one person, namely the 
 second; scribe, scqtiere, " write, follow" ; and in the plu- 
 ral scribite, scquimini ; the second form has the second 
 person and the third, which in the singular are the same ; 
 scribito, " write thou, or let him write," sequitor : in the 
 plural the persons are different ; scribitote, sequiminor, 
 
 u write, follow " ; scribunto, scquuntor, " let them write, 
 follow." The former is sometimes called the Present im- 
 perative, the latter, the Future imperative. 
 
 2. In both forms the imperative expresses a command ; 175 
 and also an exhortation and a wish. The present impera- 
 tive expresses that something is to be done immediately, 
 
 or that something which exists, is to continue so, as, lege, 
 "read"; morere, "die"; vive felix, "live happy." By 
 the future imperative the command is brought into con- 
 nexion with some other action expressed or implied, as, rem 
 vobis proponam ; vos earn suo, non nominis, pondere pen- 
 ditote, sc. cum proposuero. 
 
 Magna vis est in virtutibus ; eas excita, si forte dormiunt. 
 Justitiam cole et pietatem. 
 
 Dubitate etiam nunc, judices, si potestis, a quo sit Sex. 
 Roscius occisus. 
 
 Cum valetudini tuse consulueris, turn consulito navigationi. 
 
124 USE OF THE MOODS. 176-178. 
 
 Quod cum hujus vobis adolescentiam proposueritis, constitui- 
 tote vobis ante oculos etiam hujus miseri senectutem. 
 
 Prius audite paucis ; quod cum dixero, si placuerit, facitote. 
 
 176 3. Hence the future imperative is used in treaties, laics, 
 testaments, because something is to be done for the future 
 from a given time; moreover, in precepts and rules of 
 life, that is, actions which are to be done repeatedly, when- 
 ever the case occurs. 
 
 Regio imperio duo sunto, iique consules appellantor ; militiae 
 summum jus habento, nemini parento, illis salus populi suprema 
 lex esto. 
 
 Exlegatorum sententia fcedus in hsec verba fere cum Antiocho 
 conscriptum est : Amicitia regi Antiocho cum populo Romano 
 his legibus esto : Excedito urbibus, agris, vicis, castellis cis 
 Taurum montem usque ad Tanaim amnem. 
 
 Fabius pictor legatus a Delphis Romam rediit, responsumque 
 ex scripto recitavit : Pythio Apollini re publica vestra bene 
 gesta servataque donum mittito, lasciviam a vobis prohibetote. 
 
 Ignoscito saepe alteri, nunquam tibi. 
 
 177 4. With the imperative, not must be rendered by ne, 
 and nor by neve. 
 
 Nimium ne crede colori. 
 
 Hominem mortuum (inquit lex in duodecim tabulis) in urbe 
 ne sepelito, neve urito. 
 
 Impius ne audeto placare donis iram deorum. 
 
 Celso medius stans aggere fatur : Ne qua meis esto dictis 
 mora ; neve quis ob inceptum subitum mihi segnior ito. 
 
 178 5. Instead of either imperative the future indicative (if 
 negatively, with non), the present subjunctive, in the 
 second person positively (very rarely negatively), and in 
 the third person, both positively and negatively ; and the 
 perfect subjunctive (commonly negatively), may be used. 
 Circumlocutions, also, are used; cura or curato, with ut, 
 
 fac with nt or the subjunctive alone for the imperative, 
 expressing command ; fac with ne, cave with ne, or the 
 present or perfect of the subjunctive alone, and noli with 
 the infinitive for the imperative, expressing prohibition, 
 
179. INFINITIVE MOOD. 125 
 
 Valebis, meaque negotia videbis, meque diis juvantibus ante 
 brumam expectabis. 
 
 Si sciens fallo, turn me, Juppiter Optime Maxime, pessimo 
 leto qfficias. 
 
 Tu vero ista ne asciveris neve fueris commenticiis rebus 
 assensus. 
 
 Secreto hoc audi, tecum habeto, ne Apellse quidem, liberto 
 tuo, dixeris. 
 
 Magnum fac animum habeas et spem bonam. 
 
 Cur a, ut quam primum venias. 
 
 Fac, ne quid aliud cures, nisi ut quam commodissime conva- 
 lescas. 
 
 Cave, si me amas, existimes me, quod jocosius scribam, 
 abjecisse curam rei publicae. 
 
 Noli te oblivisci Ciceronem esse et eum, qui aliis consueris 
 prsecipere et dare consilium. 
 
 Nolite ad vestras leges atque instituta exigere ea, quae Lace- 
 deemone fiunt. 
 
 Note. Velim and velim, ut is a milder form of commanding. 
 Me tibi amicissimum et fuisse semper existimes velim, et futu- 
 rum esse confidas. 
 
 SECTION XIV. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 1. The infinitive expresses a condition or an action, as 179 
 in progress or completed, but without specification of per- 
 son, number, or time ; e. g. scribere expresses the action 
 as in progress ; scripsisse, as completed. The verb on 
 which the infinitive depends, determines the time in which 
 the action falls. 
 
 Note 1. The names Infinitive of the action continuing, and In- 
 finitive of the action completed (Infinitivus rei infectce and Infini- 
 tivus rei perfects) would be more correct than those of present and 
 perfect infinitive; since scribere does not imply present time; for 
 xolam, volebam, or volueram scribere can be said with as much pro- 
 priety as volo scribere. In comparing the two infinitives with the 
 
 11* 
 
126 LSE OF THE MOODS. ISO. 
 
 tenses of the verb, it was natural to refer scribere to scribo, and 
 scripsisse to scripsi, though in respect to the state of the action, 
 scribere belongs equally to scribebam, and scripsisse to scripseram. 
 The first is therefore sometimes called present and imperfect in- 
 finitive, the second perfect and plupei feet infinitive) but this does 
 not comprehend the whole of their signification. 
 
 Note 2. Memini takes generally an infinitive present, although 
 an action already completed is spoken of; as, memini Catonem 
 mecum et cum Scipione disserere, M I remember Cato's talking 
 with me." This must, however, still be considered as an infini- 
 tive of the action continuing (infinitivus rei infectse), and de- 
 signed to transfer the reader to the very time of the conversation, 
 by representing it as in progress. Where the result is to be 
 stated, the perfect infinitive is used along with memini; as, 
 meministis me ita distribuisse initio causam ; he wished the 
 judges to remember how he had arranged, not how he was then 
 arranging his subject. But it must be observed, that usage gives 
 the preference to the former mode of expression. 
 
 Memini te mihi Phamese coenam narrare. 
 
 Ego virginem forma bona memini videre. 
 
 Peto igitur, ut memineris te omnia, quae tua fides pateretur, mihi 
 cumulate recepisse. 
 
 Philippus rex iratus erat iEtolis, quod solos obtrectasse glorise 
 suae, cum liberaret Graeciam, meminerat. 
 
 Note 3. The infinitive perfect is used after some phrases, 
 where we might expect the infinitive present; juvat, pudet, con* 
 tentus sum, satis est, satis habeo, melius est. 
 
 Hasc breviter demonstrasse contentus. 
 
 Contenti simus id unum dixisse. 
 
 Non puduit eum hoc fecisse. 
 
 Ante sedes non fecisse erit melius hie convicium. 
 
 ISO 2. There are also in the passive two infinitives, one 
 called the infinitive present, for a state of suffering still 
 continuing ; the other, the infinitive perfect, for the same 
 state completed. The former is simply formed ; e. g. 
 laudari; the latter by a circumlocution with the partici- 
 ple and esse, laudatus esse, or, laudatum esse, the par- 
 ticiple taking the gender and number of the noun to 
 which it refers. 
 
 Note. As esse, in this form of the infinitive, loses its own sig- 
 nification of a continued state, the infinitive present of some other 
 verb is used, when this state is to be expressed; as, scio urbem 
 obsessam teneri ; for scio urbem obsessam esse would not express 
 the continuance but termination of this state, " I know that the 
 city has been besieged." Where, however, no ambiguity can 
 
181, 182. INFINITIVE MOOD. 127 
 
 arise, the perfect participle with esse is sometimes used to denote 
 the continuance of the state. Fuisse with the perfect participle 
 expresses distinctly the completion of the state previous to a 
 certain past action ; as, scio urbem expugnatam fuisse, cum rex 
 in castra venit. 
 
 Tradidere quidam Macroni prcescriptum fuisse, si arma ab 
 Seiano moverentur, juvenem ducem populo imponere. 
 
 3. There is also in the active and passive voices an 181 
 infinitive of future time, denoting the action or the state 
 
 of suffering as continuing; in the active formed by means 
 of esse and the participle of the future, laudaturum esse, 
 i( to be about to praise " ; in the passive, by the supine 
 with iri, laudatum iri, " to be about to be praised." The 
 active varies, according to the number and gender of the 
 noun referred to ; the passive is unchangeable. 
 
 Note 1. The participle of the future properly denotes the in- 
 tention or desire of the performance of an action, and in this sig- 
 nification is connected with esse and fuisse; as, scio te scripturum 
 fuisse, I know that you desired to write; whence the transition 
 was easy to the sense, that you would have written, in conditional 
 sentences, when the condition is not fulfilled. 
 
 Etiamsi obtemperasset auspiciis, idem eventurum fuisse puto. 
 An censemus, si Fabio laudi datum esset, quod pingeret, non 
 multos etiam apud nos futuros Polycletos et Parrhasios fuisse? 
 
 Note 2. What is called the future participle in the passive 
 voice, cannot be used with esse to denote simple futurity ; for the 
 proper meaning of the participle in dus is, that something ought to 
 be done j laudandum esse is therefore equivalent to, necesse esse, 
 ut laudetur, not to fore, ut laudetur. 
 
 4. Besides this, a circumlocution may be employed for 182 
 the infinitive of future time, by means of futurum esse (or 
 the unchangeable fore), with ut followed by a present or 
 imperfect subjunctive for a continuing state, and by a per- 
 fect or pluperfect for the perfect state in futurity. The 
 choice of the one or other of the two kinds of tenses de- 
 pends on the tense of the governing verb ; as, credo fore, 
 
 ut epistolam scribas, and credebam fore, ut epistolam 
 scripsisses. In the passive credo fore, ut epistola scribatur ; 
 credebam fore, ut epistola scriberetur. For the perfect 
 future in the passive the participle perfect scriptus may be 
 used, which in the active is wanting ; therefore credo and 
 credebam epistolam scriptam fore. This circumlocution 
 
128 USE OF THE MOODS. 182. 
 
 for the future infinitive is indispensable where the verbenas 
 no supine, and no participle future active, as is the case 
 with many intransitives. Thus it is only in this way that 
 we can express spero futurum esse (fore), ut te hujus rei 
 pceniteat : puto fore, ut brevi omnibus his incommodis 
 medeare. 
 
 Video te velle in ccelum migrare, et spero fore, ut contingat id 
 nobis. 
 
 Non eram nescius fore, ut hie noster labor in varias repre- 
 hensiones incurreret. 
 
 Ptolemseus mathematicus Othoni persuaserat fore, ut in im- 
 perium adscisceretur . 
 
 Pompeius dixerat, priusquam concurrerent acies, fore, uti 
 exercitus Caesaris pelleretur. 
 
 A te jam expectare literas debemus, quid ipse agas, quid 
 noster Hirtius, quid Caesar meus, quos spero brevi tempore 
 societate victoriae tecum copulatos fore. 
 
 Rebantur debellatum mox fore, si anniti paululum voluissent. 
 
 Note 1. The circumlocution futurum fuisse, ut with the im- 
 perfect subjunctive passive corresponds to the infinitive fuisse with 
 the future participle active in a conditional proposition (see 181, 
 note 1). 
 
 Rex ignorabat futurum fuisse, ut oppidum ipsi dederetur, si 
 unum diem expectasset. 
 
 Msi eo ipso tempore nuntii de Caesaris victoria essent allati, 
 existimabant p\erique futurum fuisse, ut oppidum amitteretur. 
 
 Theophrastus moriens accusasse naturam dicitur, quod hominibus 
 tarn exiguam vitam dedisset ; quorum si aetas potuisset esse longin- 
 quior, futurum fuisse, ut omnibus perfectis artibus omni doctrina 
 hominum vita erudiretur. 
 
 Note 2. Fore is found in two passages pleonastically joined 
 with the future participle active; Cic. ep. ad Attic. 5, 21 : deinde 
 addis, si quid secus, te ad me fore venturum ; and Liv. 6, 42: 
 dignam earn rem mortalium causa libenter fucturos fore, ut ludi 
 maximi fierent, et dies unus ad triduum adjiceretur. In both in- 
 stances the future infinitive, venturum esse and facturos esse, would 
 have been sufficient. But joined to the future participle passive, 
 fore is not pleonastic, if a future and not an actual necessity is 
 spoken of; as Liv. 37, 39: instare hiemem, aut sub pellibus 
 habendos milites fore, aut differendum esse in eestatem bellum. 
 
183. INFINITIVE MOOD. 129 
 
 5. The infinitive may be regarded as a substantive of 183 
 the neuter gender, with two cases, nominative and accusa- 
 tive, differing in this respect from other substantives, that 
 it governs a case, and also expresses the complete or in- 
 complete state of the action. The infinitive must be 
 considered as the nominative, when it is the subject of a 
 proposition ; as invidere non cadit in sapientem ; laudari 
 jucundum est; virtus est vitium fugerc ; it must be con- 
 sidered as the accusative, when it is the object of a verb 
 transitive ; e. g. volo, cupio, audeo, conor hoc facere, 
 dicere, scribere (the construction being the same as, citpio 
 hanc rem) ; nescio mentiri; didici vera dicere. 
 
 Me, cum hue veni, hoc ipsum nihil agere et plane cessare 
 delectat. 
 
 Docto homini et erudite- vivere est cogitare. 
 
 Antonius nihil Mucianum veritus est ; quod exitiosius erat 
 quam Vespasianum sprevisse. 
 
 Vincere scit Hannibal, victoria uti nescit. 
 
 Ferre laborem consuetudo docet. 
 
 Oderunt peccare boni virtutis amore. 
 
 Note 1. The infinitive depends very rarely upon a preposition. 
 
 Aristo et Pyrrho inter optime valere et gravissime agrotare 
 nihil prorsus dicebant interesse. 
 
 Quod crimen dicis prater amasse meum ? 
 Multum interest inter dare et accipere. 
 
 Note 2. That the infinitive is a sort of nomen verbale, ap- 
 pears from the addition of ipsum. Other adjective pronouns are 
 very rarely joined to it ; as, meum intelligere nulla pecunia vendo. 
 
 Note 3. The infinitive is used only as a nominative and accu- 
 sative. Most of the instances of the infinitive being used as a 
 genitive, dative, or ablative, may be explained as imitations of the 
 Greek idiom. 
 
 Iniit consilia reges Lacedaemoniorum tollere. 
 
 Cupido incesserat non interiora modo iEgypti sed etiam iEthi- 
 opiam invisere. 
 
 Non in earn turpitudinem venisses, ut tibi esset eonfitendum 
 te consilium cepisse hominis propinqui fortunas funditus evertere. 
 (The only instance in Cicero). 
 
 Vos servire magis quam imperare parati estis. 
 
130 USE OF THE MOODS. 184, 185. 
 
 184 6. When the infinitive has its own subject joined to it, 
 it is put in the accusative. 
 
 Note. It is to be noticed, that the infinitive present in the 
 historic style stands for the present or imperfect indicative (hence 
 called Injinitivus kistoricus), and then it has its subject in the 
 nominative. 
 
 Postulo, Carpinatius mihi respondeat, qui sit iste Verrutius ; in 
 Sicilia sit, an jam decesserit. Clamare omnes neminem unquam 
 in Sicilia fuisse Verrutium. Ego instare, ut mihi responderet, 
 quis esset, ubi esset, unde esset. 
 
 185 7 # This is the construction of the accusative with the 
 infinitive, which, like the infinitive alone, may be used in 
 two ways ; as the subject, and as the object of a propo- 
 sition. The accusative with the infinitive is the subject, 
 wherever, if a noun could be substituted for the infinitive, 
 it would be in the nominative case : so it is when the 
 predicate is est, erat, with a noun or an adjective, such as 
 
 justum, a?quum, verum, verisimile, consent aneum, apertum 
 est, opus est, necesse est; or an impersonal verb, as appa- 
 ret 9 constat , licet, oportet ; or the third person singular of 
 the passive, intelligitur, perspicitur, &c, 
 
 Victorem parcere victis cequum est. 
 
 Ad salutem civium inventas esse leges constat. 
 
 Legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperitis teneatur. 
 
 Magnis in laudibus tota fere fuit Grsecia victorem Olympise 
 citari. 
 
 Naves Antiatium incensee sunt, rostrisque earum suggestum 
 in foro exstructum adornari placuit. 
 
 Omnibus bonis expedit sale am esse rem publicam. 
 
 Aliud est iracundum esse, aliud iratum. 
 
 Facinus est vinciri civem Romanum ; scelus verberari; prope 
 parricidium necari. 
 
 Signo sublato ex prsetoria nave dispersam classem in unum 
 colligi mos erat. 
 
 Contentum^ suis rebus esse maxima? sunt certissimaeque divitice. 
 
 Non sine causa dictum est nihil facilius quam lacrimas inare- 
 scere. 
 
 Note 1. It is therefore inaccurate to say, that this accusative 
 with the infinitive is governed by verum est, constat, &c. ) the in- 
 
186. INFINITIVE MOOD. 131 
 
 finitive is here the nominative, and instead of it we might say, 
 aqua est victoris humanitas, legum brevitas necessaria est, in the 
 examples just given. 
 
 Note 2. When the infinitive esse with an adjective, or another 
 infinitive with an adjective part of speech, is joined with licet, as 
 otiosum, felicem esse, the adjective may, agreeably to the rule, be 
 in the accusative, or, which is more common, be "attracted to the 
 dative of the noun governed by licet, and stand in the dative. 
 
 Civi Romano licet esse Gaditanum sive exilio, sive postliminio, 
 sive rejectione hujus civitatis. 
 
 Hsec praecepta servantem licet magnifice graviter animoseque 
 vivere. 
 
 Licuit esse otioso Themistocli, lieu it Epaminondce. 
 
 Roscius rogat oratque, ut sibi liceat innocenti amicorum opibus 
 vitam in egestate degere. 
 
 Note 3. This construction is by poets and later writers trans- 
 ferred to other verbs, as, necesse est, datur, contingit, prodest, etc. 
 
 Vobis necesse est fortibus viris esse. 
 Vobis immunibus hujus esse mali dabitur. 
 Quo tibi, Tulli, sumere depositum clavum jierique tribuno? 
 Nescio, an satius fuerit populo Romano Sicilia et Africa con- 
 tento fuisse. 
 
 8. The accusative with the infinitive is the object, after 186 
 verbs denoting seeing, hearing, knowing, feeling, thinking, 
 saying, &c. (verba sentiendi et dedarandi). To these be- 
 long the verbs, audio, video, sentio, animadverto, cognosco, 
 intelligo, percipio, disco, scio, opinor, suspicor, credo, 
 cogito, censeo, existimo, duco, statuo, memini, recordor, 
 obliviscor, — dico, trado, prodo, scribo, perhibco, refero, 
 nuntio, conjirmo, nego, ostendo, demonstro, promitto, polli- 
 ceor, spondeo, voveo, and several others. After these and 
 similar verbs, instead of the finite verb of the dependent 
 proposition with the conjunction that, the infinitive is used, 
 and the subject of this dependent proposition is put in 
 the accusative. 
 
 Ego ne utilem quidem nobis arbitror esse futurarum rerum 
 scientiam. 
 
 Sentit animus se sua vi non aliena moveri. 
 
 Volucres videmus procreationis atque utilitatis suae causa 
 finger e et construere nidos. 
 
132 USE OF THE MOODS. 187, 188. 
 
 Pompeios, celebrem Campaniae urbem, desedisse terrse motu 
 audivimus. 
 
 Suscipe paullisper meas partes, et eum te esse finge, qui sum 
 ego. 
 
 Plerique amicos eos potissimum diligunt, ex quibus sperant se 
 maximum fructum esse capturos. 
 
 Habitari ait Xenophanes in luna eamque esse terram multarum 
 urbium et montium. 
 
 Magnum esse solem philosophus prohabit ; quantus sit, mathe- 
 maticus. 
 
 Britanni ad Caesarem legatos miserunt ; obsides daturos, 
 quseque imperasset, sese facturos polliciti sunt. 
 
 Orpheum poetam docet Aristoteles nunquam fuisse. 
 
 187 9. It is to be observed that in the oratio obliqua, see 
 sect. 12, 14, when the thoughts or speech of another are re- 
 ported, but not in his own words, interrogative clauses, 
 differing in appearance only from the affirmative part of 
 the proposition, are expressed by the accusative with the 
 infinitive, although the general rule would require the 
 subjunctive. Instances of this kind are particularly fre- 
 quent in historians. 
 
 Hoc pater me stulte fecisse dixit; quid enim inter esse dis- 
 criminis, utrum pecuniam abjecissem, an homini improbo dedis- 
 sem (for interrogavit enim, quid interesset discriminis, etc). 
 
 Fingerent mentitum ante atque ideo non habuisse, quod turn 
 responderet ; cui servo unquam mendacii pcenam vincula fuisse t 
 
 Quodsi veteris contumeliae oblivisci vellet, num etiam recen- 
 tium injuriarum memoriam deponere posse ? 
 
 188 10. Clauses introduced by relative pronouns and ad- 
 verbs into the oratio obliqua, are frequently put in the 
 accusative with the infinitive, which as intermediate 
 clauses ought to be in the subjunctive, when they are co- 
 ordinate and not subordinate to the accusative with the 
 infinitive, and may be explained by et and the demonstra- 
 tive. 
 
 Res ad eum defertur : esse civem Romanum, qui se Syracusis 
 in lautumiis fuisse quereretur ; quern jam ingredientem navem 
 
189. INFINITIVE MOOD. 133 
 
 et Verri nimis atrociter minitantem a se retractum esse et asser- 
 vatum, ut ipse in eum statueret, quod videretur (for et eum re- 
 tractum esse). 
 
 Nam illorum urbem ( Athenas) ut propugnaculum oppositum 
 esse barbaris, apud quam jam bis classes regias fecisse naufragium 
 {et apud earn). 
 
 Unumquemque nostrum eensent philosophi mundi esse par- 
 tem, ex quo illud natura sequi, ut communem utilitatem nostra 
 anteponamus (et ex eo sequi). 
 
 Iri in castra placuit ; honorificum id militibus fore, quorum 
 favorem ut ]argitione et ambitu male adquiri, ita per bonas artes 
 haud spernendum (nam eorum favorem male adquiri) . 
 
 11. Explanatory and qualifying clauses in the oratio 189 
 obliqua, introduced by nam, enim, quippe, videlicet, sed, 
 veriwi, antem, quidem, quamquam, cum interim, etc., are 
 often put in the accusative with the infinitive. 
 
 Quamquam nullam nobilitatem, nullos honores, nulla merita 
 cuiquam ad dominationem pander e viam : sed tamen Claudios, 
 Cassios consulatibus, decemviratibus, suis majorumque honori- 
 bus, splendore familiarum sustulisse animos, quo nefas fuerit. 
 
 Ideo se moenibus inclusos tenere eos, quia, si qui evasissent 
 aliqua, velut feras bestias per agros vagari et laniare et truci- 
 dare, quodcunque obviam detur. 
 
 Fugere senatum testes, tabulas publicas, census cuj usque, quia 
 i nolint conspici summam aeris alieni, quae indicatura sit demersam 
 partem a parte civitatis, cum interim obaeratam plebem objectari 
 aliis atque aliis hostibus. 
 
 No'te 1. It is chiefly to be remarked, that the personal pro- 
 I nouns, which are never added to the finite verb but for the sake 
 I of emphasis, are always expressed with the infinitive. The young 
 I student must heed the use of the reflective pronoun se, which is 
 used, when, in the dependent clause, a reference is made to the 
 I subject of the leading member; and also in the annexed clauses, 
 I when anything is mentioned as the sentiment or language of the 
 I subject, the pronominal references are made by the reflective pro- 
 lnoun and its possessive suus. See sect 9, 90, note 1, and sect. 9, 91. 
 I Thus we should say, Csesar se non sui commodi causa arma 
 Icepisse dicebat; but we should not always use these pronouns in 
 Ian additional or intermediate clause; as, Caesar, cum eum non- 
 Inulli injustitiae accusarent, or, Caesar, quod ejus causa a plerisque 
 ldamnabatur, se non sui commodi causa arma cepisse dicebat ; but 
 
 12 
 
134 USE OF THE MOODS. 189. 
 
 when the intermediate clause is spoken of as his sentiment, then 
 se and suus must be used; as, Caesar, quod suum jus a senatu 
 laesum esset, or postquam nihil sibi ac suis postulatis tributum 
 esset, se non sui sed ipsius rei publicae causa arma cepisse dicebat. 
 
 Allobroges Csesari demonstrant sibi praeter agri solum nihil esse 
 reliquum. 
 
 Solon, quo et tutior vita ejus esset, et plus aliquanto rei publicae 
 prodesset, furere se simulavit. 
 
 Jam inde ab initio Faustulo spes fuerat regiam stirpem apud se 
 educari. 
 
 Eleus Hippias, cum Corinthum venisset, gloriatus est annulum, 
 quern haberet, pallium, quo amictus, soccos, quibus indutus esset^ 
 se sua manu confecisse. 
 
 Note 2. This rule of expressing the personal pronoun (in the 
 accusative) before the infinitive must be particularly observed with 
 verbs of promising and hoping, which in English are joined with 
 the infinitive alone, but in Latin are with greater exactness not 
 only joined with the accusative of the pronouns, but also the 
 future tense of the infinitive; as, he promised to come, give, 
 promisit se venturum, daturum esse; spero hoc me assecuturum 
 (with the omission of esse, which is often omitted with this infini- 
 tive and the infinitive perfect passive). 
 
 Note 3. There are indeed some instances of the omission of 
 the pronoun, the accusative of the subject, as well as of the use 
 of the present infinitive after verbs of hoping and promising; but 
 they are undoubtedly to be considered as exceptions; and with 
 regard to the omission of the pronoun, it is to be observed that, in 
 most instances, there is, in the sentence itself, some extenuating 
 circumstance. 
 
 Bibulus eodem igne nautas dominosque navium interfecit ma- 
 gnitudine pcenae reliquos deterrere sperans. 
 
 Quod imperarentur, facere dixerunt. 
 
 Qui pollicebantur obsides dare. 
 
 Sed me, judices, non minus Sulpicii conquestio quam Catonis 
 accusatio commovebat, qui gravissime et acerbissime ferre dixit. 
 
 Doluisse se, quod populi Romani beneficium sibi per contume- 
 liam extorqueretur ; tamen hanc jacturam honoris sui rei publicae 
 causa aequo animo tulisse ; cum literas ad senatum miserit, ut 
 omnes ab exercitibus discederent, ne id quidem impetravisse. 
 
 Note 4. When the use of an infinitive" active would bring 
 two accusatives together, one of the subject and the other of the 
 object, and an ambiguity would be likely to arise, it is a rule to 
 adopt a passive construction, by which the accusative of the object 
 becomes the subject, and the other is avoided by the preposition 
 ab or per. 
 
190, 191. INFINITIVE MOOD. 135 
 
 At vero ne fando quidem auditum est crocodilum aut ibim aut 
 felem violatum ab iEgyptiis. 
 
 Ita victoria justa imperator appellatus apud Issum, quo in 
 loco ssepe, ut ex te audivi, Clitarchus tibi narravit Darium ab 
 Alexandro esse superatum, adduxi exercitum ad infestissimam 
 Cilicise partem. 
 
 Aio te, iEacida, Romanos vincere posse. 
 
 12. As the accusative with the infinitive, being the ob- 190 
 ject, may be considered as an accusative governed by the 
 verbs mentioned above (186), so after some of these verbs, 
 especially those signifying to say, show, think (dico, nego, 
 trado, fero, memoro, narro, nuntio, perhibeo, prodo ; de- 
 monstro, ostendo ; credo, puto, tzistimo, and others), the 
 change into a passive expression is possible, according to 
 the rule sect. 3, 15. This is particularly done, when the 
 subject of those verbs is indefinite. In the same manner 
 
 jubeo and veto are used personally in the passive. 
 
 Xanthippe, Socratis philosophi uxor, morosa admodum fuisse 
 fertur et jurgiosa. 
 
 Regnante Tarquinio Superbo Sybarim et Crotonem Pytha- 
 goras venisse reperitur. 
 
 Athenis actor movere affectus vetebatur. 
 
 Consules jubentur exercitum scribere. 
 
 Jussus es renuntiari consul. 
 
 13. As the accusative with the infinitive is used, after 191 
 the verbs enumerated above (186), being considered as the 
 object governed by those verbs, so it is likewise used after 
 nouns and adjectives of a similar meaning. 
 
 Etsi enim mihi sum conscius nunquam me nimis vitse cupidum 
 fuisse, tamen interdum objiciebatur animo metus quidam et 
 dolor. 
 
 Quos nominatim depoposcerat, ipsi se ituros professi sunt ; 
 fide accepta ab legatis vim abfuturam, donee causam dixissent, 
 ierunt alii etiam illustres viri. 
 
 AX fides mi apud hunc est nil me istius facturum. 
 
 Magna nobis pueris opinio fuit L. Crassum non plus atiigisse 
 doctrinae, quam quantum prima ilia puerili institutione potuisset. 
 
136 USE OF THE MOODS. 192-194. 
 
 192 14. The accusative with the infinitive, or the infinitive 
 alone, is used in apposition to nouns, demonstrative pro- 
 nouns, and adjectives. 
 
 Revertor ad Mud, quod mihi in hac omni est oratione proposi- 
 tum, omnibus malis illo anno scelere consulum rem publicam esse 
 confectam. 
 
 Ad id, quod instituisti, oratorum genera distinguere aetatibus, 
 istam diligentiam esse accommodatam puto. 
 
 Hcbc benignitas etiam rei public* est utilis, redimi e servitute 
 captos, locupletari tenuiores. 
 
 193 15. With the infinitive esse, and those verbs, which in 
 the passive have two nominatives of the subject and the 
 predicate, videri, fieri, judicari, and the others mentioned 
 sect. 3, 21, the noun of the predicate is in the accusa- 
 tive, when the indefinite or general subject is not expressed ; 
 
 , thus, the phrase, " it is the greatest wealth for a man to be 
 content with his own," would be, maxima? sunt divitise 
 contentum suis rebus esse. 
 
 Atticus maximum existimavit quaestum memorem gratumque 
 cognosci. 
 
 Convenit turn in dando muriijicum esse turn in exigendo non 
 acerbum. 
 
 Esse sat est servum, jam nolo vicarius esse. 
 
 Concessa pudet ire via civemque videri. 
 
 Ipse valeo, si valere est anxium vivere. 
 
 Magnis in laudibus tota fere fuit Grsecia victorem Olympiae 
 citari. 
 
 194 16. After the verbs signifying, I am accustomed, dare, 
 can, ought, the infinitive follows as in English; and the 
 predicate with esse, judicari, videri, &c. is put in the 
 nominative ; as, solet tristis videri, aude sapiens esse, debes 
 esse diligens. But with verbs of wishing and desiring a 
 double construction is admissible ; an infinitive with the 
 nominative, when the subject remains the same, as, volo 
 eruditus fieri, but when the subject is changed, a pronoun 
 in the accusative, answering to the new subject, must be 
 inserted, volo te eruditum fieri. Even where the subject 
 remains the same, it is sometimes repeated by the personal 
 
195. INFINITIVE MOOD. 137 
 
 pronoun, which in that case must also be in the accusa- 
 tive ; volo me eruditum Jieri ; discipulum me haberi volo, • 
 non doctorem ; principem se esse maluit quam videri. 
 
 Volo et esse et haberi gratus. 
 
 Noli nimium populi reverentia fretus esse. 
 
 Vos liberi esse non curatis ? 
 
 Quis Pompeio scientior unquam aut fuit aut esse debuit? 
 
 Judicem me esse non doctorem volo. 
 
 Omnis homines, qui sese student prcBstare ceteris animalibus, 
 summa ope niti decet, ne vitam silentio transeant. 
 
 Cupio me esse clementem ; cupio in tantis rei publicse periculis 
 me non dissolutum videri. 
 
 Note 1. The infinitive passive with velle is particularly to be 
 noticed; as, me amari volo ; hoc velim intelligi. The infinitive 
 perfect passive is often used to denote the eager desire that some- 
 thing should be instantly accomplished. 
 
 Legati quod erant appellati superbius, Corinthum patres vestri, 
 totius Graecise lumen, extinctam esse voluerunt. 
 
 Saluti civis calamitosi consultum esse volumus. 
 
 Hoc natura prsescribit, ut homo homini consultum velit. 
 
 Note 2. To use the nominative with the infinitive after other 
 verba sentiendi et declarandi is rare even with poets, and altogether 
 an imitation of the Greek usage. 
 
 Phaselus ille, quern videtis hospites, ait fuisse navium celerri- 
 mus. 
 
 Vir bonus et sapiens dignis ait esse par atus. 
 
 17. The accusative with the infinitive stands apparently 195 
 unconnected, but is to be explained by an ellipsis of credi- 
 bile est, in interrogations or exclamations expressive of 
 indignation, or some other feeling, the enclitic ne being 
 usually added. 
 
 Mene ineepto desislere victam, nee posse Italia Teucrorum 
 avertere regem 1 
 
 Adeone esse hominem infelicem quemquam, ut ego sum 1 
 
 Tene, cum ceteri socii tui fugerent ac se occultarent, tibi 
 potissimum istas partes depoposcisse, ut in judieio versarere et 
 sederes cum accusatore 1 
 
 Ulam clementiam mansuetudinemque nostri imperii in tantam 
 crudelitatem inhumanitatemque esse conversam ! 
 • 12* 
 
138 USE OF THE MOODS. 196, 197. 
 
 Hem, mea lux, te nunc, mea Terentia, sic vexari, sic jacere 
 in lacrimis et sordibus ! idque fieri mea culpa ! 
 
 Note. Ut with the subjunctive is used in the same sense. 
 
 Victanme ut quisquam victrici patriae prctferret f 
 
 Uli7ie ut impune bella concitent? 
 
 Judicio ut arator decumanum persequatur ? 
 
 196 18. There are many verbs in Latin, which seem to re- 
 quire an accusative with the infinitive as their immediate 
 object, but which nevertheless are followed by the subjunc- 
 tive with ut. It will be found, however, that most of these 
 verbs are of such a nature, that the relation of design and 
 purpose, or effect and consequence, which ut expresses, may 
 be considered as existing between the leading verb and 
 the dependent proposition. 
 
 197 19. Ut is used with verbs of endeavoring, aiming, ac- 
 complishing ; facere, efficere, perficere, studere, id [hoc, 
 illud) agere, operam dare, meditari, curare, in animum 
 inducer e, consilium caper e, niti, contendere, videre (take 
 care), nihil antiquius habere quam. Some of these are 
 also joined with an infinitive (see 194); but ut alone must 
 be used, when the sense points to some future period, in 
 which an effect is to be produced. 
 
 Omne animal se ipsum diligit, ac simul ut ortum est, id agit, 
 ut se conservet. 
 
 Videndum est igitur, ut ea liberalitate utamur, quse prosit 
 amicis, noceat nemini. 
 
 Opera danda est, ut verbis utamur quam usitatissimis et quam 
 maxime aptis, id est rem declarantibus. 
 
 Debes explicare omnia vitia filii, quibus parens incensus 
 potuerit animum inducere, ut naturam ipsam vinceret, ut amorem 
 ilium penitus insitum ejiceret ex animo, ut denique patrem esse 
 sese oblwisceretur . 
 
 Ante senectutem curavi, ut bene viverem; in senectute, ut 
 bene moriar. 
 
 Id studuisti, isti formae ut mores consimiles forent. 
 
 Si omnia fecit, ut sanaret, peregit medicus partes suas. 
 
 Note 1. Besides the sense of effecting , facio is used with ut 
 and a subjunctive, as a periphrasis for a verb of action. 
 
198. INFINITIVE MOOD. 139 
 
 Invitus quidem feci, ut L. Flamininum e senatu ejicerem (for 
 invitus quidem ejeci). 
 
 Invitus facio, ut recorder ruinas rei publicae. 
 
 Glabrionem, id quod sapientissime fecit, facere laetatus sum, ut 
 repente testem dimitteret (for laetatus sum, quod dlmisit). 
 
 Negavi me esse facturum, ut de periculo publico non ad con- 
 silium publicum rem integram deferrem (for negavi me rem 
 integram non delaturum esse). 
 
 Note 2. Facere, used of writers, in the sense of introducing, 
 representing, is joined with a participle, but if the verb be in the 
 passive, with the accusative with the infinitive. 
 
 Xenophon facit in iis, quae a Socrate dicta retulit, Socratem 
 disputantem formam dei quaeri non oportere. 
 
 Quibus enim oculis aniini intueri potuit vester Plato fabricam 
 illam tanti operis, qua construi a deo atque cedificari mundum 
 facit. 
 
 Note 3. The imperative fac in the signification of suppose, 
 take the case, is followed by the accusative with the infinitive. 
 
 Fac animas non remanere post mortem ; vides, si ita sit, nos 
 privari spe beatioris vitae. 
 Fac, qui ego sum, esse te. 
 
 Note 4. In the same manner ejjicere in the signification of to 
 pro??e, form a conclusion, is followed by the accusative with the 
 infinitive, although not exclusively. 
 
 Dicaearchus tres libros scripsit, in quibus vult ejjicere animcs 
 esse mortales. 
 
 Ex quo efficitur hominem naturae obedientem homini nocere non 
 posse. 
 
 Ex quo efficitur, ut, quidquid honestum sit, idem sit utile. 
 
 20. After the verbs of begging, demanding, admomish- 198 
 ing, and commanding (including those of advising, 
 urging, encouraging, entrusting with a commission, and 
 others of a similar meaning), rogo, oro y precor, peto, 
 moneo, admoneo, commoneo > hortor, adhortor, coliortor, ex- 
 hortor, suadeo, persuadeo, impello y perpello, excito x incito, 
 impero, and others, ut or ne with the subjunctive is used, 
 where not merely the object, but also the purpose of the 
 request or exhortation is contemplated. 
 
 Illud te oro et Iwrtor, ut in extrema parte munens tui dili- 
 gentissimus sis. 
 
140 USE OF THE MOODS. 198. 
 
 Themistocles persuasit populo, ut pecunia publica, quee ex 
 metallis rediret, classis n avium cedificaretur. 
 
 Impellimur natura, ut prodesse velimus quam plurimis, im- 
 primis docendo. 
 
 Te illud admoneo, ut quotidie meditere resistendum esse 
 iracundise. 
 
 Alcibiades se afflictabat, lacrimansque Socrati supplex erat,ut 
 sibi virtutem traderet, turpitudinemque depelleret. 
 
 Tribuni plebis postulant, ut sacrosancti habeantur. 
 
 Themistocles collegis suis pradixit, ut ne prius Lacedsemoni- 
 orum legatos dimitterent, quam ipse esset remissus. 
 
 Note 1. Among the verbs now enumerated, there are some 
 which take the accusative with the infinitive, when what is said 
 is considered as the object of the verb; and ut with the subjunc- 
 tive, when there is reference to a future time, at which anything 
 is to take place. So moneo, admoneo, in the sense of apprize, 
 remind, or inform, take an infinitive j as moneo te hoc falsum esse: 
 persuasit mihi hoc verum esse (he convinced me that it was true), 
 but in the sense of succeed in exhorting, the subjunctive ; quis 
 tibi persuasit, ut hoc faceres? Nuntio, scribo, and even dico, are 
 also used with the subjunctive, when they imply an injunction or 
 intention that anything should be done. 
 
 Caesar Dolabellae dixit, ut ad me scriberet, ut in Italiam quam 
 primum venirem. 
 
 Deliberantibus Atheniensibus Pythia respondit, ut moBnibus 
 ligneis se munirent. 
 
 Persuasit mihi se profecfurum esse. 
 
 Persuasit mihi, ut proficiscerer. 
 
 Note 2. The infinitive after these verbs is rare, and occurs 
 chiefly in later writers, as Tacitus, although there are a few in- 
 stances in Cicero. 
 
 Cum vita sine amicis insidiarum et metus plena sit, ratio ipsa 
 monet amicitias comparare. 
 
 Mihi ante oculos obversatur rei publicae dignitas, quae me ad 
 sese rapit, haec minora relinquere hortatur. 
 
 Plato autem tantum apud Dionysium auctoritate potuit valuitque 
 eloquentia, ut ei persuaserit tyrannidis facere finem libertatemque 
 reddere Syracusanis. 
 
 Note 3. The verbs of commanding, imperare, mandare, prastri- 
 bere, edicere (when it means to make proclamation of something 
 to be done), legem dare, decernere (to decree that something be 
 
199, 200. INFINITIVE MOOD. 141 
 
 done), take ut with the suhjunctive, agreeably to the above rule. 
 Jubeo and veto are exceptions, and take an accusative with the 
 infinitive. 
 
 Aristoteles versum in oratione vetat esse, numerum jubet. 
 Jubet nos Pythius Apollo noscere nosmet ipsos. 
 Alexander corpus suum in Hammonis templo condi jubet. 
 Augustus carmina Virgilii cremari contra testamenti ejus 
 verecundiam vetuit. 
 
 Note 4. Instances of ut with the subjunctive after jubeo occur, 
 but not frequently. 
 
 Hoc tibi in mentem non venit jubere, ut haec quoque referret ! 
 Jussit, ut quae ex sua classe venissent naves, Eubceam peterent. 
 
 Note 5. Imperare is often followed by the accusative with the 
 infinitive^ 
 
 Ipsum in lautumias abduci imperabat. 
 
 21. Cases are not uncommon, in the narrative style, 199 
 where there first occurs a proposition with ut or ne and 
 the subjunctive, depending on a verb of asking, command- 
 ing, exhorting, &,c, and then the construction of the 
 accusative with the infinitive is introduced, containing the 
 sentiment or words of the subject of the narration. It 
 may be explained by supposing that the meaning to think 
 
 or to say is contained in the preceding verb ; as Caesar 
 exercitui imperavit, ne injussu suo concurreret ; se, cum id 
 fieri vellet, vexillo signum datitrum, i. e. " he said that he 
 would give/' &x. 
 
 His consulentibus nominatim Pythia prcecepit, ut Miltiadem 
 sibi imperatorem sumerent ; id si fecissent, incepta prospera 
 futura. 
 
 Monebant etiam, ne orientem morem pellendi reges inultum 
 sineret ; satis libertatem ipsam habere dulcedinis. Nisi quanta vi 
 civitates earn expetant, tanta regna reges defendant, cequari 
 summa infimis. Nihil excelsum, nihil, quod supra ceteros emi- 
 neat, in civitatibus fore; adesse finem regnis, rei inter deos 
 hominesque pulcherrimae. 
 
 22. Ut with the subjunctive must further be used, after 200 
 expressions of happening, jit, fieri non potest, accidit 
 (chiefly of disagreeable things), incidit, occurrit, contingit 
 (chiefly of desirable things), evenit, usu venit, occurrit ; 
 
142 USE OF THE MOODS. 200. 
 
 and after the expressions, it remains, it follows : sequitur, 
 futurum est, extremum est, reliquum est, relinquitur, 
 restat, superest, and sometimes accedit. 
 
 Fieri potest, ut recte quis sentiat, et id, quod sentit, polite 
 eloqui non possit. 
 
 Perssepe evenit, ut utilitas cum honestate certet. 
 
 Reliquum est, ut egomet mihi consulam. 
 
 Accedit, ut eo facilius animus evadatex hoc aere, quod nihil est 
 animo velocius. 
 
 Note I. Sequitur, in the sense of thence it r follows, should, ac- 
 cording to its import, be followed by an accusative with the 
 infinitive, but it has frequently ut, in this sense, as well as in that 
 of the next thing is. 
 
 Si hoc verum non est, sequitur, ut falsum sit. 
 
 Note 2. Efficitur, in the same sense of thence it follows, has 
 sometimes ut, but more frequently the accusative with the infini- 
 tive. 
 
 Efficiturque id, quod Pythagoras vult in amicitia, ut unus fiat ex 
 pluribus. 
 Ex quo ejficitur hominem homini nocere non posse. 
 Similiter effici potest sapientem esse mundum. 
 
 Note 3. After mos or moris est, ut may follow, instead of the 
 infinitive alone. 
 
 Sed est mos hominum, ut nolint eundem pluribus rebus excel- 
 lere. 
 
 Note 4. Ut is found occasionally after cequum, rectum, verum, 
 utile, verisimile est, but this can be considered only as an excep- 
 tion, for the accusative with the infinitive, as subject of the propo- 
 sition, is far more common. 
 
 Si verum est, quod nemo dubitat, ut populus Romanus omnes 
 gentes virtute superarit, non est infitiandum Hannibalem tanto 
 praestitisse ceteros imperatores prudentia, quanto populus Romanus 
 antecedebat fortitudine cunctas nationes. 
 
 Verisimile non est, ut Heius religioni suae monumentisque ma- 
 jorum pecuniam anteponeret. 
 
 Note 5. There are but two passages in Cicero in which inte- 
 grum est is followed by ut. 
 
 Atque si ne integrum quidem era*, ut ad justitiam remigraret, 
 crvibus libertatem et jura redder et. 
 
201,202. INFINITIVE MOOD. 143 
 
 Neque est integrum, ut meum laborem hominum periculis sub- 
 levandis non impertiam. 
 
 23. In all other cases in which that expresses a pur- 201 
 pose, and is equivalent to in order that, or where it is 
 equivalent to so that, ut must be used. See sect. 12, 141. 
 
 24. After the verbs which denote willingness, unwil- 202 
 lingness, or permission {volo, nolo, malo, per mitt o, potior, 
 sino, licet), which commonly take the accusative with the 
 infinitive, and after verbs of asking, advising, remind- 
 ing (rogo, oro, precor, postulo, peto, quceso, hortor, 
 moneo, admoneo, commoneo, suadeo), which according to 
 the rule (see 198) are followed by ut, the subjunctive alone 
 
 is often used without ut ; most frequently of all, after fac, 
 velim, nolim, malim, and licet. 
 
 Volo prius habeat orator rem, de qua dicat, quam cogitet, 
 quibus verbis quidque dicat aut quomodo. 
 
 Malo te sapiens hostis metuat, quam stulti cives laudent. 
 
 Velim fieri posset, ut a me sine contumelia nominarentur ii, 
 qui se decemviros sperant futuros. 
 
 Gracchus permisit in publico epularentur milites. 
 
 Hanc si qui partem putavit orationis, sequatur Hermagoram 
 licebit. 
 
 Caesar legatos monuit ad nutum et ad tempus omnes res ab iis 
 administrarentur. 
 
 Dolabellae quod scripsi, suadeo videas, tamquam si tua res 
 agatur. 
 
 Postulo, Appi, etiam atque etiam consider es, quo progrediare. 
 
 Tu velim animo sapienti fortique sis. 
 
 Magnum fac animum habeas et spem bonam. 
 
 Note. With oportet and necesse est the accusative with the in- 
 finitive or the subjunctive alone may be used. Thus legem brevem 
 esse oportet or lex oportet brems sit ; further, virtus necesse est 
 vitium aspernetur atque oderit, " virtue must reject and hate vice." 
 The infinitive is usually joined with opus est ; ut with the sub- 
 junctive seldom. 
 
 Virtus voluptatis aditus intercludat necesse est. 
 In omni vita sua quemquam a recta conscientia transversum 
 unguem non oportet discedere. 
 
 Suis te oportet illecebris ipsa virtus trahat ad verum decus. 
 
144 USE OF THE MOODS. 203, 204. 
 
 Necesse est legem haberi in rebus optimis. 
 
 Quid opus est de Dionysio tarn valde affirmaref 
 
 Mini prae lassitudine opus est, ut lavem. 
 
 203 25. There are many instances where the accusative 
 with the infinitive as well as the conjunction quod are 
 used. In general this distinction appears to be observed, 
 that when an individual opinion is expressed, the accusa- 
 tive with the infinitive is used ; when the matter is to be 
 stated as a fact, quod. The latter construction is especially 
 used after accedit, est causa, magnum est. 
 
 Quod autem me Agamemnonem aemulari putas, falleris. 
 
 Inter causas malornm nostrorum est, quod \i\imus ad exempla. 
 
 Supra belli Latini metum id quoque accesserat, quod triginta 
 jam eonjurasse populos satis constabat. 
 
 Ad haec omnia una consolatio est, quod ea conditione nati 
 sumus, ut nihil, quod homini accidere possit, recusare debeamus. 
 
 Note. After adder e (usually in the imperative, adde hue) and 
 facere with an adverb, quod is used. 
 
 Fecit humaniter, quod ad me misso senatu vesperi venit. 
 Adde, quod ingemms didicisse fideliter artes 
 Emollit mores, nee sink esse feros. 
 
 204 26. After verbs which denote feeling pain or joy (doleo, 
 succenseo, angor, indignor, gratum mihi est, gaudeo, de" 
 lector), and surprise or wonder (miror, admiror), and after 
 glorior, gratulor, gratias ago, queror, quod may be used, 
 instead of the accusative with the infinitive. It takes the 
 indicative or subjunctive after it, according as the thing 
 spoken of is meant to be represented as a fact, or some- 
 thing conceived by the mind. But that quod with the 
 subjunctive is used in intermediate clauses with another 
 subjunctive, or with an accusative with the infinitive, fol- 
 lows from the rules given above respecting the subjunctive; 
 sect. 12, 148-151. 
 
 Gaudeo, quod te interpellavi . 
 
 Quod spiralis, quod vocem mitlitis, quod formas hominum 
 habetis, indignantur. 
 
 Admiratus sum, quod nihilo minus ad me tua manu scripsisses. 
 
 Dupliciter delectatus sum tuis Uteris, et quod ipse risi, et quod 
 te intellexi jam posse ridere. 
 
205. INFINITIVE MOOD. 145 
 
 Dolebam, quod consortem gloriosi laboris amiseram. 
 Vetus illud Catonis admodum scitum est, qui mirari se aiebat, 
 quod non rider et haruspex, haruspicem cum vidisset. 
 
 Nemo unquam est oratorem, quod latine loqueretur, admiratus. 
 
 Note. In general the accusative with the infinitive with dolere 
 and gaudere is much more frequent than quod, but with gratias 
 agere and gratulari, the accusative with the infinitive is hardly 
 ever found, but quod. 
 
 Ego te abfuisse tamdiu a nobis et doleo, quod carui fructu jucun- 
 dissimo necessitudinis, et Icetor, quod absens omnia cum maxima 
 dignitate es consecutus. 
 
 Res publica Romana justissimas mancipio Tusculano gratias 
 agere potuit, quod ex eo duo sui conservatores extiterunt. 
 
 Tibi ago gratias, quod me omni molestia liberas. 
 
 Gratulor tibi, quod ex provincia salvum te ad tuos recepisti. 
 
 27. Quod is exclusively used in explanatory clauses, 205 
 when a demonstrative pronoun hoc, illud, istud, id pre- 
 cedes, or is necessarily to be supplied, to which quod 
 refers, having the sense of inasmuch as, as far as con- 
 cerns. The mood will be the indicative, if no other cir- 
 cumstance requires the subjunctive, as it does in the 
 following passage. Socrates hoc Periclem ceteris praesti- 
 tisse oratoribus dicit, quod is Anaxagorae fuerit auditor. 
 
 Mihi quidem videntur homines hacre maxime belluis praestare, 
 quod loqui possunt. 
 
 Ex tota laude Reguli illud est admiratione dignum, quod 
 captivos retinendos censuit. 
 
 Habet hoc optimum in se generosus animus, quod concitatur 
 ad honesta. 
 
 Phocion non in eo solum ofFenderat, quod patriae male con- 
 suluerat, sed etiam, quod amicitise fidem non prcestiterat. 
 
 Aristides nonne ob earn causam expulsus est patriae, quod 
 praeter modum Justus esset J 
 
 Alcibiades ostendit Laeedaemonios eo nolle conrligere classe, 
 quod pedestribus copiis plus quam navibus valerent. 
 
 13 
 
146 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 206. 
 
 Note. In the epistolary style, especially, quod, followed by an 
 indicative, stands very frequently at the beginning of a sentence, 
 in the sense of as to. 
 
 Quod scire vis, qua quisque in te fide sit et voluntate ; difficile 
 dictu est de singulis. 
 
 Tu quod me hortaris, ut spem habeam recuperandae salutis ; id 
 velim sit ejusmodi, ut recte sperare possimus. 
 
 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 SECTION XV. 
 
 206 1. The participle expresses the action or condition of 
 the verb, marking, at the same time, the complete or 
 incomplete state of the action. In the Latin language 
 this form of the verb is defective. There is a present 
 active participle, scribens, ivriting, and one for the perfect 
 in the passive, scriptus, written, but there is no active 
 participle of a completed action, e. g. having written 
 nor any passive of a state of suffering still going on, being 
 written (i. e. being in the act of being written). The 
 Latin deponent alone has a complete participle, because 
 the passive form has an active signification ; imitans, imi- 
 tating, imitatus, having imitated. 
 
 Ostendi adveniens, quicum volebam atque ut^volebam filiaml 
 collocatam. [ 
 
 Marius duas Camertium cohortes mira virtute vim Cimbroruml 
 sustinentes in ipsa acie civitate donavit. 
 
207. USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 147 
 
 Quotaquseque res evenit pradicta ab haruspicibus 1 
 Julius decemvir decessit jure suo, ut demtum de vi magistra- 
 tes populi libertati adjiceret. 
 
 Alexander descendit in flumen, vixque ingressi subito horrore 
 artus rigere cceperunt. 
 
 Note. If a qualifying expression is joined to a participle, it is 
 done in the form of an adverb. This is the case, although not 
 exclusively, even when the participle has become in reality a sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 Zeno recte facta sola in bonis actionibus ponebat ; prave, id est 
 peccata, in malis. 
 
 Multa Catonis et in senatu et in foro vel provisa prudenter vel 
 acta constanter, vel responsa acute ferebantur. 
 
 Accusator, si quern pecunia dicat inductum fecisse, demon- 
 strabit aliqua in re ejus aliquod factum avarum. 
 
 2. There are besides two participles, one active and one 207 
 passive, which express the action or suffering as not yet 
 begun, and consequently as something which is to take 
 place in future. The participle of the future active 
 properly expresses the intention to perform an action, 
 scripturus, "one who intends to write," but has also the 
 signification of simple futurity, " one who will write." 
 The participle of the future passive expresses in the 
 nominative the necessity that something should be under- 
 gone ; epistola scribenda, is, " a letter that must be writ- 
 ten, " not simply " one that will be written. " In the other 
 cases, it serves to supply the very sensible want of a par- 
 ticiple present passive. See 217 of this section. 
 
 Darius pervenerat ad Arbela vicum nobilem sua clade fa- 
 cturus. 
 
 Alexander Hephaestionem in regionem Bactrianam misit com- 
 meatus in hiemem paraturum. 
 
 Flagitiosum est ob rem judicandam pecumam accipere. 
 
 In Lucullo tanta prudentia fuit in constituendis temper -andisque 
 civitatibus, tanta sequitas, ut hodie stet Asia Luculli institutis 
 servandis et quasi vestigiis persequendis. 
 
 Note 1. The deponent verbs, whose number is considerable, 
 afford the best means of supplying the want of an active past 
 
148 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 207. 
 
 participle (victoriam adeptus, assecutus, consecutus), neither the 
 paraphrase with cum and the pluperfect subjunctive, nor the use 
 of the passive participle absolute {victoria parta, " when he had 
 obtained the victory") being in all cases adequate. 
 
 Pythagoras Crotonam venit, populumque in luxuriam lapsum 
 auctoritate sua ad usum frugalitatis revocavit. 
 
 Alexander admitti Abdolonymum jussit, diuque contemplatus, 
 corporis, inquit, habitus famae generis non repugnat. 
 
 Utilis interdum est ipsis injuria passis. 
 
 Note 2. On the other hand the Latin writers have given to 
 many deponent past participles a passive sense. The following 
 have the authority of the best writers: adeptus, comitatus, com- 
 mentatus, corn-plexus, cojtfessus, contestatus and detestatus. popu- 
 latus and depopulatus, dimensus and emensus, effatus, ementitus, 
 emeritus, expcrtus (and especially inexpertus), exsecratus, interpre- 
 tatus, meditatus, metatus, moderatus, opinatus, pactus, partitus, 
 perfunctus, periclitatus, stipulatus, testatus. Even these are not 
 used completely as passives by the most correct writers ; for ex- 
 ample seldom in the ablative absolute, though we find classe 
 partita, partito exercitu, depopulato agro, and adepta libertate. 
 
 Note 3. Some active verbs have perfect participles, passive in 
 form, but active in sense; jurare, coenare prandere ; juratus, 
 caenatus, pransus ; potus, from potare, belongs here in part, being 
 used both in an active and passive sense. The participles of the 
 neuter passive verbs, as they are called, ausus, gavisus, solitus, 
 jisus, and conjisus, and also exosus, perosus, and pert&sus, are 
 to be mentioned here. This last mentioned participle generally 
 governs the accusative, but sometimes the genitive, in conformity 
 to the construction of t&det. 
 
 M. Atilius Regulus, cum consul iterum in Africa ex insidiis 
 captus esset, juratus missus est ad senatum, ut, nisi redditi essent 
 Pcenis captivi nobiles quidam, rediret ipse Karthaginem. 
 
 Quid igitur causae excogitari potest, cur te lautum voluerit, 
 cxnatum noluerit occidere. 
 
 Millia turn pransi tria repimus. 
 
 Itaque, etsi domum bene potus seroque redieram, tamen id 
 caput, ubi hsec controversia est, notavi et descriptum tibi misi. 
 
 Hunc isti aiunt, cum taurum immolavisset, excepisse sanguinem 
 patera, et eo poto mortuum concidisse. 
 
 Modica silva adhserebat, unde rursus ausi promptissimos prasto- 
 rianorum equitum interfecerunt. 
 
 Quasi pertazsus ignaviam suam, quod nihil dum a se memorabile 
 actum esset, missionem continuo effiagitavit. 
 
208. USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 149 
 
 Epicharis quaedam lentitudinis eorum pertcesa et in Campania 
 agens priraores classiarioruni Misenensium labefacere et conscientia 
 illigare connisa est. 
 
 Note 4. Habeo forms a periphrasis with the participle perfect 
 passive of verbs denoting knowledge, inquiry, and determination. 
 Cognitum, perspectum, perceptum, comprehension, exploratum, sta- 
 tutum, constitution, deliberatum, persuasum habeo, are equivalent 
 to cognovi, perspexi, percepi, etc. Persuasum can, of course, only 
 be used in the neuter gender. Habeo is occasionally used with 
 the participles of other verbs, besides those enumerated, with 
 some difference of meaning, the periphrasis being more emphatic 
 than the perfect active. 
 
 Siculi ad meam fidem, quam habent spectatam jam et diu cogni- 
 tam, confugiunt. 
 
 Habes forsan jam statutum, quid tibi agendum putes. 
 
 Atticus principum philosophorum ita percepta habuit praecepta,. 
 ut iis ad vitam agendam, non ad ostentationem uteretur. 
 
 Ceteros item deos deasque omnes" imploro atque obtestor, 
 quorum templis et religionibus iste nefario quodam furore et 
 audacia instinctus bellum sacrilegum semper impiumque habuit 
 indictum. 
 
 Quod me hortaris, ut absolvam ; habeo absolutum suave epos. 
 
 3. Participles are employed in Latin, to mark a number 208 
 of relations, which in English are expressed by particles. 
 The participle is used (provided that it refer to some sub- 
 ject mentioned in the leading proposition of the sentence), 
 instead of a verb and relative pronoun or particle, in ex- 
 planatory and adversative clauses, supplying the place of 
 which, as, when, although, because. 
 
 Curio ad focum sedenti magnum auri pondus Samnites cum 
 attulissent, repudiati ab eo sunt- 
 
 Dionysius tyrannus Syracusis expulsus Corinthi pueros doce- 
 bat. 
 
 Risus interdum Ita repente erumplt, ut eum cupientes (though 
 we desire it) tenere nequeamus. 
 
 Est enim lex nihil aliud nisi recta et a numiue deorum tracta 
 ratio imperans honesta, prokibens contraria. 
 
 Dionysius cultros metuens tonsorios candenti carbone sibk 
 adurebat capillum (because he feared). 
 
 Mendaci homini ne verum quidem dicenti credere solemus*. 
 13* 
 
150 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 209. 
 
 Bestiis ipsa terra fundit ex sese pastus varios nihil laboranti- 
 bus; nobis autem aut vix, aut ne vix quidem, suppetunt multo 
 labore qucerentibus . 
 
 -^Egyptii et Babylonii in camporum patentium sequoribus 
 habitantes omnem curam in siderum cognitione posuerunt. 
 
 Note 1. The most common use of the participle is, to connect 
 with the main proposition a clause denoting the time of an event. 
 The participle in the place of adversative clauses is especially to 
 be noticed. After a participle of this kind tamen frequently fol- 
 lows. 
 
 Regem forte inambulantem homo adiit. 
 
 Misericordia occurrere solet supplicibus et calamitosis nullius 
 oratione evocata. 
 
 Scripta tua jam diu expectans non audeo tamen flagitare. 
 
 Quis hoc non intelligit, istum absolutum tamen e manibus populi 
 Romani eripi nullo rriodo posse. 
 
 It is a peculiarity of later writers to add quamquam, quamvis y 
 etiam, vel, to a participle used in an adversative sense. 
 
 Caesarem milites quamvis recusantem ultro in Africam sunt 
 secuti. 
 
 Note 2. With the verbs of hearing and seeing, and others of 
 similar meaning, the participle is often used, wherein English the 
 infinitive is more common. ' The infinitive, however, is by no 
 means uncommon. 
 
 Timoleon cum setate jam provectus esset, lumina oculorum 
 amisit, quam calamitatem ita moderate tulit, ut neque eum 
 querentem quisquam audierit, neque eo minus privatis publicisque 
 rebus interfuerit. 
 
 Catonem vidi in bibliotheca sedentem multis circumfusum Stoi- 
 corum libris. 
 
 Hamilcar ut Karthaginem venit, rnulto aliter, ac sperabat, rem 
 publicam se habentem cognovit. 
 
 209 4. The participles of the perfect and future passive are 
 used to supply the place of substantives, expressing the 
 action of the verb, when these either do not exist in the 
 Latin language, or are not in common use. The partici- 
 ple of the perfect is chosen when the action is to be repre- 
 sented as completed ; the future, in the oblique cases, 
 when it is conceived as still incomplete. (See more par- 
 ticularly of the participle future passive afterwards). This 
 
210. USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 151 
 
 is done not only through all the cases, but with the prepo- 
 sitions ad, ante, ob, post, propter, ah, and ex ; as, hae 
 literae rccitatce magnum luctum fecerunt, " the reading of 
 this letter"; Tarentum captum, " the taking of Taren- 
 tum " : receptus Hannibal, " the reception of Hannibal " ; 
 ob receptum Hannibalem, " on account of the reception 
 of Hannibal ; " sibi quisque cossi regis expectabat decus, 
 "the merit of having killed the king." 
 
 Scipio propter Africam domitam Africanus appellatus est. 
 
 Thebae et ante Epaminondam natum et post ejus interitum 
 semper alieno paruerunt imperio. 
 
 Lacedaemoniis nulla res tanto erat damno quam disciplina 
 Lycurgi, cui per septingentos annos adsueverant, sublata. 
 
 Furius consul nuntio circumventi fratris temere se in mediam 
 dimicationem infert. 
 
 Regnatum Romae ab condita urbe ad liberatam annos ducentos 
 quadraginta quatuor. 
 
 Major ex civibus amissis dolor quam ]&titia, fusis hostibus fait. 
 
 Note 1. It is a peculiarity of Livy to use the neuter of a per- 
 fect passive participle without a noun as the subject of a sentence. 
 
 Tentatum domi per dictatorem, ut ambo patricii consules crea- 
 rentur, rem ad interregnum perducit. 
 
 Diu non perlitatum tenuerat dictatorem, ne ante meridiem 
 signum dare posset. 
 
 Note 2. The English without, with a verbal substantive, is ex- 
 pressed in Latin not by sine, but by nisi, non, nullus, with the 
 participle; especially in the construction of the ablative absolute. 
 
 Caesar exercitum nunquam per insidiosa itinera duxit nisi per- 
 speculatus locorum situs. 
 
 Epicurus non erubescens voluptates persequitur omnes nomina- 
 ting 
 
 Romani non rogati adversus tyrannum Nabin Graecis afferunt 
 auxilium. 
 
 5. The participle of the future active is used to denote 210 
 the purpose of an action, where in English we rather use 
 the infinitive with to. 
 
 Alexander ad Jovem Hammonem pergit consulturus de origine 
 sua. 
 
152 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 211. 
 
 Brutus consul ita proelio uno accidit Vestinorumres, utdilabe- 
 rentur in oppida mcEnibus se defensuri. 
 
 Alexander vestem detraxit corpori projecturus semet in flu- 
 men. 
 
 Alexander milites a populatione Asiae prohibuit parcendum 
 suis rebus praefatus nee perdenda ea, quse possessuri venerint. 
 
 Note 1. This participle is also often used to supply the place of 
 the particles and, since, when, because, although (see 208). 
 
 Paneni date homini perituro, nisi mature subveniatis (because 
 he will perish unless you afford early aid). 
 
 Librum misi exigenti tibi missurusl etsi non exegisses (and 
 would have sent it, although you had not asked for it). 
 
 Dedit mini, quantum maxime potuit daturus amplius, si potu- 
 isset {and would have given more, if, etc). 
 
 Thymodi prcecipit Darius, ut omnes peregrinos milites a Phar- 
 nabazo acciperet, opera eorum usurus in bello (because he wished 
 to use them). 
 
 Plura locuturos abire nos jussit {although we were going to say 
 more). 
 
 Note 2. It is to be observed that the genitive plural of this 
 participle does not occur, probably on account of the sound, ex- 
 cept futurorum and futurarum, venturorum, exiturarum, transitu* 
 rarum, yeriturorum, and moriturorum. 
 
 211 6. In the cases hitherto mentioned, the participle sup- 
 plied the place of a proposition, the subject of which is a 
 noun contained in the leading proposition. If, however, a 
 new subject is introduced, it is put with the participle in 
 the ablative, independent of the leading proposition (abla- 
 tivus absolutus or consequentice). The ablative absolute is 
 most frequently used to specify time. This circumstance 
 accounts for the choice of the ablative case. 
 
 Pythagoras cum Tarquinio Superbo regnante in Italiam 
 venisset, magnam illam Grecian* cum honore discipline turn 
 etiam auctoritate tenuit. 
 
 L. Valerii virtu te re gibus exterminatis libertas in re publica 
 censtituta est. 
 
 Dione Syracusis interfecto Dronysius rursus Syracusarum 
 potitus est. 
 
212, 213. USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 153 
 
 7. The ablative absolute may also be used instead of 212 
 the particles, if, since, because, although (see 208). 
 
 Reluctante natura irritus labor est. 
 
 Eclipses non ubique cernuntur, aliquando propter nubila, 
 ssepius globo terrae obstante. 
 
 Mucius solus in castra Porsenae venit, eumque interficere 
 proposita sibi morte conatus est. 
 
 Haud scio, an pietate ad versus deos sublata fides etiam et 
 societas generis humani et una excellentissima virtus justitia 
 tollatur. 
 
 Onera contentis corporibus facilius feruntur, remissis oppri- 
 munt. 
 
 Quae potest esse jucunditas vitas sublatis amicitiis. 
 
 Multorum artificum obscurior fama est quorundam claritati 
 in operibus eximiis obstante numero artificum. 
 
 Summa difficultate rei frumentariae affecto exercitu nulla tamen 
 vox est a militibus audita populi Romani majestate et superiori- 
 bus victoriis indigna. 
 
 Note. The ablatives absolute of the future active and future 
 passive participles are comparatively rare, especially the latter. 
 
 Deserere Rheni ripam irrupturis tarn infestis nationibus non 
 audent. 
 
 Antiochus securus admodum de bello Romano erat tamquam 
 non transituris in Asiam Romanis. 
 
 Ceterum propalam comprehendi Darius non poterat tot Persa- 
 rum millibus laturis opem. 
 
 Quis est enim, qui nullis officii prceceptis tradendis philosophum. 
 se audeat dicere. 
 
 8. The ablative absolute, like the ablative alone (see 213 
 sect. 6, 58, 59, and 61), is used to express the instrument, 
 cause, and manner of an action. 
 
 Antonius conjectura movenda et sedanda suspicions aut ex- 
 citanda incredibilem vim habebat. 
 
 Tribus hmstis jugum fit humi fixis duabus superque eas 
 transversa una deligata. 
 
 Flaminium Ccelius religione neglecta cecidisse apud Trasi- 
 menum scribit. 
 
154 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 214, 215. 
 
 214 9. Instead of a participle a subMantive may be used, 
 which expresses the action of a vero : e. g. dux, adjutor 
 and adjutrix, auctor, testis, conies, judex, interpres, magi- 
 ster and magistra, prczceptor and prceceptrix ; as, natura 
 duce, the same as natura ducente, "nature guiding " ; 
 comite fortuna, the same as comitante fortuna ; judice 
 Polyhio ; and names of office, consul, prcctor, imperator, 
 rex, chiefly to denote time ; e. g. Cicerone consule, " in 
 the consulship of Cicero " 
 
 Non sequor magos Persarum, quibus auctoribus Xerxes in- 
 flammasse templa Graeciae dicitur. 
 
 O quam facile erat orbis imperium occupare aut mihi Eomanis 
 militibus aut me rege Romanis. 
 
 Sapientia enim est una, qua? maestitiam pellat ex animis, quae 
 nos exhorrescere metu non sinat, qua prceceptrice in tranquilli- 
 tate vivi potest omni cupiditatum ardore restincto. 
 
 Quod deo teste promiseris, id tenendum est. 
 
 Bellum Gallicum C. Ccesare imperatore gestum est. 
 
 Ampla domus dedecori domino saepe fit, si est in ea solitudo : 
 et maxime, si aliquando alio domino solita est frequentari. 
 
 Galba orator tanto in honore pueris nobis erat, ut eum etiam 
 edisceremus. 
 
 215 10. The Latin, having no present participle of esse in 
 current use, the adjective alone often supplies the place of 
 a participle ; e. g. deo propitio, illis consciis, invita 
 Minerva, sereno ccelo, aspera hieme, me ignaro. 
 
 Romani Hannibale vivo nunquam se sine insidiis futuros arbi- 
 trabantur. 
 
 Obvius fit Miloni Clodius expeditus nulla rheda, nullis impedi- 
 mentis, nullis Graecis comitibus. 
 
 Germani pellibus utuntur magna corporis parte nuda. 
 
 Si quis ex hoc loco proficiscatur Puteolos stadia triginta. probo 
 navigio, bono gubernatore, hac tranquillitate ; probabile videatur 
 se illuc venturum esse salvum. 
 
 Yix in ipsis tectis et oppidis frigus infirma valetudine vitatur. 
 
 Alia causa est ejus, qui calamitate premitur, et*jus, qui res 
 meliores quaerit nullis suis rebus adversis. 
 
 Voluntas si tacitis nobis intelligi posset, verbis omnino non 
 uteremur. 
 
216. USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 155 
 
 Note 1. Even without a substantive, the adjective sometimes 
 stands absolutely, from the want of a participle of esse. 
 
 Adferebant Priverni sereno per diem totum rubrum solem fuisse. 
 
 Note 2. There are some instances of substantives being used 
 absolutely. 
 
 Dedit jura, quis pace et principe uteremur (in peace and under 
 prince). 
 
 11. The ablative of the participle of the perfect passive, 216 
 sometimes supplies alone the place of the whole construc- 
 tion of the ablative absolute, the following proposition 
 being considered as a noun of the neuter gender, and the 
 subject of the participle ; as, Hannibal cognito insidiassibi 
 paratas fuga salutem quaesivit, the same as cognitis insidiis 
 sibi paratis. This use is confined to a few participles, as 
 audito, cognito, comperto (passive), cxplorato, desperato, 
 nuntiato, edicto ; and some adjectives. 
 
 Alexander audito Darium appropinquare cum exercitu obviam 
 ire constituit. 
 
 Eoccepto, quod non simul esses, cetera lsetus. 
 
 Hoc quidem perspicuum est eos ad imperandum deligi solitos, 
 quorum de justitia magna esset opinio multitudinis. Adjuncto 
 vero, ut iidem etiam prudentes haberenter, nihil erat, quod homi- 
 nes his auctoribus non posse consequi se arbitrarentur. 
 
 Multi adnantes navibus incerto prss tenebris, quid peterent aut 
 vitarent, fcede interierunt. 
 
 Juxta periculoso, ficta seu vera promeret, monuit Liviam, ne 
 arcaria domus vulgarentur. 
 
 Note. There are cases in which a participle in the ablative 
 stands so absolutely, that not even the following proposition can 
 be considered as the subject. 
 
 Huic contra itum ad amnem Erinden, in cujus transgressu mul- 
 tum certato pervicit Vardanes. 
 
 Id quia inaugurato Romulus fecerat, negare Attus Navius. 
 
 Versatur in animo meo cogitatio tuendi consulatus ; quae cum 
 omnibus est difficilis et magna ratio turn vero mihi prater ceteros, 
 cui errato nulla venia, recte/actoexigua laus et ab invitis expressa 
 proponitur. 
 
156 USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 217. 
 
 217 12. The participle future passive has in the nominative 
 case (and, in the construction of the accusative with the 
 infinitive, in the accusative also) the signification of ne- 
 cessity, less frequently of possibility ; laudandus is one 
 who must be praised, not can. The neuter of this par- 
 ticiple is used in the nominative, or the accusative before 
 the infinitive, with some tense of esse, in the sense of ne- 
 cessity or propriety ; laudandum est ; dico laudandum esse ; 
 " we must praise." The person, on whom the duty or 
 necessity rests, must be expressed in the dative, not in the 
 ablative with ah. 
 
 Diligentia colenda est nobis ; haec in omnibus rebus plurimum 
 valet ; hsec praecipue et semper adhibenda. 
 
 Cum suo cuique judicio utendum sit, difficile factu est me id 
 sentire semper, quod tu velis. 
 
 Moriendum certe est, et id incertum, an eo ipso die. 
 
 Omne animal confitendum est esse mortale. 
 
 JJttibi ambulandum, unguendum, sic mihi dormiendum. 
 
 Fortes et magnanimi sunt habendi, non qui faciunt, sed qui 
 propulsant injuriam. 
 
 Non paranda nobis solum, sed fruenda etiam sapientia est. 
 
 Note 1. In the authors of the best age, the future passive 
 participle is not generally used to denote possibility. There are, 
 indeed, some instances, in which the idea of possibility, and 
 others in which that of propriety seems to have been intended ; 
 but they are few, and not entirely convincing. 
 
 Itaque, judices, hi, qui hospites ad ea, quae visenda sunt, du- 
 cere solent, conversam jam habent demonstrationem suam. 
 
 Quam multa passus est Ulixes in illo errore diuturno, cum et 
 mulieribus (si Circe et Calypso mulieres appellandce sunt) inser- 
 viret. 
 
 Note 2. This participle is more frequently met with in the 
 signification of possibility, if connected with a negative or a 
 particle of similar meaning, as vix. 
 
 Maxime hac re permovebantur, quod civitatem ignobilem atque 
 humilem Eburonum sua sponte populo Romano bellum facere 
 ausam vix erat credendum. 
 
 Ilia, quae natura, non Uteris assecuti sunt, neque cum Graecia, 
 neque ulla cum gente sunt conferenda. 
 
"218, 219. USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. 157 
 
 Note 3. The ablative with a is sometimes found with the 
 participle future passive instead of the dative. 
 
 Aguntur bona multorum civium, quibus est a vobis et ipsorum 
 et rei public® causa consulendum. 
 
 O dii immortales ! fortem et a vobis, judices, conservandum 
 virum. 
 
 Sic enim existimare debetis rem nullam majorem, magis peri- 
 culosam, magis ab omnibus vobis providendam ad populum Ro- 
 raanum esse delatam. 
 
 Note 4. With dare, tradere, locare, conducere, mittere, permit- 
 tere, accipere, suscipere, and similar verbs, the purpose for which 
 anything is given, etc., is expressed passively by the future passive 
 participle. Curo, joined with the same participle in the sense of 
 to cause, is particularly to be noticed. 
 
 Rex Harpago Cyrum infantem occidendum tradidit. 
 
 Clodius uberrimas provincias vexandas diripiendasque consuli- 
 bus permisit. 
 
 Lentulus attribuit nos trucidandos Cethego, ceteros cives inter- 
 jiciendos Gabinio, urbem inflammandam Cassio, totam Italiam 
 vastandam diripiendamque Catilinae. 
 
 Conon muros dirutos a Lysandro rejiciendos curavit. ♦ 
 
 Funus ei satis amplum faciendum curavi. 
 
 13. In the remaining cases, this participle has some- 218 
 times, indeed, the signification of necessity, but it common- 
 ly supplies the place of a participle present passive, i. e. of 
 
 a continued passive state ; as occupatus sum in literis scri- 
 bendis ; peritus rei publicse regenda. The signification 
 of futurity may sometimes be implied, but it is derived 
 from the connexion, not from the participle itself; e. g. 
 consilium liber tatis recuperandce ; missus erat ad naves 
 recuperandas. See the following section on the Gerund. 
 
 14. This participle is formed not only from transitive 219 
 active verbs, but also from those deponents which have an 
 active sense ; e. g. in imitando hoc scriptore haec cautio 
 est ; of intransitive verbs only the neuter of this participle 
 
 is in use with est, erat, &x. quiescendum est, dormiendum, 
 eundum est. 
 
 Graecis utendum erit voeabulis. 
 
 Recto tibi invictoque moriendum est. 
 
 Aliquando isti principes et sibi et ceteris populi Romani uni- 
 versi auctoritati parendum esse fateantur. 
 14 
 
158 USE OF THE GERUND. 220, 221. 
 
 USE OF THE GERUND. 
 
 SECTION XVI. 
 
 220 1. The gerund is in its form nothing else than the four 
 oblique cases (genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative) 
 of the neuter of the participle future passive. It governs 
 the case of its verb, and in respect to signification supplies 
 the place of a declinable infinitive of the present active, 
 since it expresses the action or state of the verb, as a 
 verbal substantive. 
 
 221 2. The relation of the gerund to the participle future pas- 
 sive is the following. As the gerund has an active sense ; 
 
 e. g. consilium scribcndi, u the design of writing," or, i( to 
 write," the active construction may, when the verb is transi- 
 tive and has a dependent accusative, e. g. consilium scribcn- 
 di epistolam, without any alteration of sense, be changed to 
 a passive ; consilium scribendce epistolce, i. e. " the design 
 of a letter to be written," or, "that a letter be written". 
 What is the accusative in the active construction, is put, 
 in the passive, in the case in which the gerund stood, and 
 the participle agrees with it ; e. g. in scribendo epistolam 
 becomes in scribcnda cpistola ; ad scribendum epistolam 
 becomes ad scribendam epistolam. This change may take 
 place, wherever no ambiguity is likely to arise from the 
 gender not being distinguishable ; it is not common, when 
 the accusative, which the gerund governs, is the neuter of 
 a pronoun or an adjective : for example, studium illud eni- 
 ciendi, not illius ; cupido plura cognoscendi, not plurium 
 cognoscendoru?n i for then the gender could not be distin- 
 guished. But independently of this, the use of the parti- 
 ciple for the gerund with the accusative is sometimes 
 omitted, and is less frequent in some writers, Livy for 
 example, than in others. 
 
222. USE OF THE GERUND. 159 
 
 Note 1. This passive construction is also found with utor, 
 fruor,fungor, and potior, because originally, and sometimes even 
 in the authors still remaining, these verbs governed an accusative 
 case. 
 
 Justitice. fruendce causa videntur olim bene morati reges consti- 
 tute 
 
 Expetuntur autem divitise cum ad usus vita? necessarios turn ad 
 perfruendas voluptates. 
 
 Hostes in spem potiundorum castrorum venerant. 
 
 Ex quo intelligitur, si sit quispiam, qui aliquid tribuat volu- 
 ptati, diligenter ei tenendum esse ejus fruendm modum. 
 
 Note 2. A few passages occur in the Latin writers now extant 
 in which the gerund is used in a passive sense. 
 
 Haec frequentia totius Italia? Romam convenit uno tempore 
 undique comitiorum, ludorum censendique causa (to undergo the 
 census). 
 
 Claudius Arpocrae lectica per urbem vehendi jus tribuit. 
 
 Nunc ades ad imperandum vel ad parendum ; sic enim antiqui 
 loquebantur. * 
 
 3, The particular cases in which the gerund, and, under 222 
 the limitations above mentioned, the participle future pas- 
 sive may be used, are the following. 
 
 The genitive, or gerund in di, is used after substantives 
 and after relative adjectives (see sect. 5, 48). Such sub- 
 stantives are, among others, ars, causa, consilium, consue- 
 tudo, cupiditas,facultas, occasio, potestas, spes, studium, 
 voluntas. The ablatives causa and gratia, joined with the 
 gerund in di, are particularly to be noticed. 
 
 Beate vivendi cupiditate omnes incensi sumus. 
 
 Epaminondas studio sus erat audiendi. 
 
 Parsimonia est scientia vitandi sumptus supervacuos, aut ars 
 re familiari moderate utendi. 
 
 Laudandus est is, qui cum spe vincendi simul abjaeet certandi 
 etiam cupiditatem. 
 
 Decemviris omnes provincias obeundi, liberos populos agris 
 multandi summa potestas datur, cum velint 
 
 Consul experiendi animos militum causa parumper moratus 
 est 
 
 Note. It is to be observed, however, that the substantives 
 mentioned above, and others, may be connected with the infini- 
 
160 USE OF THE GERUND. 223. 
 
 tive, if they with esse form the predicate, and the infinitive the 
 subject, of the proposition. 
 
 Hi ad urbem imperatores erant impediti, ne triumpharent, 
 calumniapaucorum, quibus omnia honesta atque inhonesta vender e 
 mos erat. 
 
 223 4. If the verb governs the accusative case, the passive 
 construction with the participle is commonly preferred. 
 
 Quis ignorat Gallos retinere barbaram consuetudinem hominum 
 immolandorum ? 
 
 Inita sunt consilia urbis delendce, civium trucidandorum, nomi- 
 nis Romani extinguendi. 
 
 Timotheus belli gerendi fuit peritus neque minus civitatis re- 
 gendce. 
 
 Vestis frigoris depellendi causa reperta primo post adhiberi 
 ccepta est ad ornatum etiam et dignitatem. 
 
 Note 1. It is an exception, if to a gerund the genitive is joined, 
 instead of the accusative which the verb requires. This excep- 
 tion, however, has become the rule with personal pronouns, es- 
 pecially sui. 
 
 Doleo tantam Stoicos nostros Epicureis irridendi sui facultatem 
 dedisse. 
 
 Dixi ego idem in senatu caedem te optimatum contulisse in ante 
 diem V. Kalendas Novembres, turn, cum multi principes civitatis 
 Roma non tam sui conservandi quam tuorum consiliorum repri- 
 mendorum causa profugerunt. 
 
 Subito omnibus portis eruptione facta neque cognoscendi, quid 
 fieret, neque sui colligendi hostibus facultatem relinquunt. 
 
 Non vereor, ne quis hoc me vestri adhoriandi causa magifice 
 loqui existimet. 
 
 Note 2. A similar irregularity is the use of the genitive plural 
 of substantives with the genitive of the gerund. Instances of 
 this irregularity occur not only in older writers, as Plautus and 
 Terence, but also in Cicero. 
 
 Ex majore enim copia nobis quam ill i fuit exemplorum eligendi 
 potestas. 
 
 De se homines, qui extra istum ordinem sunt, quibus ne reji- 
 ciundi quidem amplius quam trium judicum praeclarae leges Cor- 
 nelias faciunt potestatem, hunc hominem tam crudelem, tam 
 sceleratum, tam nefarium nolunt judicare. 
 
 Reliquorum siderum quae causa collocandi fuerit. quaeque eorum 
 sit collocatio in alium sermonem differendum est. 
 
224. USE OF THE GERUND. 161 
 
 Note 3. As the genitive serves to express quality or property 
 (see sect. 5, 44), the genitive of the gerund is used with esse in 
 the sense of having a tendency to anything* 
 
 Regium imperium initio conservandoz libertatis fuerat. 
 
 Haec prodendi imperii Romani, tradendai Hannibali victoria 
 sunt. 
 
 Lectis rerum summis cum animadvertisset pleraque dissolven- 
 darum religionum esse, L. Petillio dixit sese eos libros in ignem 
 conjecturum esse. 
 
 Note 4. There are instances of this genitive being used with- 
 out esse, which are by some explained by the ellipsis of causa. 
 
 Placuit averruncandai deum irai victimas caedi. 
 
 Pulso Tarquinio multa populus paravit tuendce libertatis et 
 jirmanda concordia (for qua tuendae libertatis et firmandae con- 
 cordiae essent). 
 
 5. The dative of the gerund, or gerund in do, is used after 224 
 adjectives which take a dative (sect, 4, 31), especially after 
 utilis, inutilis,noxius, aptus, idoneus, par ; and after sub- 
 stantives and verbs, to express the purpose and design. In 
 the latter sense, however, at least in Cicero, the accusative 
 with ad, or ut with the subjunctive, is more common. The 
 words with which the dative of the gerund is most used 
 are studere, intentum esse, tempus impendere, or consumer e y 
 or insumere, operant dare, sufficere, satis esse, deesse, and 
 esse in the sense of serving for, being adequate to. The 
 participle future passive may be used for the gerund, as 
 explained in 221, and examples of the dative of the gerund 
 with the accusative are exceedingly rare. 
 
 Aqua nitrosa utilis est bibendo. 
 
 Brutus cum studere revocandis in urbem regions liberos suos 
 comperisset, securi eos percussit- 
 
 Illud ediscendo scribendoque commune est, utrique plurimum 
 conferre bonam valetudinem, animum cogitationibus aliis li- 
 berum. 
 
 Oppidani pro se quisque, quae diutinae obsidioni talerandoe 
 erant, ex agris convexerunt. 
 
 Note ] . Esse, with the dative of the gerund, is usually explain- 
 ed by an ellipsis of idoneus ; but it is better to consider it, without 
 an ellipsis, as analogous to the expression auxilio alicui esse. 
 
 14* 
 
162 USE OF THE GERUND. 225,226, 
 
 Tributo plebes liberata, ut divites conferrent, qui oneri ferendo 
 essent (who were able to bear the burden). 
 
 Experienda res in uno aut altero est, sitne aliquis plebefus 
 ferendo magno honori. 
 
 Quo enim tempore me augurem a toto collegio expetitum Cn. 
 Pompeius et Q. Hortensius nominaverunt, tu nee solvendo eras, 
 nee te ullo modo nisi eversa re publica fore incolumem putabas. 
 
 Note 2. The dative of the gerund, or future passive participle, 
 is particularly frequent in connexion with names of office, as 
 decemviri legibus scribendis, triumvir coloniis deducendis, tresviri, 
 ret publicce constituendce. 
 
 225 6. The accusative of the gerund, or gerund in dum, is 
 always dependent on prepositions, and most commonly on 
 ad, to, or inter, amidst, during ; sometimes on ante, circa, 
 and ob. The participle is commonly used when the 
 gerund has an accusative. 
 
 Mores puerorum se inter ludendum simplicius detegunt. 
 
 Musicen natura ipsa nobis videtur ad tolerandos facilius la- 
 bores velut muneri dedisse. 
 
 Flagitiosum est eum, a quo pecuniam ob absolvendum accepe- 
 ris, condemnare. 
 
 Equi ante domandum ingentes tollunt animos. 
 
 Non solum est oratoris docere, sed plus eloquentia circa mo- 
 vendum valet 
 
 Note. The learner must particularly notiee the use of the. 
 gerund with inter during, inter eundum, inter bibendum, <^c. fyc. 
 <•' whilst going, whilst drinking." 
 
 226 7. The ablative of the gerund is used, 1. without a 
 preposition, as an ablative of the instrument ; 2. depend- 
 ing on the prepositions ah, cum, de, ex, and in. In both 
 cases the participle is generally used, when the gerund 
 has an accusative. 
 
 Hominis mens discendo alitur et cogitando. 
 
 Super stitione tollenda non tollitur religio. 
 
 Fortitudo in laboribus periculisque subeundis ceraitur, tem- 
 perantia in prcetermittendis voluptatibus , justitia in suo cuique 
 tribuendo. 
 
227, 228. . use of the supines. 163 
 
 Aristotelem in philosophia non deterruit a scrihendo amplitudo 
 Platonis. 
 
 Multa de bene beateque vivendo a Platone disputata sunt. 
 Prudentia ex providendo est appellata. 
 Scribendi ratio conjuncta cum loquendo est. 
 
 USE OF THE SUPINES. 
 
 SECTION XVII. 
 
 1. The two supines are properly the accusative and ab- 227 
 lative, or dative, of an old verbal substantive of the fourth 
 declension. 
 
 2. The first, or supine in um, which governs the 223 
 case of the verb, is used with verbs which express mo- 
 tion to a place (ire, projicisci, contendere, pergere, fe- 
 stinare, venire, mittere, trajicere) in order to express the 
 object; e. g. cubitum ire, speculation mittere, oratum obse- 
 cratumque venire. A similar expression is nuptum dare, 
 
 to give in marriage." Yet the Latin writers generally, 
 rather than use the supine, prefer to use the gerund in the 
 accusative with ad, in the genitive with causa, the future 
 active participle, or ut with the subjunctive. 
 
 Philippus iEgis a Pausania, cum spectatum ludos iret, juxta 
 theatrum occisus est. 
 
 Themistocles Argos habitatum concessit. 
 
 Fabius pictor Delphos ad oraculum missus est sciscitatum^ 
 quibus precibus suppliciisque deos possent placare. 
 
 Nulli negare soleo, si quis esum me vocat. 
 
 Augustus filiam Juliam primum Marcello, Octavise sororis 
 suae rllio, deinde, ut is obiit, Marco Agrippae nuptum dedit. 
 
164 USE OF THE SUPINES. 229. 
 
 Divitiacus Roman ad senatum venit auxilium postulatum. 
 Hannibal invictus patriam defensum revocatus est. 
 
 Note 1. Perditum ire, u to set about destroying," does not dif- 
 fer, as to meaning, from perdere. In Cicero it does not occur, 
 unless it be in one instance (Ep. Fam. 14, 1), where the text is 
 doubtful; but from its frequent occurrence in the comic poets it 
 appears to have been much used in the language of common life. 
 
 Sint sane, quoniam ita se mores habent, liberales ex sociorum 
 fortunis, sint misericordes in furibus aerarii ; ne illis sanguinem 
 nostrum largiantur, et, dum paucis sceleratis parcunt, bonos omnis 
 perditum eant. 
 
 Note 2. According to the analogy of this expression, ire serves 
 to form a periphrasis with the supines of other verbs, as, raptum, 
 ereptum, ultum, oppugnatum. 
 
 Nam ubi se fiagitiis decoravere turpissumi viri, bonorum praemia 
 ereptum eunt. 
 
 Neque dux Romanus ultum iit, aut corpora humavit, quamquam 
 multi tribunorum praefectorumque et insignes centuriones ceci- 
 dissent. 
 
 Hoc et natura prius est, tua cum defenderis, aliena ire oppu- 
 gnatum. 
 
 229 3. The second supine, in u> has a passive signification 
 and is used after the substantives/hs, nefas, and opus, and 
 after the adjectives, good or bad, pleasant or unpleasant, 
 worthy or unworthy, easy or difficult, and others of a simi- 
 lar meaning: e.g. honesius , turpis , jucundus , facilis , in- 
 credibilis, memorabilis, utilis, dignus, and indignus. Only 
 a few supines are used by the best prose writers in this 
 way; e. g. dictu, auditu,cognitu,factu, inventu, memoratu, 
 and natu with the adjectives grandis, magnus, major, 
 maximus, minor, minimus. 
 
 Pleraque dictu quam re sunt facilior a. 
 
 Quid est tarn jucundum cognitu atque auditu, quam sapienti- 
 bus sententiis gravibusque verbis ornata oratio 1 
 
 Humanus animus cum alio nullo nisi cum ipso deo, si hoc /as 
 est dictu, comparari potest. 
 
 Videte nefas esse dictu miseram fuisse Maximi senectutem. 
 
 Ita dictu opus est, si me vis salvurn esse. 
 
 Dictu est proclive homines in beneficiis collocandis mores 
 hominum, non fortunam sequi. 
 
229. USE OF THE SUPINES. 165 
 
 Uva primo est peracerba gustatu. 
 
 Non speciosa dictu sed usu necessaria in rebus adversis 
 sequenda sunt. 
 
 Q. Maximum Cato adolescens colere coepit non admodum 
 grandem natu sed tamen jam setate provectum. 
 
 Thucydides, Theopompus et Ephorus, Xenophon, Calli- 
 sthenes se ad historiam contulerunt, et minimus natu horum 
 omnium Timaeus. 
 
 Note 1. The best writers use ad and the gerund, or the infini- 
 tive with facilis, difficilis, and jucundus. 
 
 Epicurus eo utebatur cibo, qui et suavissimus esset et idem 
 facillimus ad concoquendum. 
 
 Facile est vincere non repugnantes. 
 
 Quod facere turpe non est, modo occulte, id dicere obscamum 
 est. 
 
 Note 2. The most common construction of dignus is with qui 
 and the subjunctive, as stated above, sect. 12,160. 
 
166 USE OF PARTICLES. 230, 231. 
 
 USE OF PARTICLES. 
 
 SOME PECULIARITIES OF THE LANGUAGE. 
 
 SECTION XVIII. 
 
 230 1. Particles are those parts of speech which are neither 
 declined nor conjugated. The term includes, therefore, 
 adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections. 
 Those particles alone will be spoken of which have not 
 been mentioned in the preceding portions of the work, 
 and which, nevertheless, claim attention on account of 
 their meaning or the manner in which they are used in 
 sentences. 
 
 231 2. Nonmodonon — sedne — quidem. When the two clauses 
 connected by these particles have a common verb, placed 
 in the second clause, the non after modo is omitted. But 
 when each clause has its own verb, or one common verb, 
 placed in the first clause, non modo non remains complete. 
 Similar is the use of non solum non — sed viz. 
 
 Talis vir non modo facere, sed ne cogitare quidem quid- 
 quam audebit, quod non honestum est (such a man will not only 
 not dare to do, but not even, etc.). 
 
 Assentatio, vitiorum adjutrix, procul amoveatur, quae non 
 modo amico, sed ne libero quidem digna est. 
 
 Haec genera virtutum non solum in moribus nostris, sed vix 
 jam in libris reperiuntur. 
 
 Ego non modo tibi non irascor, sed ne reprehendo quidem fa- 
 ctum tuum. 
 
 Horum ego imperatorum non modo res gestas non antepono 
 meis sed ne fortunam quidem ipsam. 
 
 Note. The negation is usually not omitted, when it is con- 
 tained in a word like neniOj nullus, nihil, nunquam. 
 
232-235. use of particles. 167 
 
 Quod non modo Siculus nemo, sed ne Sicilia quidem tota po- 
 tuisset. 
 
 3. Modo non, tantum non, and tantum quod non, signify 232 
 almost,' all but. 
 
 Is senem per epistolas pellexit modo non montes auri pol- 
 licens. 
 
 Nuntii arTerebant tantum non jam captam Laced aemonem esse. 
 Tantum quod hominem non nominat 
 
 4. Non, in connexion with the words nemo, nullus, nihil, 233 
 nunquam, produces a different sense according as it pre- 
 cedes or follows them ; non nemo, " somebody," nemo non, 
 "everybody;" non nulli, "some," nullus nan, "every 
 one ; non nihil, " some thing," nihil non, " every thing ;" 
 non nunquam, " some times/' nunquam non, " at all 
 times ;" nusquam non" " every where." 
 
 f5. Immo never expresses affirmation, but either entire 
 or partial opposition to the opinion conveyed or implied in 
 the preceding question. 
 
 Ferendus tibi in hoc meus error ; ferendus ? immo vero etiam 
 adjuvandus. 
 
 Ubi fuit Sulla 1 num Romse 1 immo longe abfuit. 
 
 Si patriam prodere conabitur pater, silebitne films ? Immo 
 vero obsecrabit patrem ne id faciat. 
 
 6, Ac and atque do not differ in meaning. Ac is never 234 
 used before a vowel ; atque most commonly before a vowel, 
 and sometimes before a consonant too. Nee and neque 
 are indiscriminately used before vowels and consonants. 
 
 Si denique aliquid non contra ac liceret factum diceretur, sed 
 contra atque oporteret, tamen esset omnis ejusmodi reprehensio 
 a vobis, judices, repudianda. 
 
 7. Etiam and quoque differ in general, with regard to 235 
 their meaning, in this, that etiam adds something new and 
 stronger, and quoque something similar. As to their posi- 
 tion, etiam, in the majority of cases, precedes the emphatic 
 word, quoque invariably follows it. 
 
 Auctoritate tua nobis opus est et concilio et etiam gratia. 
 
168 USE OF PARTICLES. 236-238. 
 
 Atticus non solum dignitati serviebat, sed etiam tranquillitati, 
 cum suspiciones quoque vitaret crimiimm. 
 
 236 8. Aut and vel differ in this respect, that aut refers to 
 the matter, vel to the expression. 
 
 Audendum est aliquid universis, aut omnia singulis potienda. 
 Mihi placebat Pomponius maxime, vel dicam, minime dis- 
 plicebat. 
 
 237 9. The difference between aut — aut andveZ — -vel is sim- 
 ilar. Aut — aut is used when the two or more clauses 
 exclude each other entirely ; vel — vel, when they exclude 
 each other in part only. 
 
 In omnibus disjunctionibus (alternatives), inquibus aut etiam, 
 aut non (either yes or no) ponitur, alterutrum est verum. 
 
 Marius promisit, si se consulem fecissent, bre.vi tempore aut 
 vivum aid mortuum Jugurtham se in potestatem populi Romani 
 daturum. 
 
 Omne corpus aut aqua, aut aer aut ignis aut terra est aut 
 aliquid, quod est concretum ex his aut ex aliqua parte eorum. 
 
 Amicitia omnibus rebus est anteponenda ; nihil est enim tarn 
 naturae aptum ad res vel secundas vel adversas. 
 
 Quid est tarn necessarium quam tenere semper arma, quibus 
 vel tectus ipse esse possis vel provocare improbos, vel te ulcisci 
 lacessitus. 
 
 238 10. Ac or atque are used instead of quam after adverbs 
 and adjectives expressing similarity or dissimilarity : 
 &que,juzta, par, paritcr, perinde, proinde, pro eo, similis, 
 dissimilis, similiter, talis, totidem, alius, aliter, contra, 
 secus, contr arias, idem. 
 
 Dissimulatio est, cum alia dicuntur, ac sentias. 
 
 Eadem sunt membra in meis atque Antonii disputationibus, 
 sed paulo secus a me atque ab illo partita ac distributa. 
 
 Civibus victis ut parceretur, deque ac pro mea salute laboravi. 
 
 Vides omnia fere contra, ac dicta sint, evenisse. 
 
 Posteaquam mihi, renunciatum est de obitu Tullia?, filiae tuae, 
 sane quam pro eo, ac debui, graviter molesteque tuli ! 
 
239, 240. USE OF PARTICLES. 169 
 
 Ipse in Allobrogibus constiti, ut proinde ad omnia paratus 
 essem, ac res moneret. 
 
 Note 1. It is not common to use quam after these expressions, 
 except when alius is connected with a negation. 
 
 Virtus nihil aliud est quam in se perfecta et ad summum per- 
 ducta natura. 
 
 Note 2. The use of ac and atque after comparatives for quam 
 belongs to poets and later prose writers. 
 
 11. Nisi and si non differ in this that the former intro- 239 
 duces an exception, signifying f< unless," " except if," and 
 the latter a negative case, " if not." In nisi the negation 
 belongs to the conjunction, in si non to the verb or some 
 other part of the sentence. There are, therefore, in- 
 stances in which it is a matter of indifference which is 
 used ; but there are others where the distinction is ma- 
 terial. 
 
 Fuit apertum, si Conon non fuisset, Agesilaum Asiam Tauro 
 tenus regi fuisse erepturum (might be nisi Conon fuisset). 
 
 Agesilaus, cum Epaminondas Spartam oppugnaret, talem se 
 imperatorem praebuit, uteo tempore omnibus apparuerit, nisi ille 
 fuisset, Spartam futuram non fuisse. 
 
 Quid autem obstat, quo minus sit beatus, si non sit bipes. 
 
 Note 1. Nisi and ni have the same meaning. 
 
 Note 2. If the conditional clause is elliptic, si non alone is 
 used. 
 
 Quo mihi fortunam, si non conceditur uti (ea being under- 
 stood). 
 
 Note 3. When after an affirmative clause, a negative con- 
 ditional clause without a verb of its own is subjoined, si (or sin) 
 minus, " but if not," is used. 
 
 Educ tecum etiam omnes tuos ; si minus, quam plurimos. 
 Omnis cura mea solet in hoc versari, semper, si possim, ut boni 
 aliquid efficiam ; sin id minus, ut certe ne quid mali. 
 
 12. Itaque differs from igitur and ergo in this that it 240 
 expresses a consequence as a matter of fact; while igitur 
 and ergo designate an inference, the result of reasoning, 
 as a matter of thought. 
 15 
 
170 USE OF PARTICLES. 241, 242. 
 
 In Phocione tantum fuit odium multitudinis, ut nemo ausus sit 
 eum liber sepelire. ltaque a servis sepultus est. 
 
 Quis unquam Graecorum rhetorum a Thucydide quidquam 
 duxit? At laudatus est ab omnibus. Fatcor, sed ita, ut rerum 
 explicator prudens severus gravis ; non ut in judiciis versaret 
 causas, sed ut in historiis bella narraret. ltaque nunquam est 
 numeratus orator. 
 
 Tullus Hostilius non solum proximo regi dissimilis, sed 
 ferocior etiam Romulo fuit ; turn setas viresque turn avita quoque 
 gloria animum stimulabat. Senescere igitur civitatem otio ratus 
 undique materiam excitandi belli quaerebat. 
 
 E Lacedsemoniis unus, cum Perses hostis in colloquio dixisset 
 glorians, solem prae jaculorum multitudine et sagittarum non 
 videbitis ; in umbra igitur, inquit, pugnabimus. 
 
 Omne animal appetit qusedam et fugit a quibusdam ; quod 
 autem refugit, id contra naturam est, et quod est contra na- 
 turam, id habet vim interimendi : omne ergo animal intereat 
 necesse est. 
 
 Note. With regard to the position of itaque, igitur, and ergo 
 it is to be observed, that itaque, with very few exceptions, stands 
 first in the clause ; ergo both in the beginning and after one word ; 
 igitur sometimes first, most commonly after one, sometimes after 
 two or even three words. 
 
 241 13. Num, and also numne, numnam, numquid, num- 
 quidnam, and ec in composition, are used in direct questions 
 of a negative import, that is, questions to which a negative 
 answer is expected. 
 
 Qui sunt inistis bonis? Duo Roscii. Num quisnamprseterea? 
 Nemo est. 
 
 Numquid, quod tibi audire utile est, id mihi dicere necesse 
 est? 
 
 Ecquis me hodie vivit fortunatior. 
 
 Note. It should not be overlooked that this negative force 
 belongs to these interrogatives in direct, not in indirect, questions. 
 
 242 14. Most conjunctions occupy the first place in the 
 clause ; this is the case with et, ac, at, atque, atqui, neque, 
 nee, out, vel, sive, sin, sed, nam, verum, and the relative 
 conjunctions quare, quocirca, quamobrem. A few are 
 
243-246. use of particles. 171 
 
 placed after the first, sometimes after the second, word of 
 the clause : enim, autem, vero. 
 
 15. If the course of a proposition has been interrupted 243 
 by an intermediate clause or a parenthesis, the continuance 
 
 of the proposition is indicated by igitur, itaque, verum, 
 verumtamen, sed, sed tamen, nam. 
 
 Cato sententiam dixit, hujus nostri Catonis pater (ut enim 
 ceteri ex patribus, sic hie, qui illud lumen progenuit, ex filio est 
 nominandus); is igitur judex ita pronunciavit emptori damnum 
 prsestari oportere. 
 
 Primum cum Caesar ostendisset se, priusquam proficisceretur, 
 Dolabellam consulem esse jussurum (quern negant regem, qui 
 et faceret semper ejusmodi aliquid et diceret); sec? cum Caesar 
 ita dixisset, turn hie bonus augur eo se sacerdotio praeditum esse 
 dixit. 
 
 16. Two substantives are sometimes united by et, que, 244 
 or atque, one of which, in fact, stands to the other in the 
 relation of a genitive or adjective. Such a union is called 
 
 %r dta dvotv, that is, one conception expressed by two inde- 
 pendent words, the subtantive which stands for the genitive 
 or adjective forming with the other one conception. In- 
 stances of this kind, though most common in poetry, occur 
 also in prose. 
 
 Saepe homines aegri morbo gravi, cum cestu febrique (for cestu 
 febris) jactantur, si aquam biberint, primo relevari videntur. 
 
 Atque hoc adeo mihi concedendum est magis, quod ex his 
 studiishaec quoque crescit oratio et facultas (for orationis facultas 
 or facultas dicendi), quae, quantacunque est in me, nunquam 
 amicorum periculis defuit. 
 
 17. After proper names of persons the genitive of the 245 
 father's name is sometimes put without jilius or filia. 
 Still more common in Latin is the omission of uxor after 
 the husband's name ; as Faustus Sullce (sc. jilius), Ccecilia 
 Mctelli (sc.Jilia), Terentia Ciceronis fsc. uxor). 
 
 18. Similar is the omission of cedes or templum after the 246 
 name of a deity. 
 
 Habitabat rex ad Iovis Statoris (sc. templum). 
 
172 USE OF PARTICLES. 247, 248. 
 
 Valerius mihi scripsit, quemadmodum a Vesta (sc. templo) ad 
 tabulam Valeriam ducta esses. 
 
 Pecunia utinam ad Opis fsc. cedent) maneret. 
 
 247 19. Other ellipses of the kind are tempus, in connexion 
 with ex quo, ex eo, ex illo, brevi ; pars, with tertia, decuma, 
 etc. ; partes with prima, secundce (" first, second part," 
 properly a theatrical expression) ; febris with tertiana, 
 quartana; aqua with frigida and calida (or calda); caro 
 with feritia, agnina, bubula, canina, porcina; mare with 
 altum; castra with hiberna, cestiva; pradium with the 
 adjective of the name of the neighboring town, as Tu~ 
 sculanum. 
 
 248 20. Quid quod, so frequent in Latin Writers, is an 
 elliptic expression for quid dicam de eo, quod, indicating 
 the transition to a new point. 
 
 Quid quod salus sociorum summum in periculum vocatur. 
 
FIRST APPENDIX. 
 
 Of the Division of Syllables. 
 
 The following rules concerning dividing syllables, es- 
 tablished by the ancient grammarians, are still observed 
 by the scholars of most nations. 
 
 1. A consonant which stands between two vowels e- 
 longs to the latter ; ma-ter, li-ber, ge-ner. 
 
 2. Those consonants, which, in Greek or Latin, may 
 together begin a word, belong together in the division of 
 syllables ; e. g. pa-tris, because we have the word tres. 
 So li-bri (brevis), co-cles (claudo), a-cris (crinis), a-gri 
 (gratusj, i-gnis (gnavus), o-mnis, da-mnum (uvuouai), 
 a-ctus, pun-ctus (xvljpa), ra-ptus, scri-ptus, pre-pter 
 (PtolemcBus), Ca-dmus (Svtjoig), re-gnum (yvwvj]), va-fre 
 (fretus), da-plex (plus), a-pricus (pratum), a-thleta (tfAi'/Sw), 
 i-pse, scri-psi (\pavw), Lesbos (ofitvvvui), e-sca, po-sco 
 (scando), a-sper, ho-spes (spes), te-squa (squalor), pastor, 
 fau-stus, i-ste (on account of stare). 
 
 3. Consonants, which cannot begin a word, cannot re- 
 main together in dividing syllables; as ar-tus, sal-tus, 
 men-sa. 
 
 4. Double consonants are divided; as an~nus> col-lum, 
 mit-to.. 
 
 5. In compounded words, the division must take place, 
 so as to keep the elementary parts distinct ; inter-eram not 
 inte-reram ; because the word is compounded of inter and 
 eram. So ab-utor, ab-rado y abs-condo, dis-quiro, et-iam, 
 ob-latum, di-stringo, cx-silium, ex-undo , trans-tuli, tran- 
 
 15* 
 
174 FIRST APPENDIX. 
 
 scendo, alter-uter, et-enim, juris-consultus, and red-eo, 
 red-undo, prod-eo, sed-itio, because the d, inserted to avoid 
 the hiatus, belongs to the first vowel. 
 
 6. But if the composition is doubtful, or wholly uncer- 
 tain, or if the first word, to avoid a hiatus with the 
 second has lost its termination, the syllables are then 
 divided, as though no composition had taken place; as, 
 po-tes from pote or potis and es, ani~madvcrto, not anim- 
 advertOy ve-neo from venum eo % ma*gnanimus t am-bages, 
 lon-gavus, a-dulor, aflutter, abdomen, 
 
 
SECOND APPENDIX, 
 
 Of the Roman Calendar. 
 
 1. According to the Julian year, February in ordinary 
 years had 28 days ; the four months, April, June, Septem- 
 ber, November, 30 days; the rest 31. But the Roman 
 mode of reckoning the days of the month was very 
 different from ours. 
 
 2. The days of the month are reckoned not from 1 to 
 28, 30 or 31, and so denominated, but are calculated 
 backwards from three fixed days in each month. These 
 three days are the first, fifth and thirteenth ; they are 
 called by the Roman names of the Kalendce, Nonce, and 
 Idus of each month. The names of the months are ad- 
 jectives, and are therefore joined in the feminine gender 
 to these three feminines. 
 
 3. But the Roman manner of counting from a given 
 point includes that point. Thus, the third day before the 
 nones, i. e. before the fifth, is not the second, as we should 
 say on subtracting the numbers, but the third. Hence 
 the practical rule : in reckoning the day of the month add 
 one to the number from which the subtraction is made. 
 But if the point, from which the reckoning backwards is 
 to be made, is the first of the following month, it is not 
 enough to bring into the computation the number of days 
 of the current month, but the calends also must be re* 
 garded in the subtraction ; that is, the number of days of 
 the current month must be increased by two for the 
 minuend. Thus dies tcrtius ante Kah Julias, as June has 
 
176 SECOND APPENDIX. 
 
 30 days, is the 29th of June. Upon this rests the whole 
 apparent difficulty of the Roman computation of time. 
 
 4. One peculiarity, a remnant of the early arrangement 
 ascribed to Numa, has to be considered. In the four 
 months, March, May, July, and October the Nones fall on 
 the seventh, the Ides' on the fifteenth day of the month, 
 instead of the fifth and thirteenth, 
 
 5. As to the grammatical form of the dates it is to be 
 remarked : The ablative is the case for time when ? and 
 therefore the form should be, e. g. die tertio ante Kalendas 
 Mar lias. But die and ante are omitted, and the shorter 
 form is tertio Kalendas. or with figures, ///. Kal. But in 
 Cicero and Livy another form is exclusively, or at least 
 very much oftener, used, viz. ante diem tertium Kalendas, 
 or Nonas, Idus. (Contracted a. d. III. Kal.) Pridie and 
 Postridie, the day before and the day after, are joined 
 with the same accusatives. It is not easy to explain the 
 origin of this usage. It may be that ante being trans- 
 posed, the ablative following it was changed into the 
 accusative, as if governed by ante, while the accusative, 
 really governed by ante (Kalendas), remained. 
 
 6. This expression ante diem is to be considered as an 
 indeclinable substantive, prepositions, governing the accu- 
 sative or ablative, being sometimes connected with it. 
 
 Dixi ego idem in senatu caedem te optimatum contulisse in 
 ante diem V. Kal. Novembris. 
 
 Supplicatio indicta est ex ante diem V. Idus Octobres cum eo 
 die in quinque dies. 
 
 Pridie and postridie are in the same manner connected 
 with those accusatives. 
 
 Nos Formiano esse volumus usque ad pridie Nonas Majas. 
 
 8. July and August were, in the times of the republic, 
 called Quintilis and Seztilis, afterwards Julius and Augu- 
 stus, in honor of the first two Caesars. 
 
SECOND APPENDIX. 
 
 177 
 
 ae days 
 f our 
 
 March, May, 
 
 January, August, 
 
 April, June, Sep- 
 
 February has 28, 
 
 July, and October 
 
 and December 
 
 tember, and ISovem- 
 
 and in Leap Years 
 
 '.onths. 
 
 have 31 days. 
 
 have also 31 days. 
 
 ber have 30 davs. 
 
 29 days. 
 
 1 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 Kalendis. 
 
 2 
 
 vn 
 
 IV >ante 
 III 5 Nonas. 
 
 IV } ante 
 
 IV }ante 
 III 5 Nonas. 
 
 3 
 
 V | ante 
 
 III 5 Nonas. 
 
 4 
 
 IV VNonas. 
 IIIJ 
 
 Pridie Nonas. 
 
 Pridie Nonas 
 
 Pridie Nonas. ■ 
 
 5 
 
 Nonis. 
 
 Nonis. 
 
 Nonis. 
 
 6 
 
 Pridie Nonas. 
 
 VIII ^ 
 
 VIII i 
 
 
 VIII 1 
 
 
 7 
 
 Nonis. 
 
 VII | 
 
 VII 
 
 
 VII 
 
 
 8 
 
 viir 
 
 
 VI 'ante 
 V fldus. 
 
 VI 
 
 ante 
 
 VI 
 
 ante 
 
 9 
 
 VII 
 
 
 V fldus. 
 
 V 
 
 'idus. 
 
 10 
 
 VI 
 
 ante 
 
 IV 
 
 IV | 
 
 IV 
 
 
 11 
 
 V 
 
 ''Idus. 
 
 III J 
 
 III J 
 
 III J 
 
 
 12 
 
 IV 
 
 
 Pridie Idus. 
 
 Pridie Idus. 
 
 Pridie Idus. 
 
 13 
 
 in 
 
 
 Idibus. 
 
 Idibus. 
 
 Idibus. 
 
 14 
 
 Pridie Idus. 
 
 XIX 
 
 
 XVIII ^ 
 
 
 XVI •} 
 
 
 15 
 
 Idibus. 
 
 XVIII 
 
 p 
 
 XVII 
 
 3 
 
 XV 
 
 p 
 
 16 
 
 XVII ^ 
 
 05 
 • 3 
 
 XVII 
 
 Cb 
 
 XVI 
 
 a 
 
 XIV 
 
 3 
 
 17 
 
 XVI 
 
 CD 
 
 XVI 
 
 
 XV 
 
 W 
 
 XIII 
 
 
 18 
 
 XV 
 
 « 
 
 XV 
 
 EL 
 
 XIV 
 
 cT 
 
 XII 
 
 19 
 
 XIV 
 
 F& 
 
 XIV 
 
 CD* 
 
 3 
 
 XIII 
 
 3 
 P-. 
 
 XI 
 
 ctT 
 
 20 
 
 XIII 
 
 CD* 
 
 3 
 
 XIII 
 
 ja- 
 ps 
 
 XII 
 
 P 
 
 03 
 
 X 
 
 to. 
 
 21 
 
 XII 
 
 p- 
 
 p 
 
 XII 
 
 VI 
 
 XI 
 
 o 
 
 IX 
 
 * « 
 
 22 
 
 XI 
 
 w 
 
 XI 
 
 >■% 
 
 X 
 
 if ^ 
 
 VIII 
 
 K 
 
 23 
 
 X 
 
 > % 
 
 X 
 
 B 1 
 
 IX 
 
 ST 
 
 VII 
 
 P 
 
 -t 
 
 24 
 
 IX 
 
 
 IX 
 
 VIII 
 
 
 VI 
 
 P* 
 
 25 
 
 VIII 
 
 ED 
 
 VIII 
 
 ^ 
 
 VII 
 
 r- 
 
 V 
 
 Y* 
 
 26 
 
 VII 
 
 £ 
 
 VII 
 
 ■"■ 
 
 VI 
 
 3 
 
 IV 
 
 
 27 
 
 VI 
 
 3 
 c 
 
 VI 
 
 3 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 III J 
 
 
 28 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 IV 
 
 sr 
 
 Prid. Kalendas 
 
 29 
 
 IV 
 
 3 
 
 IV 
 
 5* 
 
 III 
 
 ° 
 
 Martias. 
 
 30 
 
 III 
 
 3- " 
 
 III 
 
 
 Prid. Kalendas 
 
 
 31 
 
 Prid. Kalendas. 
 
 Prid. Kalendas 
 
 of the fol. 
 
 
 
 of the fol. 
 
 of the fol. 
 
 month. 
 
 
 
 month. 
 
 month. 
 
 
 
178 SECOND APPENDIX. 
 
 Perusia capta trecenti ex dediticiis electi ad aram divo 'Julio 
 extructam Idibus Martiis hostiarum more mactati sunt. 
 
 Natus est Augustus IX Kalendas Octobres. 
 
 Consul comitia in ante diem tertiurn Nonas Seoctiles, Latinas 
 in ante diem teritum Idus Sextiles indixit. 
 
 Memoria tenent me ante diem XIII Kalendas Januarias prin- 
 cipem revocandse libertatis fuisse ; me ex Kalendis Januariis ad 
 hanc horam invigilasse rei publicae. 
 
 Caligula natus est pridie Kalendas Septembres. 
 
 Vitellius natus est VII Kalendas Octobres vel, ut quidam, 
 VII Idus Soptembres. 
 
 Titus excessit Idibus Septembribus. 
 
 Idibus Martiis Romae consulatus inibatur. 
 
 Pridie Nonas Januarias media hiems. 
 
INDEX 
 
 Abbreviations used in the Index. 
 
 Abl. ablative ; abs. absolute ; ace. accusative ; ace. w. inf. accusative 
 with infinitive ; adj. adjective ; adv. adverb; aft. after; agr. agreeing; 
 eomp. comparative ; conj. conjunction; dat. dative ; fut. future; gen. 
 genitive ; ger. gerund ; imper. imperative ; ind. indicative ; intrans. 
 intransitive; nom. nominative; part, participle ; pass, passive; perf. 
 perfect; prep, preposition; pres. present; pron. pronoun; subj. sub- 
 junctive; subst. substantive; sup. supine; v. verb; to. with. 
 
 A w. abl., 76. 
 
 ",V. compounded w., 16, 36. 
 Ab w. abl., 76. 
 
 " " names of towns, 24, n. 1. 
 « " gerund, 226. 
 Abalienare w. prep., 66. 
 Abhinc, 71. 
 
 Abhorrere vv. prep., 66. 
 Abire w. abl., 66. 
 Ablative case, 56-76. 
 <•' absolute, 211. 
 " " expressing instru- 
 
 ment, cause, manner, 213. 
 " absolute in explanat. orad- 
 
 versat. clauses, 212. 
 " absolute of adj. alone, 215, 
 n. 1. 
 << absolute of fut. act. and 
 
 pass, part., 212, n. 
 
 <; absolute of part, alone, 
 
 216, n. 
 
 *« u " subst. alone, 
 
 215. n. 2. 
 
 Ablative absolute w. adj. for part., 
 
 215. 
 
 " " " subst. for part., 
 
 214. 
 
 " aft. adj., 58. 
 
 " " comp., 74. 
 
 " " digitus, etc., 65. 
 
 " " pass, v., 57. 
 
 " « prep., 76. 
 
 " " utor, etc., 64. 
 
 " " v. of abounding, etc., 
 62. 
 
 " " v. of buying, etc., 60. 
 
 " a v. of removing, etc., 66. 
 
 u consequential, 211. 
 
 " of agency, 57. 
 
 " " cause, 58. 
 
 " a circumstance, 61. 
 
 " " degree of superiority, 
 75. 
 
 " " gerund, 226. 
 
 u " instrument, 59. 
 
 " " manner, 68. 
 
180 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Ablative of quality, 67. 
 « w. a, 57. 
 " " cum, 68, n.2. 
 Mounding, v. of, 62. 
 •#&? w. abl., 76. 
 Absistere w. abl., 36. 
 Absolvere w. gen., 53. 
 Absque w. abl., 76. 
 Absterrere w. abl., 66. 
 Abstinere w. abl., 36, 66. 
 Abundare w. abl., 62. 
 Abunde w. gen., 45. 
 •#to£ w. abl., 64. 
 ^c, 234,242. 
 
 " for ?imm, 238. 
 Accedere w. dat., 35. 
 Accedit w. ^od, 203. 
 
 " w. ut, 200. 
 Accidere w. w£, 200. 
 Accipere w. fut. pass, part., 217, n. 4'. 
 Accomplishing , v. of, w w£., 197. 
 Accusative case, 15-27. 
 
 " for gen., 44, n. 3. 
 
 li gov. by neut. v., 16, n. 4. 
 
 " " " prep., 26. 
 
 ", Greek, 27, 61, n. 2. 
 
 " of neut. pron. gov. by intrans. 
 v., 16, n. 5. 
 
 " of predicate in indefinite ex- 
 pressions, 193. 
 
 " two, in ace. w. inf., 189, n. 4. 
 
 " w. inf., 184-193. 
 
 " " " aft. nouns and adj., 
 
 191. 
 
 " u " apparently after v. of 
 asking, commanding, etc., 199. 
 
 " w. inf., being the obj., 186. 
 
 « " " . H " subj., 185, 
 
 a u a j n apposition, 192. 
 
 " ft c< in exclamations, 195. 
 
 « « " in indef. express., 193. 
 
 li w. interj., 25. 
 Accusare w. gen., 53. 
 Accusing, v. of, 53. 
 Accustomed, to be, nom. w. inf., 
 
 194. 
 Acquiescerew. dat., 35. 
 Acquitting, v. of, 53. 
 Ac si w. subj., 163. 
 Action, time and state of, 108. 
 Ad aft. adj., 31. 
 
 " bestias, 53, n. 4. 
 
 Ad metalla, 53, n. 4. 
 " pmnam, 53, n. 4. 
 a -v., compounded w., 16, 33. 
 u w. ger., 225. 
 Adderew. dat. and ace, 34. 
 
 " " quod, 203. 
 Adeptus in a pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Adesse w. dat., 35. 
 Adhairere w. dat., 35. 
 Adhibere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 
 " w. prep., 35, n. 3. 
 Adhortari w. w£, 198. 
 Adhuc, 86. 
 Adire, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 " w. ace, 37. 
 Adjectives, 78-88. 
 
 li agr. w. subst., 7. 
 " as abl. abs.,215. 
 " for adv., 83. 
 " for subst., 81. 
 " in the sing, or pi., 4, n. 3. 
 " «' neuter, 6, n. 5. 
 
 " pron. agr. w. subst., 7. 
 " pron. for subst. 81. 
 " several, w. conj., 80. 
 " several, without conj., 
 79. 
 " two, compared, 84. 
 « w. ad, 31, n. 1. 
 " w. dat., 31. 
 tl w. in, erga, adversus, 
 31, note 1. 
 Adjicere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Adjungere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Adjutor in abl. abs., 214. 
 Adjutrix in abl. abs., 214. 
 Adjuvare w. ace , 32, n. 2. 
 Adminiculari w. dat., 32. 
 Admirari w. ^od, 204. 
 Admonere w. gen., 50. 
 
 " w. subj. alone, 202. 
 
 " w. ut and ace w. inf., 
 
 198, n. 1. 
 Admonishing , v. of, w. ut, 189. 
 Admovere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Adolescens, 69, n. 7. 
 Adoriri, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 a w. ace, 37. 
 Ad sp erg ere, 38. 
 Adspirare w. dat., 35. 
 Adulari w. dat., 82. 
 Advenire w. in and ace, 76, n. 1. 
 
 
INDEX. 
 
 181 
 
 Adveniare w. in and ace, 76, n. 1. 
 Adventu, 69, n. 6. 
 Adversariw. dat., 32. 
 Adversus aft. adj., 31, n. 1. 
 Advising, v. of, w. ut, 198. 
 
 " v. of, w. subj. alone, 202. 
 
 JEdes omitt., 246. 
 JEger w. abl., 57. 
 
 " w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 JEgre reperitur w. ^miw, 145. 
 JEmulari w. dat., 32. 
 JEqualis, 31, n. 5. 
 JEque w. ac or at que, 233. 
 JEqui boni. 52, n 3, 
 JEquius esse in ind , 131. 
 JEquo aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 JEquum esse in ind., 131. 
 JEquum est w. ace. w. inf., 185. 
 
 « " " w£, 200, n. 4. 
 
 JEstimo^re w. gen., 52. 
 Affatim w. gen., 45. 
 Afferre w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Afficere w. abl., 62. 
 Affigere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Affinis w. dat., 31, n. 3. 
 
 " « gen., 48. 
 Affluere w. abl., 62. 
 Agere id, hoc, Mud w. ut, 197. 
 
 " w. gen., 52. 
 Aggredi, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 u w. ace, 37. 
 
 Agnoscere w. two ace, 21. 
 Ah, 25. 
 
 Aiming, v. of, w. ut, 197. 
 Alienare w. prep., 66. 
 Alienus w. «6, 65, n. 1. 
 
 " " abl., 65. 
 Aliquis, 105, 106. 
 Aliquo w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Aliter w. «c or atque, 238. 
 .tf/iws, 107. 
 Alius-alium w. v. in plur.. 6, n. 4, 
 
 " w. abl., 74, n. 5. 
 
 " " ac or atywe, 238, 
 Alligare w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Alludere w. dat., 35. 
 Alluere w. ace, 37. 
 .#Z£er, 107, n, 
 Alter -alter urn w. v. in plur., 6, n. 4. 
 
 '* different from alius, 45, n. 5. 
 Amans w. gen., 49, 
 Ambiguus w. gen., 48, n. 1, 
 Amicus, 31, n. 2. 
 16 
 
 Amoxere w. abl., 66. 
 Amplius without quam, 74, n. 6. 
 .#«, in double questions, 152, n. 2. 
 " " a direct question, 152, n. 4, a. 
 " minus in double questions, 152, 
 
 n. 3. 
 " non in double questions, 152, 
 
 n. 3. 
 " signifying whether not, 152, 
 n.4, 6. 
 Ancillari w. dat , 32. 
 Angi w. ^wod, 204. 
 Animadvertere w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 j Annuer e w. dat., 35. 
 
 ^n^e, 26, 70. 
 | ", v. compounded w., 16, 33. 
 i " for gen. partitiv., 45, n. 4. 
 " w. ger., 212. 
 Antecedere w. dat. or ace, 36. 
 Antecellere w. dat., 35. 
 Anteire, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 *' w. dat. or ace, 36. 
 
 Antequa.m, 166. 
 Antevenire, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 " w. dat. or ace, 36. 
 
 Anxius w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Apertum estw. ace w. inf., 185. 
 Apparere w. ace w. inf., 185. 
 
 " " two nom., 13. 
 Appellare w. two. ace, 21. 
 Appellari w. two nom., 13. 
 Appetens w. gen., 49. 
 Applicare w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Apponere w. two dat., 42. 
 Apposition, 8. 
 Appropinquare w. dat., 32. 
 Aptus, qui w. subj., 160. 
 " w. ad, 31,n.l. 
 << " ger. in do, 224. 
 Aqua omitt., 247. 
 Arhitrari in subj., 151, n. 2, 
 
 " w. two ace, 21, 
 Arcere w. abl., 66. 
 
 t6 " quominus, 146. 
 Arcessere w. gen., 53. 
 Arguere w. gen., 53. 
 Arrepere w. dat., 35. 
 Arridere w. dat., 32. 
 Ars w. ger. in di, 222, 
 Asking, v. of, w. subj. alone, 200. 
 Assentari w. dat., 32. 
 Assentiri w. dat., 32. 
 Assidere w. dat., 35. 
 Assimilis, 31, n. 6. 
 
182 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Assis, 52, n. 1. 
 
 Assuefacere w. dat. or abl., 35, 5. 
 Assuescere^ w. dat. or abl. , 35, 5. 
 Atque, 234, 242. 
 
 " for quam, 238. 
 Atqui, 242. 
 
 Atrox w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Auctor in abl. abs. , 214. 
 Audientem esse w. dat., 32. 
 Audirebene, 57, n. 
 
 " male, 57, n. 
 
 " w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Audiri used personally, 14, n. 5. 
 Audito as abl. abs. , 216. 
 Auditu, 229. 
 Aug ere W. abl. , 62. 
 Auscultare w. dat., 32. 
 Ausus in act. sense, 207, n.3. 
 Autem w. ace. w. inf., 189. 
 Aut, 236. 
 
 « -aw£, 237, 242. 
 Auxiliari w. dat., 32. 
 Avarus w. gen., 48. 
 Aversus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Avidus w. gen., 48. 
 
 Being full, adj. of, w. gen., 48. 
 
 Begging, v. of, w. wi, 198. 
 
 £eZfo, 69, n. 5. 
 
 Bellum,24,n. 8. 
 
 jBerae, 52, n. 5. 
 
 Benedicere w. dat., 32, n. 4. 
 
 Benignus, w. gen., 48, n. 1. 
 
 Blandiri w. dat., 32. 
 
 J5oni, 52, n. 3. 
 
 Buying, v. of, 52, 60, n. 4. 
 
 Caecus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Calling, v. of, agr. w. subst. ofsubj. 
 or predic, 6, n. 6. 
 " v, of, agr. w. pron , 9, n. 2. 
 Can, v. of, w. nora. w. inf., 194. 
 Capax w. gen., 48. 
 Capi w. two noii),, 13. 
 Capite, 53, n. 4. 
 Capitis, 53, n. 4. 
 Captus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Care, 52, n.5. 
 Car ere w. abl., 62. 
 Caro omitt., 247. 
 Castra omitt., 247. 
 Causa, 58, n. 1, 4. 
 
 " w. ger. in di, 222. 
 
 " " poss. pron., 42, n. 2. 
 
 Cave w. ne for imperat., 178. 
 
 Caver e, 32, n.9,143, n.l. 
 
 Cedere w. abl., 66. 
 " w. dat., 32, n. 7. 
 
 Celare w. two ace, 19. 
 
 Celari w. rfe, 19, n. 1. 
 
 Censer e w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 Censeri w. two nom., 13. 
 
 Certus w. gen., 48, n. I. 
 
 Cetera, 61, n. 2. 
 
 Ceterus, 78. 
 
 Choosing, v. of, 21. 
 
 CzYca, w. ger., 225. 
 
 Circum, v. compounded w., 16, 36. 
 
 Circumdare, 38. 
 
 Circumfiuere w. abl., 62. 
 
 Circumf under e, 38. 
 
 Circumire w. ace, 36. 
 
 Circumjicere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 
 Circumsidere transit., 16, n. 1. 
 " w. ace, 36. 
 
 Circumsistere w. ace, 36. 
 
 Circumstare w. ace, 36. 
 
 Circumvenire w. ace, 36. 
 
 Citare w. gen., 53. 
 
 Citing before court, v. of, 53. 
 
 Clam w. abl., 76. 
 
 Coarguere w. gen., 53. 
 
 Coznare w. gen., 52, n. 6. 
 
 Ccenatusm an act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 
 Cogitare w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 Cognito as abl. abs., 216. 
 
 Cognitu, 229. 
 
 Cognitum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 
 Cognomine, 61, n. 1. 
 
 Cognoscere w. ace w.inf., 186. 
 
 Cohmrere w. dat., 35. 
 Cohortari w. w£, 198. 
 Coire, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 Colens w. gen., 49. 
 Collective nouns w. v. in sing., 6, 
 
 n.3. 
 Collocare w. in, and abl., 76, n. 1. 
 Colludcre w. dat., 35. 
 Comes as abl. abs., 214. 
 Comitatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Comitiis, 69, n . 6. 
 Commanding, v. of, w. m^, 198. 
 Commentatus in pass, sense, 207, 
 
 n. 2. 
 Comminari w. dat., 32. 
 Commiserari w. gen., 51, n. 1. 
 Commoncfacere w. gen., 50. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 183 
 
 Commoner e vv. gen., 50. 
 
 " " ut, 198. 
 
 " < ; subj. alone, 202. 
 
 Communicare vv. prep., 35, n. 3. 
 Communis, 31, n.4. 
 Commutare, 60, n, 2. 
 Comparare vv. dat. and ace, 34. 
 
 " " prep., 35, n. 3. 
 
 Comparative, somewhat, too, 85, n. 
 Comparison omitted, second mem- 
 ber of, 65. 
 Comperto as abl. abs., 216. 
 Compertus vv. gen., 53, n. 1. 
 Complere w. abl , 62. 
 Complexus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Componere vv. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Compos vv. gen., 48. 
 Comprehensum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 Con, v. compounded vv., 33. 
 Concealing, v. of, with two ace, 19. 
 Condecet, w. ace, 18. 
 Condemnare vv. gen., 53. 
 Condemning, v. of, 53. 
 Conducere w. gen., 52. 
 
 " " part. fut. pass., 217, 
 
 n.4. 
 Conducit w. dat., 32. 
 Conferre w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 
 " " prep., 35, n. 3. 
 Confessus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Confidens w. animi, 48, n. 3. I 
 
 Confidere w. abl., 64, n. 5, 32, n. 6. 
 
 " " dat., 32. 
 Conjirmare vv. ace vv. inf., 186. 
 Conjisus in act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 Confringere, 33, n. 
 Confugere, 33, n. 
 Confusus vv. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Congruere vv. dat., 35. 
 Conjugatio periphrastica, 115. 
 Conjunctus, 68, n. 3. 
 Conjungere vv. dat. and ace , 34. 
 
 " " prep., 35, n. 3. 
 
 Conscius w. gen., 48, n. 5. 
 Consecutio temporum, 124-128. 
 Consentaneum esse in ind., 131. 
 
 " est w. ace vv. inf., 185. 
 
 Consentire vv. dat., 35. 
 
 Consider e vv. in and abl., 76, n. 1. 
 
 Considering, v. of, agr. vv. subst. of 
 
 subj. or pred., 6, n. 6. 
 
 u , v. of, agr. vv. pron., 9, n. 2. 
 Consilium capere vv. ut, 197. 
 
 Consilium capere vv.ger. in di, 222. 
 Consimilis, 31, n. 6. 
 Consonare vv. dat., 35. 
 Consors vv. gen., 48. 
 Constare vv. gen., 52. 
 Constat w. ace vv. inf., 185. 
 Constipare vv. abl., 62. 
 Constituere w. m and abl., 76, n. 1. 
 
 " " w£, 182, n.2. 
 
 Constitutum habeo, 207, n.4. 
 Consuescere vv. dat. or abl., 35, 5. 
 Consuetudo vv. ger. in di, 222. 
 Consul in abl. abs., 214. 
 Consulere, 32, n. 9. 
 
 " vv. two ace, 20. 
 Contendere w. sup., 228. 
 
 " " ut, 197. 
 
 Contentus w. abl., 65. 
 
 " sum w. perf. inf., 179, n. 3. 
 Conterminus vv. dat., 31, n. 3. 
 Contestatus in pass, sense, 207, 
 
 n.2. 
 Contingere w. ut, 200. 
 Contingit w. dat. w. inf., 185, n. 3. 
 Contra w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Contrarius, 31, n.4. 
 
 " vv. ac or atque, 238. 
 
 Convenire, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 " w. ace, 37. 
 
 " in ind., 131. 
 
 Convenit w. dat., 32, n. 8. 
 Conviciari w. dat., 32. 
 Convicting, v. of, 53. 
 Convincere vv. gen., 53. 
 Coram vv. abl., 76. 
 Corrumpere, 33, n. 
 Creare, vv. two ace, 21. 
 Creari w. two nom., 13. 
 Creating, v. of, 21. 
 Credere w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " dat., 32. 
 
 Credi w. two nom., 13. 
 Cum, 163-173. 
 
 " causale, 168, 169. 
 
 11 in narration, 170. 
 
 14 primum w. perf., 121. 
 
 " temporale, 170, 171, 172, 173. 
 
 u , v. compounded vv., 16. 
 
 " w. abl., 76. 
 
 M w. ace vv. inf., 189. 
 
 " " ger., 226. 
 Cum-tum, 169, n. 
 Cumulare vv. abl., 62. 
 
184 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Cupere, 32, n. 9. 
 
 Cupiditas w. ger. in di, 222. 
 
 Cupidus w. gen., 48. 
 
 Cura w. ut for imp., 178. 
 
 Curare w. fut. pass, part., 2J7, n. 4. 
 
 " " ut, 197. 
 Curato w. w£ for imp., 178. 
 Curiosus w. gen., 48. 
 
 Damnare w. gen., 53. 
 
 Dare w. fut. pass, part., 217, n. 4. 
 
 44 " two dat, 42. 
 Daring, v. of, w. nom. w. inf., 194. 
 Dative, 28, 42. 
 
 " aft. pass, v., 39. 
 
 " " gerund and fut. pass, 
 part., 39, n. 
 
 " governed by v., 32. 
 
 " w. adj. and adv., 31. 
 
 " « esse, 40. 
 
 " u esse, dare, venire, 42. 
 
 Dativus commodi, 29. 
 
 u ethicus, 30, n. 
 
 Datum est nomen, 41, n. 
 Datur w. dat. w. inf., 185, n. 3. 
 De, for gen. partitiv., 45, n. 4. 
 46 " " 53, n. 3. 
 u v. compounded w., 36. 
 " w. abl., 76. 
 « " ger., 226. 
 Debere in ind., 131. 
 Decedere w. abl., 36, 66. 
 Decernere w. w£, 198, n. 3. 
 Decet w. ace., 18. 
 Declarare w. two ace, 21. 
 Declarari w. two nom., 13. 
 Decurrere w. ace, 16. 
 Dedecet w. ace, 18. 
 Dedocere w. two ace, 19. 
 Deesse w. dat., 32. 
 
 " " ger. in do, 211. 
 Defender e, 66, n. 2. 
 
 " w. quominus, 146. 
 
 Deferre w. gen., 53. 
 Defraudare w. abl., 62. 
 Defungi w. abl., 64. 
 Dejicere w. abl., 36. 
 Delectari w. ^wtfd, 204. 
 Delectat w ace, 18, n. 
 Deliberare, an, 152, n.4. 
 Deliberatum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 Deligere w. two ace, 21. 
 Delivering) v. of, 66. 
 
 Demanding, v. of, w. w£, 20, 98. 
 Demonstrare w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 Demonstrative pronouns agr. w. 
 their subst., 9. 
 e< w. theirsubst. in ex- 
 
 planatory clauses, 9, n. 2. 
 Demovere w. abl., 66. 
 Depellere w. abl., 36, 66. 
 Depopulatus in. pass, sense, 207, 
 
 n. 2. 
 Deprehendi w. two nom., 13. 
 Depriving, v. of, 62. 
 Designare w. two ace, 21. 
 Designari w. two nom., 13. 
 Desiring, adj. of, w. gen., 48. 
 
 " v. of, w. nom. or ace w. 
 inf., 194. 
 Desistere w. abl., 66. 
 Desperato as abl. abs., 216. 
 Deterrere w. abl., 66. 
 
 " " quominus, 146. 
 Detestatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Dicer e in subj , 151, n. 2. 
 
 " w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 " « twoace,21r 
 
 « " w£, 198, n. 1. 
 Dici used personally, 14, n. 4. 
 " w. two nom., 13. 
 Dicto aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 Dictu, 229. 
 Die, 69, n. 1. 
 Diem dicer e w. gen., 53. 
 Dijferre, w. prep., 66. 
 Difficile, 82. 
 DijficUis, w. «^ and ger., 229, n. 1 . 
 
 " « inf., 229, n. 1. 
 
 Diffidere w. dat., 32. 
 Dignari w. abl., 64. 
 Dignus, qui w. subj., 160, 229, n. 2. 
 
 44 w. abl., 65. 
 
 44 " gen., 65, n.2. 
 
 " " sup., 229. 
 Dimensus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Discedere w . abi., 66. 
 Discere w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 Discernere w. prep., 66. 
 Discessu, 69, n. 6. 
 Discrepare w. prep., 66. 
 Displicere w. dat., 32. 
 Dissimilis, 31, n. 6. 
 
 <« w. ac or atque, 238. 
 
 Distare w. prep., 66. 
 Disiinguere w. prep., 66. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 185 
 
 Diver sus w. gen., 48, n. 2. 
 Docere w. abl., 60, n. 1. 
 
 •* " two ace, 19. 
 Doceri w. de, 19, n. 1. 
 Dolere w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 
 M M ace. w. inf., 204, n. 
 
 " " quod,204. 
 Dominari w. dat., 32. 
 Domus, 24, n. 7. 
 Donare, 38. 
 
 " w. abl., 62. 
 
 Donee , 167. 
 
 Dormire w. ace., 16, n. 3. 
 Double questions, 152, n. 2. 
 Dubitare, an, 145, n. 4, 152, n. 4, 6. 
 " nwm, 145, n. 4. 
 <' w. inf., 145, n. 3. 
 Dubium est, an, 152, n. 4,6. 
 Dubius w. gen., 48, n. 1. 
 Ducere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " gen., 52. 
 
 " " two ace, 21. 
 
 " '« " dat., 42. 
 Ductus, 58, n. 1. 
 Dura, 167. 
 
 " w. pres., 122. 
 
 " ne w. subj., 163. 
 Dummodo w. subj., 163. 
 
 " ne w. subj., 163. 
 
 Dux in abl. abs., 214. 
 
 E, v. compounded w., 16. 
 " w. abl., 76. 
 Ec in compos., 241. 
 Ecce, 25. 
 
 Edicere w. ut, 398, n. 3. 
 Edicto as abl. abs., 216. 
 Editus w. abl., 57. 
 Edocere w. two ace, 19. 
 Effatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Efficere w. w£, 197. 
 
 " " ace w. inf., 197, n. 4. 
 Efficitur w. w£ or ace w. inf., 200, 
 
 n. 2. 
 Egere w. abl., 62. 
 
 " " gen., 62, n. 2. 
 Egredi, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 Ejicere w. abl,, 66. 
 Eiigi w. two nom., 13. 
 Emensus in pass, sense, 207, n.2. 
 Ementitus in pass, sense, 207, n.2. 
 16* 
 
 Emere w. gen., 52. 
 Emeritus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 En, 25. 
 
 Encouraging, v. of, w. ut, 198. 
 Endeavoring, v. of, w. ut, 197. 
 "jEv <3"i« <5Voi>, 244. 
 Endowing, v. of, 62. 
 Enim w. ace w. inf., 189. 
 Entreating, v. of, 20. 
 Entrusting w. a commission, v. of, 
 w. ut, 198. 
 i?0 w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Eodem w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Ereptum ire, 228, n. 2. 
 Ur^a aft. adj., 31, n. 1. 
 Ergo, 240. 
 
 Esse agr. w, subst. of subj. or 
 predie, 6, n. 6, 7. 
 
 " w. adv., 6, n. 2. 
 
 " " dat., 40. 
 
 " " gen., 52, 53. 
 
 " " ger. in do, 224, n. 1. 
 
 " " pron., 9, n. 2. 
 
 " " quam aft. comp., 74, n. 2. 
 
 " " two dat., 42. 
 
 " " twonom.,13. 
 Esteeming, v. of, 21, 52. 
 Estimating, v. of, 60. 
 Est causa w. ^uod, 203. 
 
 M ^Mi w. subj., 157. 
 
 " jwod w. subj., 157, n. 1. 
 
 " w&i w. subj., 157. 
 
 " unde w, subj., 157. 
 Et, 242. 
 £^aw, 86, 235. 
 Et ipse, 101. 
 Evader e w. abl., 36, 66. 
 
 " « two nom., 13. 
 
 Evenire w. w£, 200. 
 22z, v. compounded w., 36. 
 
 w for gen. partitiv., 45. n. 4. 
 
 « w. abl., 76. 
 
 « " ger., 226. 
 
 " " names of towns, 24, n. 1. 
 Excedere, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 Excitare w. ut, 198. 
 Excludere w. abl., 66. 
 Exkibere se w. two ace, 21. 
 Exhortari w. ut, 198. 
 Exiguus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Exire w. abl., 36, 66. 
 Existere w. two nom., 13. 
 
186 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Existimare w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " two ace, 21. 
 
 Existimari w. two nom,, 13. 
 Existunt, qui w. subj., 157. 
 Exonerate w. abl.,66. 
 Exoriuntur , qui w. subj., 157. 
 Exosus in act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 Expcdire w. abl., 66. 
 Exp edit w. dat , 32. 
 ExpeUere w. abl.,66. 
 Expers w. gen., 48. 
 Expertus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Explanatory clauses in the ace. w. 
 inf., 189. 
 Explere w. abl., 62. 
 Explorato as abl. abs., 216. 
 Exploratum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 Exsatiare w. abl., 62. 
 Exsecratus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Exsolvere w. abl.. 66. 
 Exsors w. gen., 48. 
 Extent of time and space, 22. 
 Extremum est w. ut, 200. 
 Extremus, 78. 
 Exuere, 38. 
 
 " w. abl., 62. 
 Exulare w, abl., 66. 
 
 jFac for imper., 178. 
 " w. we for imp., 173. 
 " " subj. alone, 202. 
 " suppose, w. ace. w. inf., 197, 
 
 n. 3- 
 Facer e certiorem, 21, n. 1. 
 
 " in paraphrase, 197, n. 1. 
 
 " « sense of introducing, 197, 
 n.2. 
 
 '-' non possum w. quia, 145. 
 
 " reum w. gen., 53. 
 
 " w. de, abl. or dat., 76, n. 2. 
 
 " " gen., 52. 
 
 « " quod, 203, n. 
 
 " " two ace, 21. 
 
 " M w£, 197, n. 1. 
 Facile, 82. 
 Facilis w. ad and ger., 229, n. 1. 
 
 " « inf., 229, n. 1. 
 
 " « sup., 229. 
 Factu, 229. 
 
 Factum est nomen, 41, n. 
 Facultas w. ger. in di, 222. 
 JFaZZi* w. ace, 18, n. 
 Familiaris, 31, n. 2, 
 
 Famulari w. dat., 32. 
 
 .Fas w. sup., 229. 
 
 .Fas esse in hid., 131. 
 
 Fastidire w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 
 Favere w. dat., 32. 
 
 Fearing, v. of, J 43. 
 
 Febris omitt., 247. 
 
 Fecundus w. gen., 48. 
 
 Feeling, v. of, w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 Ferax w. gen., 48. 
 
 Ferri used personally, 14, n. 4, 
 
 Fer tilts w. gen., 48. 
 
 Fessus w. abl., 58. 
 
 Festinare w. ace, 16, n.2. 
 
 «< " sup., 228. 
 Fidere w. abl., 64, n. 5, 32, n. 6. 
 
 " dat., 32. 
 Fieri non potest w. oimi, 145. 
 
 " " " " ut, 200. 
 
 " w. gen., 52. 
 
 " u two nom., 13. 
 Filia omitt., 245. 
 Filius omitt., 245. 
 Filling, v. of, 62. 
 Finitimus w. dat., 31, n. 3. 
 Fisus in act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 JF# w. ut, 200. 
 Flagitare w. two ace, 20. 
 Flocci, 52, n. 1. 
 Florere w. abl., 62, 
 Fore, pleonastically, 182, n. 2. 
 
 « w* for inf. fut., 174. 
 Forgetting, v. of, 50, n. 2. 
 Fraudare w. abl., 62. 
 Fretus w. abl., 63. 
 -FYm£, fut. pass. part, of, 221, n. 1. 
 
 " w. abl., 64. 
 
 " «* ace, 64, n. 1. 
 Fugiens w. gen., 49. 
 Fugit w. ace, 18, n. 
 Fui for sum, 110, n. 1. 
 Fungi, fut. pass. part, of, 221, n. 1. 
 « w. abl., 64. 
 " " ace, 64, n. 1, 
 Future act. part., 207. 
 
 " « "- w. dare, etc., 217, 
 n. 4. 
 
 M imperative, 174, 175, 176. 
 
 " inf. w. v. of promising and 
 hoping, 189, n. 2, 3. 
 
 " pass, part., 116, 181, n.2, 207. 
 
 " " " expressing possi- 
 
 bility, 217, n. 1,8. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 187 
 
 Future perf. for first fat., 123, n. 2. 
 subj., 112, 113,114. 
 " *« pass, expressed by 
 
 circumlocution, 114. 
 Futures, use of, 123. 
 Futurum esse, ut for fut. inf., 182. 
 « est vv. ut, 200. 
 u fuisse, ut, 182, n. 1, 
 
 Gaudere w. ace, 16, n. 4. 
 " " £izo<Z, 204, n. 
 
 " " ace. w. inf., 204, n. 
 
 Gemere w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 Genitive aft. adj . , 48. 
 
 " «« adv. of place, 46, n. 2. 
 ( « " neuter pron. and adj.. 
 46, 47. 
 81 " nouns, 43. 
 " " part., 45, n. 2, 49. 
 w " pudet, etc., 51. 
 " M relat. adj., 48. 
 ■* M v. of accusing, etc., 53. 
 " " " remembering, etc , 
 50. 
 " " " valuing, 52. 
 " case, 43-55. 
 u for apposition, 43, n. 6. 
 " governed by ger., 43, n. 5. 
 " objective, 43. 
 " of neuter adj., 45, n. 1. 
 " " number, 44, n. 1. 
 " " personal pron., 43, n. 4. 
 " " quality, 44. 
 " pi. of fut. act. part., 210, 
 n. 2. 
 6< subjective, 43. 
 «' used pleonastically, 46, 
 n. 3. 
 *« w. esse, 54. 
 Genitivus partitivus, 45. 
 Genitus w. abl., 57. 
 Gentium aft. adv., 46. n.2. 
 Gerund, 220, 226.' 
 " changed into fut. pass, 
 
 part., 221. 
 in di, 222. 
 " " expressing tendency 
 
 to anything, 223, n. 3. 
 " " used alone, 223, n. 4. 
 
 " in do, 224. 
 ** in do, vv. esse, 224, n. 1. 
 " " " names of office, 
 
 224, n. 2, 
 
 Gerund in dum, 225. 
 " " pass, sense, 221, n. 2. 
 
 w* gen., 223, n. 1,2. 
 " " swz, 223, n. 1. 
 
 Gloriari vv. abl., 64. 
 
 " de, 64, n. 3. 
 " quod, 204. 
 Gnarus vv. gen., 48. 
 Grandisnatu, 61, n. 3, 229. 
 Gratia vv. ger. in di, 222. 
 Gratias agere vv. ^wod, 204, n. 
 Gratijicari vv. dat., 32. 
 Gratulari w. </wog?, 204, n. 
 Gratum esse vv. ^wod, 204. 
 
 Habeo, quod dicam, 157, n. 1. 
 Habere w. gen., 52. 
 
 ;t " perf. pass, part., 207, 
 n. 4. 
 
 " " two ace, 21. 
 
 " " pro, 21, n. 2. 
 Haberi vv. two nom., 13. 
 Habitare w. gen., 52, n. 6. 
 
 abl., 60, n. 1. 
 Hasitare, an. 152, n. 4, 6. 
 Happening, v. of, 200. 
 Haud multum abest w. quirt, 145. 
 
 " proeui abest w. quin, 145. 
 
 " s«o, aw, 152, n. 4, 6. 
 Hearing, v. of, w. ace w.inf., 186. 
 #ei, 25, n. 2. 
 Hem, 25. 
 i?ezi, 25. 
 Hie, 71, n. 103. 
 " w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Hicce, 103, n. 
 Hiccine, 103, n. 
 
 Hindrance, v. of, w. quominus x 146. 
 Hiring, v. of, 52. 
 77flc atatis, 46, n. 4. 
 
 " agere w. w£, 197. 
 Honestus w. sup., 229. 
 Hoping, v. of, w. ace w. inf., 189, 
 n.2, 3. 
 Horrere w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 Hortari w. subj. alone, 202. 
 
 " " ^,198. 
 
 Hostis w. dat., 31, n. 2. 
 Awe vv. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Hujus, 52, n. 1. 
 Humus, 24, n. 8. 
 
 /</ atatis, 46, n. 4. 
 
188 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Id agere w. ut, 191. 
 " auctoritatis, 146, n. 4. 
 " quod, 9, n. 1. 
 "* temporis, 46, n.4. 
 Idem w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Idoneus w. ger. in do, 224. 
 
 " §m w. subj., 160. 
 
 Igitur, 240, 243. 
 I guar us w. gen., 48. 
 Ignoscere w. dat., 32. 
 JMe, 72, n. 103. 
 JUfe, 103, n. 
 Illud agere w. w£, 197. 
 Imbuere w. abl., 62. 
 Immemor w. gen., 48. 
 Imminere vv. dat., 32. 
 Immiscere, vv. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Immodicus vv. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Immorari vv. dat., 35. 
 Immori w. dat., 35. 
 Immo, 233. 
 
 Impatiens vv. gen., 49. 
 Impedire vv. quominus, 146. 
 
 « " inf., 146, n. 
 Impeller e vv. «£, 198. 
 Impendere vv. dat., 32. 
 Imperare w. dat., 32. 
 
 « " w«, 198, n. 3. 
 
 " ^ ace. w. inf., 198, 5. 
 Imperative, circumlocution of the, 
 
 178. 
 Imperative mood, 174-178. 
 Imperator in abl. abs., 214. 
 Imperfect, 117, n. 1, 118, 120. 
 
 " and perf. in letters, 118, 
 n. 2. 
 
 « " pluperf. subj. in con- 
 ditional sentences, 136. 
 
 S( perf. and pluperf. ind. 
 for pluperf. subj., 116, n. 
 
 " subj., 119. 
 Imperitus w. gen., 48. 
 Impertire, 38. 
 Impiger w. gen._, 48, n. 1. 
 Implere w. abl., 62. 
 Imponere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Impos w. gen., 48. 
 Impotens w. gen., 48. 
 Imprinter e w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 
 " " prep., 35, n. 3. 
 
 Imus, 78. 
 In, v. compounded w., 16, 33. 
 
 In for gen. partitiv., 45, n. 4. 
 " omitted, 73, n. 5. 
 " w. ace and abl., 76. 
 " " ger., 226. 
 
 " (C names of towns, 24, n. 1. 
 (c animum inducere w. ut } 197. 
 Inanis w. gen., 48. 
 Incedere } transit., 16, n. 1. 
 Incertum est, an, 152, n.4, 6. 
 Incertus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Incidere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 
 « " ut, 200. 
 
 Incitarew. ut, 198. 
 Includcre w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Incommodare w. dat., 32. 
 Incredibilis w. sup., 229. 
 Increpare vv. gen., 53. 
 Incumbere w. dat., 35, n. 4. 
 Incuriosus w. gen. 48. 
 Incusare w. gen., 53. 
 Indecet w. ace, 18. 
 Indicative aft. indefinite expres- 
 sions, 133. 
 f * in condit. propos., 129, 
 n., 132. 
 « mood, 129-134. 
 Indigere w. abl., 62. 
 
 w. gen., 62, n. 2. 
 Indignari w. ^wod, 204. 
 Indignus w. abl., 65. 
 " sup., 229. 
 " qui w. subj., 160. 
 
 Indirect questions, 152. 
 Inditum est nomen, 41, n. 
 Indormire w. dat., 35. 
 Induere, 38. 
 Indulgere w. dat., 32. 
 Inesse vv. dat., 35. 
 
 " prep., 35, n. 3. 
 In expensas, 53, n.4. 
 Inexpertus in a pass, sense, 207, 
 
 n.2. 
 Infamare w. gen., 53. 
 Inferre w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Injimus, 78. 
 
 Infinitive aft. tfeZJe, 194, n. 1. 
 " as a subst., 183. 
 " future, 181. 
 '< in apposit., 192. 
 " mood, 179-205. 
 « pass., 180. 
 
 " perf. afupudet, etc., 179, 
 n. 3. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 189 
 
 Injinitivus rei infectce, 179, n. 1. 
 " " perfects, 179, n. 1. 
 
 Ingcns w anirni, 48, n. 3. 
 Ingerere, w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Ingredi w. ace, 16. 
 Inhcerere w. dat., 35. 
 Inhiare w. dat., 35. 
 Inimicus, 31, n.2. 
 Inire, w. ace, 37. 
 Initio, 69, n. 6. 
 Injicere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Jti mentem venire w. gen., 50. 
 " metallum, 53, n. 4. 
 Innasci w. dat., 35. 
 lnnoxius w. gen., 53, n. 1. 
 Inops, w. gen., 48. 
 Inquiring, v. of, 20. 
 Insatiabilis w. gen., 48. 
 Inscius w. gen., 48. 
 Inscribere w. prep., 35, n. 3. 
 Inscribi w. two nom., 13. 
 Inserere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Inservire w. dat., 32. 
 Insidiari w. dat., 32. 
 Insimulare w. gen., 53. 
 Insolens w. gen., 48. 
 Insolitus w. gen., 48. 
 Insons w. gen., 23, n. 1. 
 Inspergere, 38. 
 
 Insuescere w. dat. or abl., 35, n. 5. 
 Insuetus w. gen., 48. 
 Insultare w. dat., 32. 
 Integer w. gen., 48, n. 2. 
 Integrum est w. «£, 200, n. 5. 
 Intelligent vv. gen., 49. 
 Intelligere w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " two ace , 21. 
 
 Intelli gitur w. ace w. inf., 185. 
 Intemperans w. gen., 49. 
 Inter, v. compounded w. 16,33. 
 
 " for gen. partitiv., 45, n. 4. 
 
 " w. ger., 225, n. 
 Intentum esse w. ger. in do, 224. 
 Inter cedere w. quominus, 146. 
 Intercludere, 38. 
 
 " w. abl., 66. 
 
 Inter die ere, 38. 
 Inter diu, 69, n. 1. 
 Inter esse w. dat., 35. 
 Inter esse w. prep., 35, n. 3. 
 Interest w. gen., 55. 
 
 Interest " nom., 55, n. 1. 
 
 «* " «d or dat., 55, n. 4. 
 Inter finer e w. ace, 36. 
 ! hiterjacere w. dat., 35, 
 ! Interjections w. ace, 25. 
 
 " " voe, 25, n. 1. 
 
 Interjicere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 hiterponere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Interpres in abl. abs., 214. 
 Interpretatus in pass, sense, 207, 
 
 n.2. 
 Interrogare w. two ace, 20. 
 
 *' sl w. gen., 53. 
 
 Interrogative clauses in the ace w. 
 inf., 187. 
 Intervenire w. dat , 35. 
 Intimus, 78. 
 | J/iira, 26, 72. 
 Intrans. v. w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 
 u " " the ace of neuter 
 pron. and adj., 16, n. 5. 
 Inutilis w. ger. in do, 224. 
 Inurere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Invadere, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 " w t . ace, 37. 
 " " dat., 35. 
 
 Invenire w. two ace, 21. 
 Inveniuntur, qui w. subj., 157. 
 Inventu, 229. 
 Invidere w. ace, 32, n. 5. 
 
 " " dat., 32. 
 
 Ipse, 98, 99, 100. 
 Ipsum w. inf., 183, n. 2. 
 Irasci w. dat., 32. 
 Ire w. ace, l(j, n. 4. 
 
 " " sup., 228. 
 75,90,102. 
 " such, 96. 
 
 Islands, names of, 24, n. 3. 
 Iste, 103. 
 Istic, 103, n. 
 Ita omitted, 141, n. 1. 
 Itaque, 240, 243. 
 Itinere, 73, n. 3. 
 
 Joy, v. of, w. quod, 204. 
 Jubere w. ace w. inf., 32, n.2, 198, 
 
 n. 3. 
 " « ut, 198, n. 4. 
 Jucundus w. fld and ger.. 229, n. 1. 
 " " inf. 229, n. 1. 
 
190 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Jucundus w. sup., 229. 
 Judex in abl. abs., 214. 
 Judicare w. two ace, 21. 
 Judicari w. two norn., 13. 
 Judicio, 61, n. 1. 
 Junctus, 68, n. 3. 
 
 Juratus in an act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 Jureconsultus , 48, n. 4. 
 Jureperitus, 48, n. 4. 
 Jurisconsultus , 48, n. 4. 
 Jurisperitus, 48, n. 4. 
 Jwsfo aft. com p., 74, n. 3. 
 Justum esse, in ind., 131. 
 
 " est w. ace. w. inf., 185. 
 Juvare w. ace, 32, n. 2. 
 Juvat w. ace, 18, n. 
 
 « " perf. inf., 179, n. 3. 
 Juvenis, 69, n. 7. 
 Juxla w. ac or atque, 238. 
 
 Keeping at a distance, v. of, 66. 
 Knowing, adj. of w. gen., 48. 
 " v. of, w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 Labor are w. ex, 61, n. 4. 
 Lacrimare w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 Laitari w. abl., 64. 
 Lavare w. abl., 60, n. 1. 
 Legem dare w. «£, 198, n. 3. 
 Lending, v. of, 52. 
 Lenocinari w. dat., 32. 
 Levare w. abl., 66. 
 Liber are w. abl., 66. 
 
 " " gen., 53. 
 
 Licere in indie, 131. 
 
 " w. gen., 52. 
 Licet w. dat. or ace w. inf., 185, 
 
 n. 2. 
 « " subj.,164. 
 " " " alone, 202. 
 Locare w. fut. pass, part., 217, n4. 
 
 " " in and abL, 71, n. 6. 
 
 " " gen., 52. 
 Loci aft. adv., 46, n. 2. 
 Loco, 73, n. 1. 
 
 ** w. adj. and pron., 73. 
 Locorum aft. adv., 46, n. 2. 
 Locupletare w. abl., 62. 
 Locus in appos., 24, n. 4. 
 Longew. superlative, 88. 
 Longius without quam, 74, n. 6. 
 Ludere w. ace, 16, n. 2, 4. 
 
 Ludis, 69, n. 4. 
 
 Lugere w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 
 Made, 58, n. 2. 
 Magister in abl. abs., 214. 
 Magistra in abl. abs., 214. 
 Magnam partem, 61, n. 2. 
 Magni, 52. 
 Magno, 52, n. 4. 
 Magnum est w. quod, 203. 
 Magnus w. nata, 60, n. 3, 229. 
 Major w. waft*, 229. 
 Male, 52, n. 5. 
 Maledicere w. dat., 32. 
 Malle w. subj. alone, 202. 
 Mandare w. w£, 198, n. 3. 
 Manere w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 " " two nom., 13. 
 Manifestus w. gen., 53, n. 1. 
 J^fare omitt., 247. 
 Maximi, 52. 
 Maximus w. rcata, 229. 
 Mederi w. dat., 32. 
 Medicari w. dat. and ace, 32, n. 3. 
 Meditari w. w£, 197. 
 Meditatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Medius, 78. 
 Melius esse in ind., 131. 
 
 " es£ w. perf. inf., 179, n. 3. 
 Meminisse w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 " « de,50,n. 3. 
 
 " " gen., 50. 
 
 " « pres. inf., 179, n. 2. 
 
 Memor w. gen., 48. 
 Memorabilisw. sup., 229. 
 Memoratu, 229. 
 Merere w. abl., 60, n. 1. 
 Metatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Metuens w. gen., 49. 
 Metuere 32, n., 143. 
 Militia, 24, n. 8. 
 Minari w. dat., 32. 
 Minimi, 52. 
 Minimus w. wata, 229. 
 Ministrare w. dat., 32. 
 Minor w. ?i«ta, 60, n.3, 229. 
 Minor is, 52. 
 
 Minus without quam, 74, n. 6. 
 Mirari w. gwod, 204. 
 Mirum quantum, 82. 
 Miserari w. ace, 51, n. 1. 
 Miser eri w. gen., 51, n. 1. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 191 
 
 Miserescere w. gen., 51, n. 1. 
 
 Miser escit w. gen., 51. 
 
 Miser et w. ace. and gen., 17, 51. 
 
 Miser etur w. gen., 51. 
 
 Mittere w. fut. pass, part., 217, n. 4. 
 
 « « sup., 228. 
 
 " " two dat., 42. 
 Moderari, 32, n.9. 
 Moderatus in a pass, sense, 207, n.2. 
 Modicus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 
 " " gen., 48, n.l. 
 
 Modo ne w. subj., 163. 
 
 " non, 232. 
 Monere w. de, 50, n. 3. 
 " " subj. alone, 202. 
 " " ut and ace. w. inf.. 198, 
 n.l. 
 Moods, 129-205. 
 Morigerari w. dat., 32. 
 Morte, 53, n. 4. 
 Mortis , 53, n. 4. 
 
 Jtfos or moris est w. w£, 200, n. 3. 
 Motion, v. of, w. sup., 228. 
 Mover e w. abl., 66. 
 Multa, 53, n. 4. 
 Multa, 53, n. 4. 
 Multo w. superlative, 88. 
 Multum and multa, 82. 
 Mutare, 60, n. 2. 
 
 JVara, 242, 243. 
 
 " w. ace. w. inf., 189. 
 Naming, v. of, 21. 
 Nasci w. two nom., 13. 
 Natione, 61, n. 1. 
 JVata, 61, n. 3, 229. 
 Natus w. ace, 22, n 2. 
 
 " " abl., 57. 
 Nauci, 52, n. 1. 
 Ne aft. v. of fearing, 143. 
 
 " aft. v. of hindrance, 146. 
 
 " 3 although not, 164. 
 
 " enclitic in double questions, 
 152, n. 2. 
 
 " in order that not, lest, 142. 
 
 " much less, 165. 
 
 " non, 143, n. 4. 
 
 " w. imperat.,177. 
 Nee, 234, 242. 
 
 Necessario aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 Necesse esse w. ace. w. inf., 185. 
 " " " dat. w. inf., 185, 
 
 n. 3. 
 
 Necesse esse in indie, 131. 
 
 " M w. ut and ace. w. inf., 
 
 202, n. 
 Necne in double questions, 152, n. 3. 
 JYedum w. subj., 165. 
 
 " ut, 165, n. 2. 
 Kef as w. sup., 229. 
 Negare w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Negligens w. gen., 49. 
 Nemo est, qui w. subj., 157. 
 
 " u etc. w. quin, 145. 
 
 " non, 232. 
 Ne non, 143, n. 3. 
 Neque, 234, 242. 
 
 < 4 for neve in prohibitions, 139, 
 n.2. 
 Nescio, an, 152, n. 4, 6. 
 Nescius w. gen., 48. 
 Neuter different from nullus, 45, 
 
 n. 5. 
 Neuter of adjectives, 6, n. 5. 
 
 " " ", for nouns, 54, n.2. 
 JVere or neu, 143, n. 3. 
 
 " " " w. imper., 177. 
 Ni, 239, n. 1. 
 Nihil, 46. 
 
 " abest w. quin, 145. 
 
 " antiquiushubeo,quamw.ut, 
 197. 
 
 " es£, ^wod w. subj., 149, n. 1. 
 
 " " etc. w. quin, 145. 
 
 i( for nemo, 104, n. 2. 
 
 " non, 233. 
 
 " pratermitto w. gwira, 145. 
 Nihili, 52, n. 1. 
 Nihilo, 52, n. 4. 
 Nimio aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 Nimium quantum, 82. 
 Nimius w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 JYm, 239. 
 
 " w. part., 209, n. 2. 
 
 " " ind., 136, n.2. 
 
 " /or£e w. ind., 136, n. 2. 
 
 " vero w. ind., 136, n. 2. 
 JW*i w abl., 64. 
 " " in, ad, 64, n. 4. 
 " « ?/*, 197. 
 Nocere w. dat., 32. 
 JYoc£e, 69, n. 1. 
 Noctu, 69, n.l. 
 JVofo* for imperat., 178. 
 JYoZ^, 32, n.9. 
 
 " w. subj. alone, 202. 
 
192 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Nomen est w. dat., 41. 
 JYominare w. two ace, 21. 
 Nominari w. two nom., 13. 
 Nominative case, 13, 14. 
 
 " for vocat., 77, n. 3. 
 
 cl in appos. to vocat., 77, 
 
 n. 2. 
 " w. inf., 190. 
 
 Non abstineo w. quin, 145. 
 ambigo w. owin, 145. 
 
 " " inf., 145, n. 3. 
 dubito w. quin, 145, n. 3. 
 est dubium w. guin, 145. 
 " quod w. subj., 157, n. 1. 
 for ?ie in prohibitions, 139, n. 2. 
 habeo, quod w. subj., 157, n. 1. 
 impedio w. quin, 145. 
 modo won — sed we — quidem, 
 231. 
 07/£n, not as if not, 144. 
 ^no, not as if, 144, n. 1. 
 " non, not as if not, 144. 
 quod, not as if, 144. 
 recuso w. quin, 145. 
 solum non — sed vix, 231. 
 w. part., 209, n. 2. 
 Nostrum different from nostri, 45, 
 n. 6, 89. 
 Noxius w. gen., 53, n. 1. 
 
 " " ger. in do, 244. 
 Nubere w. dat., 30. 
 Nudare w. abl., 62. 
 Nullus, 83, n. 
 
 " es£, tftu w. subj., 157. 
 u " etc. w. quin, 145. 
 
 " non, 233. 
 " w. part., 209, n. 2. 
 Num, 241. 
 
 " in double questions, 152, n. 2. 
 Numerari w. two nom., 13. 
 Numnam, 241. 
 Numne, 241. 
 Numquid, 241. 
 JVumquidnam, 241. 
 Nuncupare w. two ace, 21. 
 Nunquam non, 233. 
 Nuntiare w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " n£, 198, n.l. 
 Nuntiari used personally, 14, n. 5. 
 Nuntiato as abl. abs., 216. 
 Nusquam w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 " non, 233. 
 
 JYuptum dare, 228, 
 
 0,25. 
 
 Oo, v. compounded w., 16,33. 
 " w. ger., 225. 
 Obambutare w. dat., 35. 
 Obedire w. dat., 32. 
 Obesse w. dat., 32. 
 Obire, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 " w. ace, 37. 
 Objective gen., 43. 
 
 " and subj. gen., 43, n. 2. 
 Objicere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Oblivisci w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 41 " gen., 50. 
 Obrepere w. dat., 35. 
 Obsequi w. dat., 32. 
 Observans w. gen., 49. 
 Obsidere, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 Obsistere w. quominus, 146. 
 Obstare w. dat., 32. 
 
 " " quominus, 146. 
 
 Obtemperare w. dat., 32. 
 Obtrectare w. dat., 32. 
 Obversari w. dat., 35. 
 Occasio w. ger. in di, 222. 
 Occumbere, 35, n. 6. 
 Occurrere w. dat., 32. 
 " " ut, 200. 
 Octupli, 53, n.4. 
 Officer e w. dat., 32. 
 
 " " quominus, 146. 
 Offundere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 OAe, 25. 
 O/d, 22, n. 2. 
 Olere w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 Opera, 59, n. 1. 
 Operam dare w. ger. in do, 224. 
 
 « " " ut, 197. 
 
 Opinari w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 Opinatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2 
 Opinione, 61, n. 1. 
 
 " aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 
 Opitularl w . dat., 32. 
 Oportere in indie, 131. 
 
 " w. ace w. inf., 185. 
 
 " " ut and ace w. inf., 
 
 202, n. 
 Oppetere w. ace, 37. 
 Oppidum in appos., 24, n. 4. 
 Opponere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Oppugnatum ire, 228, n. 2. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 193 
 
 Optahilius esse in ind., 131. 
 Opus w. sup., 229. 
 
 " " part. perf. pass., 63, n. 1. 
 
 " est, 63. 
 
 M " w. ace. w. inf., 185. 
 
 " " " ut or inf., 202, n. 
 Orare w. subj. alone, 202. 
 
 " " two ace., 20. 
 
 " " ut, 198. 
 Oratio obliqua in ace. w. inf , 187, 
 188, 189. 
 Orbare w. abl., 62. 
 Orbusw. abl., 62, n. 1. 
 Ornare w. abl., 62. 
 Ortus w. abl., 57. 
 si w. subj., 147. 
 Ostendere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Ought, w. nom. w. inf., 194. 
 
 Pactus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Pain, v. of suffering, w. quod, 204. 
 Palpari w. dat., 32. 
 Par w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Parcere w. dat., 32. 
 Par ere w. dat., 32. 
 Par esse in ind , 131. 
 
 " w. ger. in do, 224. 
 Pariter w. #c or atque, 238. 
 Pars omitt., 247. 
 
 Pars-pars w. v. in plural, 6, n. 4. 
 Partem, 61, n. 2. 
 Partes omitt., 247. 
 Particeps w. gen., 4S. 
 Participles agr. w. subst., 7. 
 
 " connected with several 
 
 subst., 11. 
 " for subst., 81. 
 " fut. act., 210. 
 " pass., 217. 
 " M w . a, 217, n. 3. 
 " " as part, pres., 
 218. 
 " " " ofdep.v.,219. 
 
 " " u u intrans. v., 
 
 219. 
 " in explanatory and ad- 
 versative clauses, 208, 
 210, n. 1. 
 " of dep. v., 207, n. 1. 
 " M u u in pass, sense, 
 207, n. 2. 
 17 
 
 Participles perf. and fut. pass, for 
 
 verbal subst., 209. 
 
 M qualified bv adv., 206, n. 
 
 use of, 206-219. 
 " w. gen., 49. 
 u " nisi, non, nullus, 209, 
 
 n.2. 
 u " v. of hearing and see- 
 
 ing, 208, n. 2. 
 Particles, 230-248. 
 Partitus in pass sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Parum w. gen., 45. 
 Parvi, 52. 
 Parvo, 52, n. 4. 
 Pati w. subj. alone, 202. 
 Patiens w. gen., 49. 
 Patrocinari w. dat., 32. 
 Peculiaris, 31, n. 4. 
 Pecunia, 53, n. 4. 
 Pecuniae, 53, n. 4. 
 Pellere w. abl., 66. 
 Pendere w. gen., 52. 
 Pensi, 52, n. 1. 
 Per, 58, n. 1, 59, n. 1, 2. 
 
 ", v. compounded w. 16. 
 Perceptum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 i Percipere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 : Percontari w. two ace, 20. 
 I Percurrere w. ace, 16. 
 Perditum ire, 228, n. 1. 
 Perfect aft. postquam, etc., 121. 
 " and pluperf. ind. for plu- 
 perf. subj., 115, n. 116, n. 
 " in narration, 117. 
 " part, of depon. v., 206. 
 " pass, part., 206, 209, n. 1. 
 
 subj., Ill, 119. 
 " for imperat., 178. 
 Perficere w. ut, 197. 
 Perfrui w. abl., 64. 
 Perfunctus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Per fungi w. abl., 64. 
 Pergere w. sup., 228. 
 Perhibere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Perhiberi used personally, 14, n. 4. 
 
 " w. two nom., 13. 
 Periclitatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Perinde w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Peritus w. gen., 48. 
 Permagni, 52. 
 Permagno, 52, n. 4. 
 
194 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Permittere w. fut. pass, part., 217, 
 
 n.4. 
 u « subj. alone, 202. 
 
 Permitting , v. of, w. subj. alone, 
 
 202. 
 Permutare, 60, n. 2. 
 Perosus in act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 Perpellere w. ut, 198. 
 Personal and poss. pron. in ace. w. 
 inf., 189, n.1,2, 3. 
 Ci pron. expressed, 14. 
 " « w. v., 12. 
 Perspectum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 Perspicitur w. ace. w. inf., 185. 
 Persuader e w. ut and ace. w. inf., 
 198, n. 1. 
 Persuasum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 Pert&sus in act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 Peterc w. ab, 20. 
 
 " « subj. alone, 202. 
 " " ut, 198. 
 Piger w. gen., 48, n. 1. 
 Piget w. ace. and gen., 17, 51. 
 Pili,52, n. 1. 
 Placer e w. dat., 32. 
 Plenus w. gen., 48. 
 Plorare w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 Pluperfect, 120. 
 
 " subj., 111. 
 
 Plurimi, 52. 
 Plurimo, 52, n. 4. 
 PZwWs, 52. 
 
 P/ms without quam, 74, n. 6. 
 Pcenitet w. ace. and gen., 17, 51. 
 Polliceri w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Ponere w. in and abl., 76, n. 1. 
 Populatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Poscere w. two ace, 20. 
 Posse in ind., 137. 
 Possessive pron. for gen. of per- 
 sonal pron., 43, n.. 3, 54, 55. 
 Post, 26, 70. 
 
 <f , v. compounded w., 33. 
 Posteaquam w. perf, 121, n. 2. 
 " " subj., 121, n. 3. 
 
 Posthabere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Postponere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Postquam w. perf., 121, n. 2. 
 Postremus, 78. 
 Postulare w. gen., 53. 
 
 < f " subj. alone, 202. 
 
 Postulare w. two ace, 20. 
 Potens w. gen., 48. 
 Potestas w. ger. in <Z£,. 222. 
 Potiri, fut. pass. part, of, 221, n. 1. 
 " w. abl., 64. 
 " " gen., 64, n. 2. 
 Potus in act. and pass, sense, 207, 
 
 n. 3. 
 Prce, v. compounded w., 16, 33. 
 
 « w. abl., 76. 
 Prabere se w. two ace, 21. 
 ProBcedere, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 " w. dat. or ace, 36. 
 
 Preceptor in abl. abs., 214. 
 Prcecepirix in abl. abs., 214. 
 Prcecurrere w. dat. or ace, 36. 
 Pradltus w. abl., 65. 
 Prcedium omitt., 247. 
 Prceesse w. dat., 35. 
 Prceferre w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Praficere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Prcp.gr edi, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 " w. dat. or ace, 36. 
 
 Praiire w. dat., 35. 
 Pramiinere w. dat., 35. 
 Prceponere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Prascribere w. ut, 198, n. 3. 
 Prcesidere w. dat., 35. 
 Prcestare se w. two ace, 21. 
 Prcestolari w. dat., 32. 
 Prceier, v. compounded w., 16, 36* 
 Prceterjluere w. ace, 36. 
 Prater gr edi w. ace, 36. 
 Prmterire w. ace, 16,36- 
 Prceterit w. ace, 18, n. 
 Prcetervehi w. ace, 36. 
 PrcBtervolare w. ace, 36. 
 Pr&tor in abl. abs., 214. 
 Praivalere w. dat., 35. 
 Prcevenire, transit., 16, n. 1. 
 
 " w. dat. or ace, 36. 
 
 Pransus in act. sense, 207, n.3. 
 Precari w subj. alone, 202. 
 
 " «■ ut, 198. 
 
 Predicate, 5. 
 
 " agr. w. pers. pron. ego, 
 
 tu y nosyvos, 12. 
 
 " " urbs, oppidum, 
 
 civitas, in apposit., 8. 
 
 " " w. subst. in apposit., 
 
 8, n. 
 
 " a verb, 6. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 195 
 
 Predicate esse w. adjective part of 
 speech, 6. 
 « " « subst., 6. 
 
 Prepositions for gen., 43, n. 1. 
 
 " u Ct partitivus,45, 
 
 n. 5. 
 
 " governing ace, 26. 
 
 " w. gerund orfut. pass. 
 
 part., 225. 
 
 Present act. part., 206. 
 
 ee and perf. subj. in condi- 
 tional propositions, 136. 
 " and perf. subj. in a soft- 
 ened assertion, 137. 
 " for past tenses, 117, n. 2. 
 " imperative, 174, 175. 
 " subj., 111. 
 
 « " for imperat., 139, 178. 
 
 " M in questions implying 
 
 doubt, 138. 
 " w. the force of perf., 110, 
 n. 3. 
 Primus, 78. 
 Principio, 69, n. 6. 
 Priusquam, 166. 
 Privare w. abl., 62. 
 Pro, 25. 
 « w. abl., 76. 
 " nihilo, 52, n. 2. 
 l( se quisque w. v. in pi., 6, n.4. 
 Prodere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Prodesse w. dat., 32. 
 Prodest w. dat. w. inf., 185, n. 3. 
 Prodi used personally, 14, n. 4. 
 Pro eo w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Proficisci w. sup., 228. 
 Prohibere 66, n. 2. 
 " w. abl., 66. 
 " " inf., 146, n. 
 " " quominus, 146. 
 
 Proinde w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Promising, v. of, w. ace. w. inf., 
 189, n.2, 3. 
 Promittere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Pronouns, 89-107. 
 
 " agr. w. the antecedent, 
 
 9, n. 2. 
 
 " " " " foil, subst., 
 
 9, n. 2. 
 
 " connected w. or refer- 
 
 ing to several subst., 11. 
 
 Prope, 31, n. 3. 
 
 Proper are w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 
 Propinquare w. dat., 32. 
 Propinquus w. dat., 31, n. 3. 
 Proprius, 31, n. 4. 
 Propter, 58, n. 1, 4. 
 Prospicere, 32, n. 9. 
 Pro stare w. gen., 52. 
 Provider e, 32, n. 9. 
 Providus w. gen., 48. 
 Prudens w. gen., 48. 
 Pudet w. ace. and gen., 17, 51. 
 
 ' l " gen., 51, n. 2. 
 
 " " inf. perf, 179, n. 3. 
 Puditum est vv. ace. and gen., 17. 
 Puer, 69, n. 7. 
 Pugnare w. ace., 16, n. 4. 
 Pur gar e w. gen., 53. 
 Purpose and object expressed by 
 the subj., 140. 
 " " " expressed by 
 
 the frit. part, act., 200. 
 Putare in subj., 151, n. 2. 
 
 " w. gen., 52. 
 
 " « pro., 21, n. 2. 
 
 " " two ace, 21. 
 Putari w. two nom., 13. 
 
 Quacunque w. ind., 133. 
 Quadrupli, 53, n. 4. 
 Quairere w. ab, de, ex, 20. 
 Quaso w. two ace, 20. 
 
 " " subj. alone, 202. 
 Qualis posse w. superlative, 88. 
 Quam, 70, n. 3. 
 
 " w. superlative, 88. 
 
 " posse w. superlative, 88. 
 
 " pro, 74, n. 4. 
 
 u gzu aft. eomp. w. subj., 156. 
 
 u si w. subj , 163. 
 Quamdiu, 167. 
 Quamlibet w. subj., 164. 
 Quamobrem, 242. 
 Quamquam, 164, n. 1, 2. 
 
 a w. ace w. inf., 180. 
 
 Quamvis w. subj.. 164, n. 2. 
 Quanti, 52. 
 Quanticunque, 52. 
 Quantivis, 52. 
 
 Quantuluscunque w. ind., 133. 
 Quantum est w. subj., 157. 
 Quantumvis w. subj., 164. 
 Quantuscunque w. ind., 133. 
 Quantus posse w. superlative, 88. 
 Quaqua w. ind., 133. 
 
196 
 
 INDEX, 
 
 Quare, 242. 
 
 Quasi w. subj., 163. 
 
 Queri w quod, 204. 
 
 Qui for ut ego, tu, is, 154. 
 
 Qui, qua, quod est w. subj., 157. 
 
 Quicunque w. ind., 133. 
 
 Quid est, cur w. subj., 157, n. 1. 
 
 «' <f owod w. subj., 157, n. 1. 
 Quidam, 106. 
 
 Quidem w. ace. w. inf., 189. 
 Quidquam for quisquam, 104, n. 2. 
 Qwzrf quod, 248. 
 Qttin, 145. 
 
 " aft. v. of hindrance, 146. 
 
 44 for ace. o^/od now, 145, n. 1. 
 
 s< " qui, quce, quodnon, 145. 
 
 li in question and exhortation. 
 145, n. 5. 
 
 u w. imperat., 145, n. 6. 
 Quippe w. ace. w. inf., 189. 
 
 " qui w. subj., 158, n. 1. 
 Quis est, qui w. subj., 157. 
 Quispiam, 105. 
 Quisquam, 104. 
 Quisque w. v. in plur., 6, n. 4. 
 
 " " ord. num., 87. 
 
 u u superlative, 87. 
 
 Quisquis w. ind., 133. 
 Quo, in order that, 144. 
 
 u w. gen., 45, n. 2. 
 Quoad, 167. 
 Quo circa, 242. 
 Quocunque w. ind., 133. 
 Qwod aft. demonst. pron., 205. 
 
 " " v. of pain, joy, etc., 204. 
 
 " expressing a fact, 203. 
 
 " in epistolary style, 205, n. 
 
 " " explan. clauses, 205. 
 Quominus, in order that not, 146. 
 Quoque, 235. 
 Quoquo w. ind., 133. 
 Quotquot w. ind., 133. 
 Quotusquisque est w. subj., 157. 
 
 Raptum ire, 228, n. 2. 
 
 Recens, 82. 
 
 Recordari w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 « " </e, 50, n. 3. 
 
 " " gen., 50. 
 
 Rectum est w. ut, 200, n. 4. 
 Recusare w. quominus, 146. 
 
 " " infin., 146, n. 
 
 Reddere w. two ace, 21. 
 Redolere w. ace., 16, n. 2. 
 Redundare w. abl., 62. 
 Refer cire w. abl., 62. 
 Referre w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Refert w. gen., 55, n. 2. 
 
 " " «o3 or dat., 55, n. 4. 
 Refertus w. abl. and gen., 48, n. 4, 
 62, n. 1. 
 Refragari w. dat., 32. 
 Relative clauses in the ace. w. inf., 
 
 188. 
 Relative pron. agr. w. personal 
 pron. implied, 97. 
 i( " agr. w.its subst., 9. 
 (( iC and adv. w. subj., 
 153-161. 
 e( u as, or such as, 96. 
 " " in explan. clauses, 
 9, n. 2. 
 " << position of, 93. 
 « " w. adj., 94. 
 " <c IC subst. in appo- 
 sit., 95. 
 Relinquere w. two dat., 42. 
 Relinquitur w. ut, 200. 
 Reliqua, 61, n. 2. 
 Reliquum est w. w£, 200. 
 Reliquus, 78. 
 Remaining , v. of, 200. 
 Remembering, adj. of, w. gen., 148. 
 
 « v. of, 50, n. 2. 
 
 Reminding, v. of, 50, n. 1. 
 
 " " , w. subj. alone, 
 
 200. 
 Reminisci w. gen., 50. 
 Removere w. abl., 66. 
 Removing, v. of, 66. 
 Remunerari w. abl., 62. 
 Reniti w. dat., 32. 
 Rcnunciari w. two nom., 13. 
 Repcrire w. two ace, 21. 
 ! Reperiri w. two nom., 13. 
 Reperiuntur, qui w. subj., 157. 
 Reposcere w. two ace, 20. 
 Repugnare w. dat., 32. 
 
 " " quominus, 146. 
 
 i J?es for neuter adj., 4, n. 2. 
 ! Resipere w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 j Resistere w. dat., 32. 
 Respondere w. dat., 32. 
 JResto* w. ut, 200. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 197 
 
 Retinens w. gen., 49. 
 Reum facer e vv. gen., 53. 
 Reus w. gen., 53, n. 1. 
 Rex in abh abs., 214. 
 Ridere w. ace, 16, n. 2,4. 
 Rogare w. subj. alone, 202. 
 
 " " two ace., 20. 
 
 " " w£, 198. 
 Rudis w. gen., 48. 
 Rus, 24, n. 7. 
 
 Sa^Z, v. to be, used personally, 14, 
 
 n.4. 
 Salutari vv. two nom., 13. 
 Sapere w. ace, 16, n.2. 
 Satiare w. abl., 62. 
 &t£25 w. gen., 45. 
 
 " esse w. ger. in do, 224. 
 
 « es£ w. perf. inf., 179, n. 3. 
 
 " habere w. perf. inf., 179, n. 3. 
 Saturare w. abl., 62. 
 Satus w. abl., 57. 
 Saucius w. abl., 58. 
 Saying , v. of, w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Scatere w. abl., 62. 
 Scire w. acc.w. inf., 186. 
 Scribere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " ut, 198, n. 1. 
 Secernere w. prep., 66. 
 Securus w. gen , 48, n. 1. 
 Secus w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Serf, 242, 243. 
 
 " w. ace. w. inf., 189. 
 
 u quia, but because, 144. 
 
 11 tfwod, but because, 144. 
 
 U torae/i, 243. 
 
 Seeing, v. of, w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Selling, v. of. 52, 60, n. 4. 
 Smelling, v. of, w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 Senex, 69, n. 7. 
 Sententia, 61, n. 1. 
 Sentire w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 Separating, v. of, w. gen., 66, n. 3. 
 Sequitur, hence it follows, 200, n. 1. 
 
 " w. w£, 200. 
 Servire w. ace, 16, n. 4. 
 
 44 " dat., 32. 
 Sharing, adj. of, w. gen., 48. 
 Showing, v. of, 21. 
 Sic omitted, 141, n. 1. 
 Similis, 31, n. 6. 
 
 M w. ac or atque, 238. 
 18 
 
 Similiter w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Simulac w. perf, 121. 
 Simulatque w. perf., 121. 
 Simul ut w. perf,, 121. 
 ! Sm, 242. 
 
 <Si?*e w. abl., 76. 
 I Sinere w. subj. alone, 202. 
 i 'S'i wow, 239. 
 i Sive, 242. 
 ! Sive-sive vv. ind., 134. 
 
 Solito aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 j Solitus in act. sense, 207, n. 3. 
 Solvere vv. abl., 66. 
 
 " " gen., 65, n. 3. 
 Somniare w. ace, 16, n. 4. 
 Space, extent of, 22. 
 Spe aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 Spes w. ger. in di, 222. 
 Spoliare w. abl., 62. 
 Spondere vv. ace w. inf., 186. 
 Stare vv. gen., 52. 
 
 " " abl. or in, 64, n. 6. 
 State of action or condition, 108. 
 Statuere vv. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " in and abl., 76, n. 1. 
 Statutum habeo, 207, n. 4. 
 Sterilis vv. gen., 48. 
 Still vv. comp., 86. 
 Stipare w. abl., 62. 
 Stipulatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Stomachari w. dat., 32. 
 Studere w. dat., 32. 
 
 " " ger. in do, 224. 
 
 " " w£, 197. 
 
 Studium vv. ger. in di, 222. 
 Studiosus w. gen., 48. 
 Suadere w. subj. alone, 202. 
 
 " " w£, 198. 
 Sub, v. compounded w., 16, 33. 
 " w. abl., 76. 
 Subesse vv. dat., 35. 
 Subire vv. ace, 16, n. 1, 37. 
 Subject, 3. 
 
 " an adj., 4, n. 2. 
 " an indecl. part of speech, 4. 
 11 a pronoun, 4. 
 " a sentence, 4. 
 a a subst., 4. 
 " consisting of several subst., 
 10, n. 1. 
 " not always expressed, 4, 
 n. 1. 
 
198 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Subjective gen., 43. 
 Subjunctive aft. compar. w. quam 
 qui, 156. 
 ** '** dignus, etc., 160. 
 
 " " indefinite expres- 
 
 sions, 157. 
 u " relative pron. and 
 
 adverbs, 153-161. 
 " in indir. questions, 152. 
 
 il " intermediate clauses, 
 
 148-151. 
 " mood, 135-173. 
 
 Sublime, 82. 
 
 Substantives connected by aut, 10, 
 
 n. 2. 
 " " " nee, 10, 
 
 n.-2. 
 " w. cum, 10, n. 3. 
 
 Substernere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Subter w. ace. and abl., 76. 
 Subvenire w. dat., 32. 
 Succensere w. dat., 32. 
 
 " " quod, 204. 
 
 Succumbere w. dat., 35. 
 Succurrere w. dat., 32. 
 Suffering, time and state of, 110. 
 Sufficere w. ger. in do, 224. 
 Sui, 90, 92. 
 " in ace. w. inf., 189, n. 1. 
 M " intermediate clauses, 151, 
 
 n. 1. 
 Summus, 78. 
 Sunt, qui w. subj., 157. 
 Super, v. compounded w., 16, 33, 
 
 36. 
 Super esse w. dat., 35. 
 Superest w. ut, 200. 
 Super gredi w. ace, 36. 
 Superstare w. dat., 35. 
 Superstes, 31, n. 5. 
 Supervadere w. ace, 36. 
 Supervenire w. dat., 35. 
 Supervivere w. dat., 35. 
 Supine, first, 228. 
 
 " second, 229. 
 -Ste^mies, 227-229. 
 Supplicare w. dat., 30. 
 Supponere w. dat. and ace, 34. 
 Supra, v. compounded w., 16. 
 Surprise^ v. of, w. quod, 204. 
 Suscipere w. fut. pass, part., 217, 
 
 n.4. 
 Suspicari w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 Suus, 91, 92. 
 
 " in ace w. inf., 189, n. 1. 
 
 " " intermediate clauses, 151, 
 n. 1. 
 Syntax, 1. 
 
 Tcedet w. ace and gen., 17, 51. 
 Talis w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Tarn omitted, 141, n. 1. 
 Tamquam w. subj., 163. 
 Tanti, 52. 
 Tantidem, 52. 
 
 Tantum abest, ut-ut, 141, n. 2. 
 " TioTi, 232. 
 " quod non, 232. 
 Tasting, v. of, w. ace, 16, n. 2. 
 Taxare w. gen., 52. 
 Teaching, v. of, w. two ace, 19. 
 Temperans w. gen., 49. 
 
 ", 32, n. 9. 
 Temperare mihi non possum, 145. 
 Tempore and in tempore, 69, n. 3. 
 Templum omitt., 246. 
 Tempus omitt. , 247. 
 
 " impendere, etc., w. ger. in 
 do, 244. 
 Tenax w. gen., 48. 
 Tenere me non possum w. ymTi, 
 
 145. 
 Tenses 108-128. 
 Tenus w. abl., 76. 
 Terra marique, 73. 
 Territus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Testatus in pass, sense, 207, n. 2. 
 Testa's in abl. abs., 214. 
 Thinking, v. of, w. ace w. inf., 
 
 186. 
 Time of action or condition, 108. 
 ", extent of, 22. 
 ", in how long, 72. 
 ", the point of, 69, 70, 71. 
 Timere, 32, n. 9, 143. 
 
 " w. ace w. inf., 143, n. 2. 
 Tolerans w. gen., 49. 
 Toller e w. abl., 62. 
 Totidem w. ac or atque, 238. 
 Towns, names of, 23, 24. 
 
 " " " w. adject., 24, 
 
 n. 5. 
 Tradere w. ace w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " fut. pass, part., 217, n.4. 
 Tradi used personally, 14, n. 4. 
 Trajicere w sup. , 228. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 199 
 
 Tranare w. ace, 36. 
 Trans, v. compounded w., 16. 
 Transducer e w. two ace, 19, n. 2. 
 Transire w. ace, 36. 
 Transjicere w. two ace, 19, n. 2. 
 Transmittere w. two ace, 19, n. 2. 
 Transvolare w. two ace, 36. 
 Tribuere w. two dat., 42. 
 Tumultu, 69, n. 6. 
 Turpis w. sup., 229. 
 
 *7&i, 121. 
 
 u w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Ubicunque w. ind., 133. 
 
 " ' ; gen., 45, n. 2. 
 
 Ubi primum w. perf, 121. 
 Ubiubi w. ind., 133. 
 tfZZws, 104, n. 1. 
 Ultimus, 73. 
 Ultumire, 228, n. 2. 
 C/wrfe w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Undecunque w. ind., 133. 
 Undeunde w. ind., 133. 
 Unwillingness, v. of, w. subj. 
 alone, 202, 
 C7rfo in apposition, 24, n. 4. 
 Urging, v. of, w. w£, 198. 
 Usquam w. gen., 46, n. 2. 
 Lfcw #ew^ w. ut, 200. 
 JZsms es£, 63, n. 2. 
 Usurpari w. two nom., 13. 
 £ft, 141. 
 
 " aft. cequum est, etc., 200, n. 4. 
 
 " " v. of fearing, 143. 
 
 " although, w. subj., 164. 
 
 " in exclamations, 195, n. 
 
 a o that, w. subj., 147. 
 
 " w. perf., 121. 
 
 " " v. of begging, etc., 198. 
 
 te a a cc endeavoring, aiming, 
 accomplishing, 197. 
 
 n a <e tc happening, and re- 
 maining, 200. 
 
 " primum, 121. 
 
 " posse w. superlative, 88. 
 
 u qui w. subj., 158, n. 1. 
 Utcunque w. ind., 133. 
 Uter, different from quis., 45, n. 5. 
 Uterque w. v. in. plural, 6, n. 4. 
 Uti, fut. pass. part, of, 221, n. I. 
 
 " w. abl., 64. 
 Uti w. ace, 64, n. 1* 
 
 Utilis w. ad, 31, n. 1. 
 
 « « sup., 229. 
 Utilius esse in ind., 131. 
 Utinam w. subj., 146. 
 
 c< ne w. subj., 147, n. 
 
 " non w. subj., 147, n. 
 Ut ne for ne, 142, n. 2. 
 " non, 142, n. 1. 
 Utpote qui w. subj., 158, n. 1. 
 Ut primum w. perf., 121. 
 " qui w. subj., 158, n. 1. 
 Utrum in double questions, 152, 
 
 n.2. 
 Utut w. ind., 133. 
 Uxor omitt. , 245. 
 
 Vacare w. abl., 62. 
 
 " " dat., 30. 
 Vacuus w. abl., 62, n. 1. 
 Va, 25, n.2. 
 
 Validus w. animi, 48, n. 3. 
 Valuing, v. of, 52, 60. 
 Vapulare, 57, n. 
 Vet, 236. 
 
 " -vel, 237, 242. 
 u w. superlative, 88. 
 Velim and velim ut for imper., 
 178, n. 
 Velle, 32, n. 9. 
 
 66 w. inf. pass., 194, n. 1. 
 
 « " subj. alone, 202. 
 Velut w. subj., 163. 
 
 t£ si w. subj., 163. 
 Vendere w. gen., 52. 
 Venire w. gen., 52. 
 
 44 " sup., 223. 
 
 " " two dat., 42. 
 Verb agr. w. subject., 10. 
 Verba sentiendi et declarandi, 186. 
 Verbal subst. w. gen. of pers. 
 pron , 43, n. 3. 
 Verbs compounded w. prep., 33-38. 
 Vereri, 143. 
 Verisimile est w. ace w. inf., 185. 
 
 « " ut, 200, n. 4. 
 
 Veritum est w. ace and gen., 17. 
 Vero aft. comp., 74, n. 3. 
 Vertere w. two dat., 42. 
 Verum, 242, 243. 
 
 " w. ace w. inf., 189. 
 
 " est w. ace w. inf., 185. 
 
 " " " ut, 200, n. 4. 
 
200 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Verumtamen, 243. 
 Vesci w. abl., 64. 
 
 " « ace, 64, n. 1. 
 Vespere and Vesperi, 69, n. 2. 
 Vestrum different from vestri, 45, 
 n. 6, 89. 
 Vetare w. ace. w. inf., 198, n. 3. 
 
 " " inf., 146, n. 
 
 " " quominus, 146. 
 Vetus w. gen., 48, n. 2. 
 Fia, 73, n. 3. 
 Vicem, 58, n. 3. 
 Vicinice aft. adv., 46, n. 2. 
 Vicinus w. dat., 31, n. 3. 
 Videlicitw. ace. w. inf., 189. 
 Videre w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 " " ut, 197. 
 
 " used impersonally, 14, n. 2. 
 Videri w. dat. of pers. pron., 14, 
 
 n. 3. 
 
 " " two nom., 13. 
 Vigere w. abl., 62. 
 
 Vigilare w. ace., 16, n. 3. 
 Vivere w. ace., 16, n. 3, 4. 
 Vix est w. quin, 145. 
 Vocare w. two ace., 21. 
 Vocari w. two nom., 13. 
 Vocative case, 77. \ 
 
 " for nom., 77, n. 4. 
 
 " w. interject., 25, n. 1. 
 Voluntas w. ger. in di, 222. 
 Firti, 53, n. 4. 
 Vovere w. ace. w. inf., 186. 
 
 Wanting, v. of, 62. 
 Willingness, v. of, w. subj. alone, 
 
 202. 
 Wishing, v. of, w. nom. or ace. w. 
 inf., 194. 
 " " « " ut, 182, n.2. 
 Wonder, v. of, w. ^od, 204. 
 
 Fe£ w. comp., 86. 
 
 ERRATUM. 
 
 Page 141 j last line, strike out occurrit. 
 
 <v 
 
I 
 
£ •% 
 
 
 
 V ^ 
 
 ,n 
 
 w 
 
 
 
HHHi 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 USUI